JP7456768B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2015-016110A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). Note that the present invention corresponds to original invention 54 among original inventions 1 to 55 described later.
The present invention (30th embodiment)
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
A predetermined electronic component (main CPU 530g) having a calculation function is mounted on the control board,
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A first sticker (management sticker 551) on which a second two-dimensional code (551a) is printed is pasted on the surface of the board case,
A third two-dimensional code (530k) is attached to the surface of the control board,
The contrast between the color of the first two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the contrast between the color of the second two-dimensional code and the background color of the first seal,
The contrast between the color of the first two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the contrast between the color of the third two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the control board.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view illustrating how medals inserted from the medal slot pass through the insertion sensor in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power outage occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating on/off of the input sensor using a time chart in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram when medals are ejected from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing how the payout sensor is turned on (detected)/off (non-detected) when medals are sent out from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). In the first embodiment (C), it is a diagram showing on/off of the payout sensor in a time chart. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in a second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case housing a main control board. (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 2 of the gate trace. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) shows when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state in which the stop button is pressed to the deepest position, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released from being pressed and the detection sensor changes from on to off. FIG. 7 is a time chart showing the relationship between the movement of a stop button and the excitation state of a motor in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level, (a) shows power off after main program startup, and (b) shows power off before main program startup. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing the state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the hopper disk has rotated more advanced than in (a) before coming into contact with the movable shaft; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device that is moved by being pushed by the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge situation of medals from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation|movement of the main control board, the driving state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the discharge timing of a medal in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed, it is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board, (c ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special combinations (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used commonly by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used both in RB inside and BB inside in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example 2 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing setting value display LEDs. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM. 2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating the concept of a difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a difference counter value and an advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. This is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. This is a flowchart showing the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. A flowchart showing the favorable zone transition processing in step S347 of Figure 44. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46. 42 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; 51 is a flowchart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; It is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. 53. 11 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing the sub-difference number counter management process in the eleventh embodiment, which is a continuation of the flowchart in FIG. 56 . In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of a composition including a reel and a stop switch in a 13th embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B). In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in 14th Embodiment (C). In the fourteenth embodiment (C), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (C), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (D). In the fourteenth embodiment (D), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (D), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (E). In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a front view showing an outline of a composition including a reel, an operation instruction lamp, and a stop switch in a 14th embodiment (F). In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (B). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram seen from the front of a medal selector, a chute passage 48, and a chute sensor 49 in a 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the passage formation member in 17th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage forming member in a 17th embodiment. It is a left side view of the passage forming member in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing main storage areas of RWM explained in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a time chart (Example 1) showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5 in the 18th embodiment. 23 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of an external signal 4 and an external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 1) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. 344. 12 is a flowchart (Example 2) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 3) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a 19th embodiment (A). In the 19th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time to be described later. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the back side. It is a block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the flow of startup after turning on the power of the Pachinko game machine. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. 100. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a state in which the main control board is housed in the board case. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, viewed from the front. 1 is a front view showing the main control board housed in the board case as viewed from the rear (back) side. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional view showing the fitted state of the upper case and the lower case, in which (a) shows the temporarily fitted state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows the fully fitted state (after sliding movement). . FIG. 7 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall viewed from the lower case side in a temporarily fitted state. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which a harness is connected to a connector of a main control board. FIG. It is a front view showing the harness and its connector terminal in detail. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case of the board case, the cover, the setting key insertion slot, and the setting change (reset) switch. It is a front view of a Pachinko game machine in a 23rd embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko game machine in a 23rd embodiment seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 12 is a front view of the right base member in the twenty-third embodiment with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the right base member, seen from the right side, with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the right base member in the twenty-third embodiment with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed. FIG. 12 is an enlarged front upper part view of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 12 is an enlarged upper perspective view of the right base member viewed from the left side with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of the upper left side of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment; This is an enlarged view of the upper bottom surface of the right base member in the 23rd embodiment with the upper frame lamp cover removed. 120 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. 117 is a front view of the right base member in a state in which the upper frame lamp cover, the upper part of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp board are removed in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 116. FIG. FIG. 7 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member in a twenty-third embodiment, with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached. FIG. 7 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a lens portion of a right frame lamp cover in a twenty-third embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when the pachinko game machine loses, and (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 when the pachinko game machine loses. In the 23rd embodiment, it is a diagram explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment. 123 is a diagram showing a modified example of the cross section taken along line AA in FIG. 119 . FIG. FIG. 12 is an external perspective view of a slot machine according to a modification of the twenty-third embodiment when viewed from the front side (player side). In a modification of the 23rd embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 for non-winning in the slot machine, and (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 for non-winning in the slot machine. It is. It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine in 24th embodiment (A). It is an exploded perspective view of a part of the title display part of the Pachinko game machine in 24th Embodiment (A) seen from the front side (player side). A block diagram of a pachinko game machine in the 24th embodiment (A). In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), (1) is a diagram showing the display content of the menu screen, and (2) is a diagram showing the display content of the brightness adjustment mode. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level from level 1 to level 5 and the brightness of each LED of a title display section, a right frame lamp section, and a left frame lamp section in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level from level 1 to level 5 and the brightness of each LED in the title display section, the right frame lamp section, and the left frame lamp section in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine in the modification of 24th embodiment (A). It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine in the modification of 24th embodiment (A). It is a front view of the slot machine in 24th embodiment (B). FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the front door of the slot machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) when viewed from the front side (player side). It is an exploded perspective view of the right frame lamp part of the slot machine in 24th embodiment (B) seen from the front side (player side). In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing the textured part formed on the surface of the lens part included in the title display part, and (2) is a diagram showing the textured part formed on the surface of the lens part included in the right frame lamp part. It is a figure which shows the textured part formed on the surface. In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a plan cross-sectional view of the slot machine, (2) is a diagram showing a first modification of the A section, and (3) is a diagram of a modification of the A section. FIG. A block diagram of a slot machine in twenty-fourth embodiment (B). It is a front view of the slot machine in the modification of 24th embodiment (B). In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing a first modification of the textured portion, and (2) is a diagram showing a second modification of the textured portion. A front view of a pachinko game machine in the 25th embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko game machine in a 25th embodiment seen from the front side (player side). In the 25th embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing each LED included in the special symbol display device, and (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped when the jackpot lottery is lost. (3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped when a jackpot is achieved in the jackpot lottery. In the 25th embodiment, (1) to (8) are diagrams showing lighting patterns during fluctuation of special symbols. In the 25th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing each LED while the special symbol is changing and stopping when the jackpot lottery is lost with the hold "0". In the 25th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing each LED while the special symbol is changing and stopped when the jackpot lottery is lost with a pending "4". In a modified example of the 25th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing each LED while the special symbol is changing and stopped when the jackpot lottery is lost with a pending "4". It is a figure showing each LED provided on the main control board of the slot machine in a 26th embodiment. In the 26th embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the left reel detects an index, (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the middle reel detects an index, and (3) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the right reel detects an index. This is a time chart showing an example of the operation in the twenty-sixth embodiment when the previous game ended with the reel sensor of the left reel detecting the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance. This is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended with the reel sensors of all the reels not detecting the index in the 26th embodiment, and the current game started under this situation. This is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the previous game ended in a state where the reel sensors of all reels had not detected the index in the 26th embodiment and a current game is started under this situation. It is a figure showing various lead wires, a relay board 300, and a main control board 50 in a 27th embodiment. (1) is a front view of the board case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), and (2) is a side view of the board case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A). FIG. 162(1) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 162(1). FIG. 7 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a board case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A). (1) is an explanatory diagram of the parting line on the front cover of the board case of the 28th embodiment (A), and (2) is an explanatory diagram of the parting line on the rear cover of the board case of the 28th embodiment (A). FIG. It is a sectional view of a board case of a 28th embodiment (B). (1) is a front view of the slot machine and board case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), and (2) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 167(1). FIG. 167 is a sectional view of the slot machine and board case of the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 167(2). FIG. 7 is an external perspective view of a board case according to a twenty-ninth embodiment. (1) is an explanatory diagram when the air hole opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector in the 29th embodiment, and (2) is an explanatory diagram when the air hole opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector in the 29th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a case where an opening is made only at a position corresponding to the height of . (3) is an explanatory diagram when the air hole reaches a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and (4) is an explanatory diagram of the twenty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram in the case where the air holes are opened only at positions corresponding to the height of the lead wires in the embodiment. (5) is an explanatory diagram when the air hole reaches a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector in the 29th embodiment, and (6) is an explanatory diagram in the 29th embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a case in which the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the harness-side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire in the embodiment. (7) is an explanatory diagram of the board-side terminal and harness-side terminal in the case where the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire in the 29th embodiment; (8) is an explanatory diagram when the air hole extends from a position corresponding to the height of the harness-side connector to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (1) is a front view of the board case of the 30th embodiment, and (2) is a bottom view of the board case of the 30th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals through the medal slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" is different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "bet number" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets on medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).

A "reserved bet" refers to a player operating a bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of his/her credited medals to play a game, within the range that can be bet for that game.
The "automatic bet" refers to a process in which, when a replay wins, the slot machine 10 automatically bets the number of medals that was bet in the previous game through the control process.
Here, the display of a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination (meaning that the symbol combination stops on a winning line; the same applies below) is referred to as a "winning minor winning combination." On the other hand, in the "Rules for the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules"), when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed, it is interpreted as the operation of a condition device related to replay, and is not a "winning combination." However, in this application (this specification, etc.), a replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination of a replay."
The term "settlement" refers to paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when a settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "gaming medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed type (ECO) gaming machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when you insert money (banknotes) into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and some or all of that electronic information can be used to play games on a gaming machine. Credit can be placed on a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal notation is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary notation, and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal notation. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, the final symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. .

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the active line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to a game that has a payout or a large number of payouts in a game where the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Refers to an operation mode in which symbol combinations are stopped, symbol combinations that move (promote) to an advantageous RT are stopped, or symbol combinations that do not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT are stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"Games in which the game results are advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" are, for example, games in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. This corresponds to the winning game). Although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins; games in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT changes depending on the type of winning replay. This also applies to cases where

The "instruction function" means a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the pressing order bells shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. However, instead of this, it is assumed that depending on the order of pressing, there will be either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a missed prize (non-winning).
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "4", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode since it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not leave out any winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous section approaches the upper limit (2400 (D)), but there is still room in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that when the push order bell is won, the push order for winning a 3-card winning combination or a 4-card winning combination is notified as described above, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ), and refers to a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated). It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section where the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the contents of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the AT may notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 at all times (at 100%), In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

Furthermore, various settings can be made regarding the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first option is to set "advantageous section=AT". In this case, winning in the advantageous section and winning in AT are equivalent. Then, AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. Further, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a precursor after transitioning to an advantageous section, the transition may be made to the actual precursor, and after a predetermined number of games of the actual precursor are completed, the transition may be made to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous section or after a transition to an advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery whether to use a real omen or a false omen, and if it is determined to be a real omen, the transition to AT may be made after the main omen ends. . Furthermore, when it is determined that the false sign is false, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the false sign ends, or the advantageous zone may be shifted to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT ends but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when starting the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a lottery etc. related to the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined (by lottery, etc.) whether to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, if a predetermined end condition is set for an advantageous section, and the predetermined end condition for an advantageous section is met, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in AT) is reached, at that point One example is to end the advantageous section at .

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)" or that the advantageous section clear counter (number of games played during the advantageous section) described later is " 1500 (D)''. When any of these conditions is met, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If the combination is stopped and displayed) and there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that gives the maximum payout) is selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that wins a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start setting process for the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing an initialization process for the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

Examples of "processing related to favorable zones" include the following processing.
1) Drawing lots for (transition to) advantageous zones 2) Updating (subtracting, clearing) the advantageous zone clear counter
3) Update the difference counter (calculate, clear)
4) Updating the advantageous zone type flag 5) Controlling the advantageous zone display LED 77 (updating the advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining number of games becomes "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (a specification that ends the AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), update the AT difference number counter (subtract, add, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that processing related to advantageous sections (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to advantageous sections), if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the next game will be an advantageous section. Therefore, in a game in which an advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to an advantageous section) is executed and an advantageous section is won, notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed.
However, there is no problem in performing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous section and AT (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display device") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that displays which item it is among the items using a predetermined symbol, etc., and a two-digit ratio segment (LED that displays the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (7U.) or designated accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a flashing display, and when it is greater than "175,000" the number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in the pressing sequence displayed by the activation of the instruction function. For example, in FIG. 58 described below, when 10 bells corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
In contrast, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order from that displayed, and one bell is won as in the example of Figure 58, "1" is added to the instruction-included device counter.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is pressed in a different order from the displayed order and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), the instruction-included combination counter is not incremented. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the pressing order bell is won, and the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order using images or sounds.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in ``6000'' number of games is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, "accessories" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, as well as second-class special accessories (CB), also referred to as MB (2BB). Second-class accessories continuous operation device. CB ), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. do.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Furthermore, it is stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, the settings should be set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section lottery, and the setting should be set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section lottery is approximately 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to have a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous section lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. Is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the interior of BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform AT during this advantageous section.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of a slot machine (player type gaming machine). Then, the base value in real time (during measurement) for each ``60,000'' out balls (``base value'' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls) and the ``60,000 out balls''. ” The base values of the first, second, and third base values are displayed sequentially for each item. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", and the two previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral equipment for playing the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection section into which signals from operating switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection section through which signals are sent to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the peripheral devices toward the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. The controller controls the drive and pays out when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being installed inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
Note that the movement of the medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be explained later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, inside the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is used to permit/prohibit the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. In contrast, when the insertion of medals is permitted, it forms a medal passage for guiding medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side, and an actuator for driving the switching member, etc.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, an input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the input sensor 44 is composed of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44 is activated by the other input sensor 44b. It is configured to be detected by Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of input sensors 44 are turned on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). This refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the off state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (therefore also referred to as a "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (therefore, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body (the part pressed by the player) of the stop switch 42 will be referred to as a "stop button 42a."

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operating switch and/or around or near the operating body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation reception of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch is emitted in blue. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/disapproval state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop has finished, and when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (the fourth embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. This embodiment includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (maximum number, specified number).
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Note that the prescribed number is predetermined, for example, depending on when the accessory is not activated/when it is activated. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated, etc. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, it is possible to insert two medals, and by operating it three times, it is possible to insert three medals. Also, when the specified number is 3, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of winnings won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and, like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may display "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game where the push order is notified during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error details, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (two or more indexes may be used). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35 from a dispensing port, and a dispensing motor 36 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal input port 47 are stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. Then, when a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) is moved by the medal. The dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, when the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected to be on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Note that the details of these operations will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control it to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to display the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the result determined by the means.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, the "drawing of winning numbers by the prize drawing means 61" is the same as the "internal drawing" in the Entertainment Business Law Regulations (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "Rules"). The lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the prize lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when a push order bell or a push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay double win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 is for selecting the performance group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is sent to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. The effect group number, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

In addition, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number for each game, it is possible to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during the AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 enables the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are stopped so as to be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are stopped so as not to stop symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reels 31" refers to the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 actually stop, or the amount of rotation of the reels 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to . As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, excluding a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined valid line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbols of the combination corresponding to the winning number are controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that symbol combinations of winning combinations that do not correspond to the winning numbers are not stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. Based on a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination on the reel 31 that has stopped on the pay line corresponds to any winning combination when the reel 31 stops.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42, and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line before the reel 31 actually stops, or determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on an active line after the reel 31 stops.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) required for the performance to be output by the sub-control board 80 .
Control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning role, etc.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during play and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance unidirectionally to the sub-control board 80 via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to peripheral equipment for effects, such as the effect lamp 21 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data etc. taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the performance.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs for holding a lottery related to a performance, various data, etc. as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs, and are lit in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. Note that the production lamp 21 includes a back lamp that is placed on the inner circumference side of each reel 31 and illuminates the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from the display window) from behind. These include a fluorescent light that illuminates the symbols on the reels 31 from above, a frame lamp that is placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10, and that blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the interior of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Furthermore, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 depending on their positions. The position M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal placing portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position M1, when viewed from the front, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M is in contact with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4, which will be described later), it is assumed that the entire approximately square portions indicated as input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. (This is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

Further, the position M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer visible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M overlaps with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b. For example, if it is assumed that the player releases the medal M when it is at the position M1, the medal M will fall from the position M1. Therefore, at position M2, it is in a state where it has been released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
Note that the "upstream side" refers to the medal input port 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the input sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, the order is M1→M2→M3→M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M when it is located at M2.
Furthermore, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a. Further, the position M4 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b (off).

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion where the player inserts the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when betting or crediting the medal M as a game medium. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard part 47a and a medal placement part 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (a curvature slightly larger than the periphery of the medal M) extending perpendicularly to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of stacked medals M (up to about 10 medals) can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medals M come into contact (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 2, the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. In a state where two medals M are piled up, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the thickness is the same as one medal M, the medal M is formed so as to flow down from the opening. For this reason, the player may, for example, place a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placement part 47b, press the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard part 47a, and increase the pressing force. By weakening it, it is possible to drop the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When a medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage within the medal selector. Inside the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided. Further, the above-mentioned blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the input sensor 44a).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifling act, and detects the medal M for a predetermined period of time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is determined that it is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has passed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and then stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the medal M has passed illegally.

When the medal M flows down within the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is on), the blocker 45 forms a medal flow path such that the medal M can be detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have been moved from the upstream side to the input sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal path.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 moves in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing in FIG. This creates an opening (pitfall) in the medal path. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal path (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that has fallen from this opening is returned to the medal return slot (not shown) without being detected by the input sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of games has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals can be bet or credited, so the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state. As a result, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal insertion port 47 in this state, it will fall from the opening and be returned to the medal return port.
In contrast, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so that the medal M flowing down the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and can move toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the medal M can be guided to the input sensors 44a and 44b, and , when the blocker 45 is in the off state, it is only necessary that the medal M can be sent to the medal return slot without being detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located upstream of the blocker 45, and even if the blocker 45 is in the off state, the passage sensor 46 may be located at a position where it can detect the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. That's fine. In addition, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when it is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when the medal M is moved.

The input sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance apart. First, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a can detect the medal M (turns from OFF to ON). When the medal M further flows down, the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off). By determining the on/off timing of these two input sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position M4, it is no longer detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the medal M is at the M2 position, that is, the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when looking at the medal selector from the front, and the medal M is at the M4 position, that is, the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. The time it takes to reach (the movement locus is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set as time T2. Note that this is the value when the medal M is located at M1, the hand is released from the medal M (at an initial speed of "0"), and the medal is released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal path curves from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced and the medal M moves toward the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the input sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or a power outage occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as a supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power outage occurs (an event in which the power supply is cut off) occurs at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the voltage drops to the power outage detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when a power outage occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when a power outage is detected (time S12; power outage detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power-off detection circuit) is provided. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the power-off detection level V1, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example in FIG. 3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the main control board 50 is configured so that the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. It is set to .

Furthermore, the detection of a power outage is executed in the interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when a power outage is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power outage process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is below the power-off detection level V1 in two consecutive interrupt processes, and it is detected that a power-off has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt processing, power-off processing is executed.
Note that in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected, and when a power outage is detected, the process proceeds to power off processing (without proceeding to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Furthermore, the process of saving the stack pointer, setting the power-off processing completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not the power has been turned off normally), executing the checksum of the RWM53, and disabling writing of the RWM53, etc. After being executed sequentially, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). By design, this reset wait state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed in the next interrupt process after the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected (time S12), and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases his/her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position M1. Note that in this case, the medal M falls at an initial velocity of "0". Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power is cut off is made to coincide with the time when the medal M reaches the position M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when it is positioned at M4 is defined as T2, but similarly in FIG. 3, time T2 has elapsed from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 It is assumed that later, the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, the power outage process is executed before medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects medal M. Therefore, if a power outage occurs at the moment when medal M is positioned at M2, that medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. For this reason, that medal M does not pass normally through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, although that medal M is swallowed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is not executed after the power outage occurs (after time S11). This makes it possible to eliminate the possibility of a bet or credit process being executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), when the medal M is located just before M4 in FIG. 2 (the medal M (after the medal M has passed the position M3), the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Furthermore, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), the medal M is located upstream from the position M3 in FIG. At this time, the medal M is not detected by either the input sensor 44a or the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is defined as time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 is turned off by the time when the medal M reaches M3 as the power cut-off process is executed. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the input sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return slot.

Here, the differences between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, if a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b by the time the power outage is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power outage occurs, a medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process) is executed. However, it is not preferable to execute a medal addition process after a power outage occurs. This is because all processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped promptly after the power outage occurs.
Therefore, by configuring as in the first embodiment (A), even if a power outage occurs at the moment when a player inserts a medal M into the medal insertion port 47 and the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), the process of adding "1" to the medal is not executed, thereby improving the functionality of the slot machine 10.

<First embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power-off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the advancing (downward) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4(a) shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b remains off. Note that this position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. It becomes like this. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In addition, in FIG. 4, even if the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the input sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be placed on the front side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 4, or may be placed on the back side.

When the medal M advances further and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pi (φ)) in the general specification, and 30 mm (so-called 30 pi (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4(c) can be achieved. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. This determines whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time during which both input sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the input sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off at the moment. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time at which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)) is S22. Furthermore, the time at which the input sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(d)) is S23. Furthermore, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (between times S21 and S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tb during which both insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M (between time S22 and S23) is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts) (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is outside this range, it determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when it is out of this range, it is determined as a medal passage error.
If all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the passage of the medal M is determined to be normal, and if at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
Here, the input monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes normally through the input sensors 44a and 44b (both input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). This is a counter that is incremented by "-1" when the switch turns from "on" to "off" (therefore, at time S24). That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the input sensors 44a and 44b detect passage of the medal, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. However, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, if the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to ``0'' to ``2'', when the input monitoring counter becomes ``3'' or higher, the main control board 50 may determine that there is a medal jam error. It will be done.
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 controls the insertion of the medal. Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed. Specifically, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to "1".

Furthermore, at that point, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
Note that when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thereby, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

5 shows the timing when a power outage occurs and when a power outage is detected, in addition to the on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, and both examples show a case where a power outage occurs when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (time S21).
In Example 1, the power outage is detected after a time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power outage occurred. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, in the case where the insertion sensor 44a detects a medal M at the moment when the power outage occurs, the process of adding "1" to the medal M has already been performed when the power outage process is started.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
Further, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
In example 1, the power-off process is always set to be executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power-off (time S21) until the power-off processing is executed is set to be equal to or longer than 114 interrupts.

If you set it up as described above, even if a power outage occurs at the moment the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power outage process is executed after the medal M is added by "1", so the medal M is bet or credited normally. This makes it possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, in Example 2, contrary to Example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set to be "T1<T3".
As described above, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 is the minimum time and corresponds to four interrupts. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute the power-off process within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of a power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power outage (time S21) to the power outage process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power outage occurs at time S21, the power outage process will be executed before time S24. becomes possible.

When the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (bet or credit) is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the process of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as explained in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M etc. is not performed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power cutoff.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (ejected from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on/off status each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M The main control board 50 determines that the medal has not been paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by the hopper motor 36. A plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter into the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk is rotated and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are ejected one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening after the medal M is ejected.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. The fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are both components of a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that moves back and forth every time one medal M is paid out. In the unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7, which will be described later). It is biased toward the 38a side. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
Note that when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 is acting on the medals M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. When a pushing force in the F1 direction is applied to the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

Thereby, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port side) in the figure. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line (initial position) in FIG. In the figure, the movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatably movable around the central axis, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the diagram.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise by the spring 39b in FIG. 7), it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, dispensing sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a), its tip is being detected by the dispensing sensor 37a. ing.
In addition, in FIG. 7, the housings of the sensors 37a and 37b are both shown, and the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensors) are not shown. In this point, it is different from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, which show only the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensor).

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it detects the movable piece 39a, and is in an off state (for example, in FIG. 7(b)) when it no longer detects the movable piece 39a. It is set to be.
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is in an on state (for example, in FIG. 7(c)) when it detects the movable piece 39a. is set to .
In the state shown in FIG. 7A, the dispensing sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the dispensing sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

As explained in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When the movable piece 39a moves, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out from inside the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a no longer detects the movable piece 39a, and is therefore turned off. Moreover, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37b, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further discharged from position M2, the force biasing the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, and the movable shaft 38b returns to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6. The returning force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. 7. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, and the tip of the movable piece 39a goes outside the payout sensor 37b, which no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. This returns to the state shown in FIG. 7(a) (initial state). In the state shown in FIG. 7(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. Furthermore, when it returns to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the on state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is as shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is designated as Td.

The dispensing sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the dispensing sensor 37b continues to be in the ON state until time S33, at which time the dispensing sensor 37b turns OFF. This state is shown in FIG. 7(d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is defined as Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to that of FIG. 7(a) (initial position), and the dispensing sensor 37a turns ON. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is defined as Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off state time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that there is a medal payout error when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a turns off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt, then the payout sensor 37b turns on. If there is no medal, it is considered a medal payout error.

Further, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to be greater than or equal to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is in the off state is monitored, and if the time Te is not within the above predetermined time range, , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is determined. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, as in FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power-off to the power-off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example was explained in which power-off is detected at interrupt 20, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), the When T1 has elapsed, the power off is detected and the power off process is executed.

Here, the maximum time (normally) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, so the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a power outage (power outage, etc.) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the occurrence of the medal payout process and the power cutoff, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), even if a power failure occurs during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power outage occurs when the medal payout process is started, that is, at time S31 in FIG. 8, the power outage is detected after the medal payout process is finished, and the process shifts to the power outage process. Therefore, the power-off process is not executed, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being canceled before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

Note that if the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set so that "T1<T4".

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate marks formed on the board case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by a mold designer during mold manufacturing solely from the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark has an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is drilled aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually distinguishable (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is located directly below the gate trace, the main CPU 55 could be accessed by drilling a hole in the gate trace and passing a wire through the hole (e.g., if the main CPU 55 is placed directly under the gate trace). There was a risk that it would be carried out. In particular, if the gate mark is shaped to be thinner than other parts, it will be easier to drill holes than other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate marks on the board case are used to prevent theft from being carried out.

FIG. 9 is an exploded external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58).
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded from transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually and clearly confirmed from outside the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), set value display LED 73, etc. It is installed. Note that many electronic components such as the above-mentioned RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 includes LEDs for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the input sensors 44a and 44b. has been done. Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED turns on (lights up).

In addition, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and are turned off when the operation switch is turned off. It may be configured so that it lights up.

Furthermore, two LEDs are provided for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, one for the bet switch 40a and one for the bet switch 40b, and are off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and when the bet switch 40 is operated, The LED lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b have a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor, and are off when no medals are detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, the administrator operates the start switch 41, for example, and checks whether a failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether or not the start switch 41 is malfunctioning (energized). can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

The above-mentioned fault checking LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (when the settings are not being changed or checked). Alternatively, the front door may be opened, a door open error occurs, and then a specified operation is performed to check for a fault. Furthermore, the LED may be turned on/off at all times (even when the settings are being changed or checked) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

Further, on the main control board 50, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.). Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four inner corners of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by passing screws through the screw holes 50a and tightening them to the bosses 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed into a shape that allows them to fit together (the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown in FIG. 9). Furthermore, crimped portions 57a are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the figure. Note that the specific shapes and detailed shapes of the crimped portions 57a and 58b are not shown in FIG. 9.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulked using the caulked parts 57a and 58a, the upper cover must be destroyed (or plastically deformed) at least in part at the caulked parts 57a and 58a. The cover 57 and lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two locations on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Note that in the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but the gate marks 57b are not limited to this and may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue used to pour resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is divided vertically in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the top surface, not the side surface, as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in consideration of the cutting off of the protrusion at the gate mark during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate mark on the outside.
For the above reasons, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the surface visible in Fig. 9). Note that, in Fig. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided in two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided in one place, or in three or more places.

Furthermore, when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold from the gate, if the resin (hot water) does not spread uniformly within the mold and there is a difference in cooling time, there is a risk that the molded product will warp and deform. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly within the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at multiple locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is illustrated as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in figure (a), and (c) shows example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in figure (a) shows. Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views for ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, from the two gate marks 57b to the upper cover 57 in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (just below), It is set so that the model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are not located. As described above, although the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above these.

The reason for arranging the gate traces 57 as described above is as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary to visually check whether the main control board 50 has been tampered with or not. In particular, it is necessary to check whether the main CPU 55, etc. (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) is compliant and whether it has been altered by fraud. Further, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 housing the main control board 50 therein is attached to the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, on the inside of the back surface. This is to install it in a position where the numerical values displayed by the setting value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, the visibility of the gate mark 57 may be obstructed. In particular, information displayed (printed, etc.) on the top surface of the main CPU 55, etc., can be visually viewed without being hindered in visibility.

The entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, so visibility is not completely hindered even directly below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) of Figure 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface, so it is true that the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is reduced (worse than a flat surface). Also, in the cross section of Figure 10(b), the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, so it may turn white due to the stress caused when the resin is cut. Therefore, in this case as well, visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent smooth surface with no irregularities except for the gate marks 57b, even if a hole is made by, for example, tribbing, it can be easily noticed with the naked eye.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is drilled and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been drilled. For this reason, there is a possibility that a crime may be carried out using the gate trace 57b.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate trace 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are located in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes easier to tamper with the hole. Therefore, unless the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, making it difficult to stealth.

In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information in checking for fraud, so in order to make it easier to confirm (read) the model number, the model number is displayed. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent the model number display from being tampered with by drilling a hole in the gate mark 57b and accessing the inside of the board case 56, The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the model number display.

Furthermore, regarding the setting value display LED 73, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value when changing or confirming settings. Further, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, accessory ratio, etc. are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b was not placed directly above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same way as above, in order to make it difficult for the LEDs inside the board case 56 to be accessed by making a hole in the gate trace 57b using the gate trace 57b and to make it difficult for the LEDs to be stolen, it is possible to make a hole in the gate trace 57b. Avoid placing the gate trace 57b on top.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned fault confirmation LED, the manager of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch to check whether the fault confirmation LED corresponding to that operation switch is lit or not, so in order to improve visibility, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the fault confirmation LED. As above, by not locating the fault confirmation LED vertically (directly below) the gate mark 57b, cheating is made more difficult.

In FIG. 10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate trace 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is left as a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed into a protrusion shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a cylindrical depression 57c at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut with a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface made by a cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: one is to automatically cut the border using a molding machine during injection, and the other is to cut it in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly and difficult to process the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d almost zero and make the surface smooth. Therefore, even if the protrusion 57d has some height remaining, a recess 57c is formed so that it does not protrude above the outer top surface of the upper cover 57. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, an assembly worker from being injured by the protrusion 57d when touching the upper cover 57.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 becomes thinner by that amount. As described above, if there is even a thin part, there is a possibility that it becomes easy to make a hole in the recessed part 57c and access the inside of the board case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the outer side of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thinner at the recessed portion 57c. There is. Unless the protruding portion 57e is provided to provide a portion where the wall thickness is reduced, it may be difficult to drill a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thinner, but also functions as a dimple (reservoir) during molding. In FIG. 10(b), when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate of the mold (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d), if the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) The flow may change suddenly and become unable to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (pool of hot water) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of resin (hot water) will be less likely to change suddenly. (hot water) will be able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e has various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoid cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent this.

In addition, in terms of visibility in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, a smooth underside of the gate mark 57 is better than an uneven shape. Therefore, in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b, the shape of FIG. 10(b) is better than the shape of FIG. 10(c). In addition, compared to the shape of FIG. 10(c), the shape of FIG. 10(b) does not require the formation of a portion equivalent to the protrusion 57e in the mold, and therefore the shape of the mold can be simplified (reduced costs).

Also, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. As described above, providing the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product is more convenient in terms of molding.
When the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned vertically to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to make it impossible to access the pins of the main CPU 55, etc. by drilling a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is shaped as shown in Figure 10(c), the protrusion 57e in Figure 10(c) will face the pin side of the main control board 50, but it goes without saying that the pin protruding from the underside of the main control board 50 and the protrusion 57e will be formed so as not to interfere with (contact with) each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate trace 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that it does not occur. In particular, in the case of the gate marks 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), part of the gate marks 57b and 58b (the recessed part 57c) becomes thinner, but the thinner part is the upper cover. By arranging the lower cover 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions where they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent areas that are likely to be targeted from overlapping.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark on the other cover can be determined by simply looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b on the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). This is related to processing when communication is restored after the communication has been completed, or when communication has failed due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs a performance based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the performance in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, making communication impossible. Possible causes include poor contact and radio wave glitches. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives commands from the main control board 50, the presentation stops in its current state. Furthermore, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 will not be able to proceed with the game (operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42). etc.), the command transmission process is continued to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the current performance state.
Note that even if there is a disconnection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, for example, if AT is in progress, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function to display the obtained number display LED 78 in the order of pressing. Display instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can view the press order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct press order.
Furthermore, the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 and the performance content (correct press order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, so that the information on both pieces is inconsistent. When this happens, you can know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, in a case where a disconnection occurs during the "N" game and communication is restored during the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 can now receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Sometimes, it is not possible to suddenly switch the performance to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command notifying the start of the game), and the sub-control board 80 indicates that the "N+1" game has started. This is because it cannot be determined. For this reason, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, there is a risk of giving a misunderstanding to the player depending on the content of the performance.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, we do our best to avoid giving the player a misunderstanding, while giving the performance a sense of discomfort. Outputs a performance that appears to be non-existent.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as "main operation" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (described as "sub-display" in FIG. 11) in the third embodiment. ) is a diagram showing the relationship between pattern 1 (example 1) and pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication becomes impossible (wire breakage occurs) during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.
Furthermore, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number of bets are validly placed. Furthermore, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after a specified number of bets have been placed. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" refers to an effect that displays an image of the correct press order in a game in which the player wins a press order bell or a press order replay, for example. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect that informs that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left center display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and indicates that the second stop switch to be operated is on the left and the third stop switch 42 to be operated is in the middle. It means a performance that informs people.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated for the "N" game, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of the winning combination, as described above. In this game, it is an example in which a push order bell is won in which the correct push order is "right, left, middle." In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT mode, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right left middle" to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a press order effect to the image display device 23 that displays the correct press order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays, on the acquisition number display LED 78, push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, center" (operation of instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player looks at the correct pressing order and operates the right stop switch 42 as a first stop (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs the effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 has stopped), and displays the right-left center display and the left center display (in addition, other Examples of the display include "-center left", "×center left", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (sub-disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes unavailable during the game.

The main control board 50 allows the game to proceed even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning). The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 were each operated (the left and middle reels 31 stopped) after a wire breakage occurred in the "N" game. ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game number is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the push order bell (or push order replay) in which "right, left, middle" is the correct push order is won. In addition, in the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of right, left, middle, but if a winning combination is won with the correct pressing order of right, left, middle. It is not limited to , but any winning lottery result may be used.

It should be noted that when the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order based on the pressing order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub control board 80 updates the effect as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as a effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game play is operated, but the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect that occurs when the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game play is operated. Since the second correct push order in the "N" game play is left, in this example, the operation was performed in the correct push order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct push order effect) and outputs the final center display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a performance corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a medium stop performance.
In addition, even if you win a role with a correct pressing order on the "N+1" game, and the correct pressing order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect will be output as described above. be done. In other words, in the "N+1" game, if the push order operated by the player is right, left, center, even if the push order corresponds to an incorrect push order, the push order will fail like pattern 2 described later. The performance is not output.

Furthermore, in the case of the "N+1" game, if the winning combination does not have a correct pressing order, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, center, then the above The same effect will be output. That is, even if the "N+1" game number does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) will display a message indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after communication is restored. When a command is received, a left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and a middle display is further output.

Next, when a bet for the “N+2” game is made and the start switch 41 is operated to start the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to “ N+2'' command corresponding to the start of the game number is transmitted. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands such as the production group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a press order effect and a display of the correct press order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 operates based on the command received from the main control board 50 (for the "N+1" game). The effect continues to be output, and when the ``N+2'' game starts, the effect is updated to the effect for the ``N+2'' game.
In addition, the main control board 50 may send a command for the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of coins acquired during AT. In such a case, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command for the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N" game, that is, while the wire is disconnected. ” The number of acquired coins at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and a command for the number of acquired coins is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display to show the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N+1" game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as pattern 1, but the timing of communication restoration is different from pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so their explanation will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left and middle, but communication is assumed to be restored after the second stop on the left.

Immediately before communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the "N" game number and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the "N+1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives a middle stop command while displaying the middle left display, it determines that the pressing order is incorrect and outputs a pushing order failure effect. Note that in the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, subsequent press order effects and the like are not output.

In addition, in the "N+1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pushing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop is performed, so that the right stop command is changed to the sub control. When transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output in the same way as above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left center display, if it receives the right stop command at this point, it means that it has received the same stop command twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is treated as a failure in the pressing order without giving an error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
Then, as in pattern 1, when the "N+2" game number is started, the command at the time of starting the "N+2" game number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 starts producing the "N+2" game number.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display for the "N" game are the same as pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after the communication is restored, a command for the left stop, which is the third stop, is sent to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" for the "N" game, if it receives a left stop command in this state, it determines that it is the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct effect), and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the third left stop. Next, when the game moves to the "N+2" game and a command for the start of the "N+2" game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80, upon receiving the command, switches to the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game. Therefore, the left stop presentation and center display that had been output up until that point are canceled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2" game is received while the center display is being output, no error notification or the like is issued, and the presentation for the start of the "N+2" game is output in accordance with the received command.

Pattern 4 is an example in which the remaining number of games during AT is displayed in the sub-display. Furthermore, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command indicating the remaining number of games for AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining games for AT. Note that during AT, the remaining number of games is not displayed alone, but is output together with the press order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game). Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
At the start of the "N" game, the sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50.
Then, if the wire is disconnected during the "N" game and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 will cause the sub Although the sub-control board 80 executes a process for transmitting a command for the number of remaining games (9 games) during AT to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to a disconnection). Therefore, for the "N+1" game, "10 remaining games" for the "N" game remain displayed.

Then, during the "N+1" game (after the middle left stop), the communication is restored, and when the game moves on to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 connects to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In contrast, a command indicating the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is sent. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display from the remaining 10 games to the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 4, but the "N" game is played with only one remaining AT game.
At the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games (one game remaining) during AT to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining two games (from the previous display of the remaining two games) to the display of the remaining one game.
If a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Although a command indicating that it is a game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display that there is one AT game remaining continues.

Further, when the sub control board 80 ends AT, it outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on the reception (at the start of the game) of a command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub control board 80 has not received the command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is only one AT game left is output.

Then, when the "N+1" game ends and the transition to the "N+2" game begins, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
When the AT ends, an image such as "Pachinko and Pachislot are gaming machines that can be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the next game (in the example of FIG. An example of this is to display the image at the start of the process.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection occurred in the "N" game until communication is restored, and "N+1 ” When communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the performance being output as the “N” game is output based on the command received in the “N+1” game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when the left stop command is received after communication is restored on the "N+1" game, regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 were actually operated in the correct pressing order, A press order effect will be output.

On the other hand, for example, in pattern 1, if a medium stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the pressing order of the effects currently being output, that is, the "N" game. Since the incorrect press order is used for the middle left display, the press order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 are actually operated in the correct press order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct press order in the "N+1" game, the symbols will be advantageous to the player. Since the combinations are stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs a performance that takes over the performance before the disconnection ("N" game), and the "N+2" game Reset the performance at the start (return to the correct performance). This makes it possible to minimize the output of unnatural performances and to prevent misunderstandings to players as much as possible in both games where disconnection has occurred and games where communication has been restored.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 11, communication was restored in the "N+1" game after a disconnection occurred in the "N" game, but communication was restored after two or more games had passed after the disconnection occurred. However, the result is the same as that shown in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection occurs in the "N" game up to the "N+a-1" game. The previous performance continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a" game where the communication is restored, the continuation of the performance of the "N" game that has been continued to be output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the performance is updated to the effect (correct performance) at the start of the "N+a+1" game.

<Fourth embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (hereinafter referred to as a "four-phase excitation state") is set for a predetermined time (time T11 described later).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing. Moreover, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has a structure like that shown in FIG. 12. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to its original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is an operating body for the stop switch 42, and is operated by the player (pushed into the inside of the slot machine 10) when turning on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided at the front of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front on the player's side, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward direction, toward the player) in FIG. The player side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") in the figure is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the casing), and is a portion that comes into contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

A movable piece 42d that is movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the figure. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip of the moving piece 42d (lower end in the figure) is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state shown in (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e is not detecting the moving piece 42d and is in an off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the player wants to stop the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the movable piece 42d, which is integral with the stop button 42a, also moves downward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters into the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12(b) shows the positions of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12(c). This position is the deepest position when the stop button 42a is pressed. Moreover, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, so the detection sensor 42e is in the on state.

When the player releases the push button 42a from the state shown in FIG. 12(c) (removes the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12(c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c causes the stop button 42a to be pressed down. A force is applied to return it to its initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), and is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
Note that the state in FIG. 12(b) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state in FIG. 12(d) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are generally Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

FIG. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position in the no-load state (FIG. 12(a)), and the time at which the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. The stop button 42a is further pushed in from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest position (when the state shown in FIG. 12(c) is reached) is defined as S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the press of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pressed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c applies a force that tends to return the stop button 42a to its initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released from being pressed.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached, is defined as S45. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state shown in FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (result determined by the internal lottery means). As described above, the time from when the reel 31 stop control is started (from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on) until the reel 31 stops is as follows (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 4 frames). Therefore, the time from when the reels 31 start decelerating to when the reels 31 stop is not constant because it varies depending on the lottery result and the position of the reels 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 keeps the motor 32 in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (braked) for a predetermined period of time (the above-mentioned four-phase excitation state). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a 4-phase stepping motor, and during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1/2 phase excitation is performed (note that this is not limited to 1/2 phase excitation. do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, it is in one excitation state. When the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, a four-phase excitation state is set.
In addition, when performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making the reel 31 appear to vibrate at the stop position), the reel 31 should be in a three-phase excitation state, for example, instead of a four-phase excitation state. is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a risk that the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31 will exceed the desired stop position due to the inertia of the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31. By setting it in a four-phase excitation state and generating static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stopped position due to inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, reception of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12(d)). ), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32, which has stopped its rotational drive, has ended.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In order to maintain the stopped position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state, but when controlled in this way, a larger load is applied than in normal times, so the overall load on the slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished, the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the result of the role selection by the role selection means (result determined by the internal selection means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the excitation time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 x 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the result of the role selection is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 of the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts", meaning that the excitation time T12 is not always constant regardless of the result of the role selection.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As mentioned above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , about "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed are close to each other (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (time S45), It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to turn off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the next operation of the stop button 42a to be accepted at the end of the four-phase excitation state. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest point is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until reaching the target) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state starts from the moment when the push button 42a that has reached the deepest part is released (time S44), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to be completed when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the next operation reception of the stop button 42a is permitted as soon as the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Note that Examples 1 and 2 in FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12" is satisfied, the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed more quickly in Example 1.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program startup.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when power is cut off after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). Note that in FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, power-off detection level V1, and drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is activated from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command to the sub control board 80 after power is turned on. This is to keep the sub-control board 80 side in a state where the command can be received.

Next, when a power outage (such as turning off the power switch 11 or a power outage) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power-off process.
Further, when a power outage occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power outage detection level V1 at time T0 (20th interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and power outage is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the power-off is detected, similarly to FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2 and the program (processing) cannot be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is controlled to end before time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it sets the main CPU 55, checks the RWM 53, checks whether the previous power off was normal, checks the status of the setting key switch, etc., and then starts interrupt processing. . When the setting key switch is off, the power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process moves to the setting change process after starting the interrupt process.
As shown in FIG. 14(a), if a power outage occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is off, the power outage process is executed after the power outage recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is on, the power-off process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after a power outage occurs, a problem may occur.

Furthermore, in order to properly execute the main program, the settings of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 must be executed even if a power outage is detected at the same time as the main program is started.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, it is always executed until the interrupt is started even if the power is subsequently cut off. This is to detect power outage in interrupt processing. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power outage detection level V1) that is determined to have occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is started. However, when the voltage drop is detected, a power outage is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (determined as a power outage). Then, the power-off process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if a power outage occurs at the same time as time S54 (startup of the main program), the setting is such that the power outage processing can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from power-on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is the period from when the power is turned off (time S55) until the voltage reaches the Low level. It is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Furthermore, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 until the main program is activated) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) is an example in which power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14(b), the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power necessary for starting the main program (supply level V0) is supplied, a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has decreased. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power becomes Low level.
Note that in the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that the power is cut off immediately after the subprogram starts (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). It will be done.
If a power-off occurs at the above-mentioned timing, the subprogram executes the subprogram's power-off processing. Then, it is possible to complete the subprogram power-off process before the voltage supplied to the sub control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power is cut off at the above-mentioned timing before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, a passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 not only improves the accuracy of medal insertion determination but also is effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect medals M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M when it is falling substantially vertically downward.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited thereto. Any device may be used as long as it has a function of sending the medals M out of the medal path before the medals M are detected by the input sensor 44a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured like this. does not mean. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they can reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at position M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment the medal is released to the time it reaches M4 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time taken for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 from detecting the power outage to executing power outage processing (blocker off) An example of setting is to be shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 has already been turned off by the time the medal M reaches the blocker 45 position from the M2 position. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the input sensors 44a and 44b.
In addition, in the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-off processing (blocker off) may be set to be executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing counting from the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by an interrupt process when a power-off is detected.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 for the voltage to reach the maintenance level V1 from the supply level V0 when a power outage occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but this is not limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is dispensed by the medal dispensing device, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the input sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

In addition, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a is on, dispensing sensor 37b is off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a is on, dispensing sensor 37b is on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a is off, dispensing sensor 37b is on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a is off, dispensing sensor 37b is off (time S34')
Trace the progress of.
The time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from the occurrence of a power outage to the execution of a power outage process).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the outside, but conversely, it is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 will be a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) is adopted, a protrusion 57e is formed on the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, the main control board 50 is housed inside. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes an RWM 83, a ROM 54, a sub-CPU 85, etc., but on the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub-control board 80, at least One example is not to arrange the CPU 85, and furthermore, not to arrange the RWM 83 or ROM 54. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 from overlapping in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reels 31), and the remaining number of games during AT were given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even when displaying the number of acquired coins and the remaining number of acquired coins in a game (BB game, etc.).
For example, the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N" is "200", the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+1" is "209", and the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+2" is "218'' sheets. It is also assumed that the main control board 50 transmits a command regarding the number of coins to be acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired coins in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N+1" game, a command regarding the number of acquired coins is not received (due to a disconnection), so the display of the acquired number of coins "200" is also maintained in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired coins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to show the acquired number of coins "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after all "N+1" game numbers are stopped or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore normal image display at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after a complete shutdown.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the "N+1" game where the line is disconnected, there is a case where the player wins an additional (addition) lottery for the number of coins that can be obtained during AT or the number of games played. In this case, since the "N+1" game number is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the additional (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 An example of this is displaying game information (number of coins that can be acquired and number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, if the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game, and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. is possible. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first stop on the right. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command for the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it does not perform the press order failure effect. Output. Then, the image display may be restored to normal at the time of a bet operation after all the "N+1" games are stopped or at the start of the "N+2" games.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the number of acquired coins is displayed as an image during AT, the following method may be cited as an example of the process of updating the image display of the acquired number of coins before and after the disconnection.
When there is a payout process, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the number of acquired coins for the "N" game. It is assumed that immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 was displaying "100" as the number of coins acquired during AT. Furthermore, it is assumed that the "N" game number and the "N+1" game number during AT will each acquire 10 coins.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should originally be "110", but it remains "100" (because of the disconnection). Then, it is assumed that communication is restored during the "N+1" game. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 is able to return the number of coins acquired during AT to a normal value based on the command for the number of acquired coins received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process for the "N+1" game, or it may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" during the payout process for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, there is a starting hole (a winning hole that starts the symbol fluctuations by the symbol fluctuation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), an electric chew prize opening (when a game ball wins, the next winning hole is triggered). In order to make it easier, there are various winning openings such as an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.The electric chew is not limited to the shape of a tulip. provided. And it is possible to apply 1st Embodiment (B) in these winning a prize openings.

Specifically, for example, the starting hole has a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has entered the starting hole) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). It is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won by the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of a starting opening, if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the setting is made so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power cutoff process is executed. Thereby, even if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the winning balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "reel-type gaming machine" installed in a No. 4 business store that is subject to the Entertainment Business Law. (So-called "pachislot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals used for games as gaming media.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. All of the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded for winning combinations are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, the credit number display LED 76 may be composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-mentioned embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than in FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. As in the first embodiment, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion that is an opening that can hold medals stored in the hopper. Eight pieces 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in the shape of a circular hole passing through the hopper disk 101 from the upper surface to the lower surface. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed to enter into each holding part 102 from the upper opening of each holding part 102 and to be held by each holding part 102, respectively.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding section 102 move clockwise in an arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge section 103, the holding section 102 that held the medal becomes empty. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding section 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge section 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medals will be ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, the moment the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been ejected from the ejection section 103.

In addition, in one payout process, the last medal to be ejected from the dispensing unit 103 is referred to as the "last ejected medal", and in the next payout process, the medal to be ejected first from the dispensing part 103 is referred to as the "first medal". It is called "Ejection Medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medals marked with the letter "A" are the last medals to be ejected in one payout process, and the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first medals to be ejected in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding section 102 where the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "first position", and The position of the holding section 102 where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in the process is referred to as a "second position."
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal with letters "A" to "D", and the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding part 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding part 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is moved to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped when the hopper disk 101 is positioned between the
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are each indicated by a broken line. Furthermore, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding part 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. rotation has stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 applies a current to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, so that the drive of the hopper motor 36 is abruptly stopped, and the hopper disk 101 The rotation of can be stopped suddenly.

Furthermore, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting section 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects this fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current is applied to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting medals, and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is controlled. When stopped suddenly, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Furthermore, by passing current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the opposite direction (rotated counterclockwise). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes the second position at the end of the payout process, the current is applied to the hopper in the opposite direction to that when discharging the medals. By flowing the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medals can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is applied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the state of medal discharge from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the medal ejection status from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" and then reaches "constant speed."
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is tilted upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned on from off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates.
Therefore, if the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 will gradually accelerate until the holding section 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 is longer than the hopper motor. This is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft No. 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player a feeling that the first (first) medal is delayed in being ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured such that, at the end of one payout process, the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
If the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position will be shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game is delayed.

Furthermore, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, two adjacent holding sections 102 on the hopper disk 101 are stopped as shown in FIG. 17(b). A portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge section 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act (goto act) in which a fraudulent instrument such as a wire is inserted through the medal dispensing port provided at the lower front of the front door 12 and attempts to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is carried out. Even if the hopper disk 101 is stolen, the corresponding portion between the two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101 acts as a barrier, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized instruments from accessing the holding parts 102.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103 at equal intervals.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop."
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is diagonally downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

18, when the main control board 50 changes the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from OFF to ON, it then transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, it starts processing related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 starts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, after the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off, it then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub control board 80 ends the process regarding output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, "processing related to outputting sound" refers to a series of processing such as selecting a sound to output, selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means something. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By starting this, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103.

Further, when the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By ending the process, when the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be made to end.
This can give the player the impression that the medal payout and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of medal discharge from the discharge unit 103.
When a winning combination with a payout is achieved, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a specified memory area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
For example, when a 10-coin combination is won and 10 medals are paid out, the payout number data "10" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as the payout number data.

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from a "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches a "constant speed".
Note that at the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the process, the hopper motor 36 is made to reach a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 goes from "stop" to "acceleration" to "constant speed", the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. The medals are surely ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
Note that the timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37a is set so that it is off when it is detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37b is set so that it is off when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is detecting the movable piece 39a.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
Note that in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. The on/off waveform is reversed.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal pushing the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
Note that the state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is also in the on state. Become. At this time, the medals are ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103).
Note that the state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b and is returning to its original position, and the dispensing sensor 37a is in the on state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the off state. becomes.
Note that the state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b and returns to its original position, and the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
Note that the state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When dispensing "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been dispensed.
When determining that the "N"th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 undergoes "deceleration" and then comes to "stop."
This completes the payout process for "N" medals.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process advances to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process advances to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal) is turned on. It is set to be.

If "Yes" is determined in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process advances to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is possible that medals are jammed in the ejection section 103 (medal jam error). Furthermore, when a medal jamming error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the stuck medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time elapses with "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is possible that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Furthermore, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process advances to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S105, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process advances to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process advances to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S107, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104 or S105.

When the process proceeds to step S108, the main control board 50 then determines whether the dispensing sensor 37b is off. If the result of step S108 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step S109, where the main control board 50 determines whether the dispensing sensor 37a is off. If the result of step S109 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S110, where the main control board 50 determines whether the dispensing sensor 37b is off.
If the answer is "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. If the answer is "No" in step S110, an error occurs, just like when the answer is "No" in steps S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process in which "1" is subtracted from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and the data after the subtraction is stored as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout number data is "0" or not. Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process advances to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge section 103 are normally guided to a medal receiving tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may bounce off the inner wall of the medal chute and return to the ejecting section 103. At this time, the rebounding medal may hit the next medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 is pushed back.

For example, assume that one medal is about to be ejected, and this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, so that the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that a medal that was paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, and this medal is pushed back and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S105 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Further, for example, assume that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S107 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. For example, the number of holding portions may be five, six, ten, etc. It can be set as appropriate depending on the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed into a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding part 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal dispensing process is clockwise, but the rotation direction is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 may rotate counterclockwise and the holding portion 102 The medals held in the memory may be sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even with such a flow of payout processing, it is possible to detect the ejection of medals. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is impossible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
Note that the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same contents in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached to the inside of the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. We are prepared.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside this reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Furthermore, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is housed within this reel board case 121. This reel control board 120 controls the driving of the three motors 32.

Further, a transparent main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position above the symbol display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, the main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 is connected to the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, symbol display device 14, medal payout device 15, reel control board 120, sub control board via the input port 51 or output port 52. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 about this hinge.

Further, a transparent display window is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. .

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout port through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal payout port for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a production lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, etc. are arranged.

Further, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the casing), above the symbol display device 14, and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed within the sub-board case 87 .
Further, the sub control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the control command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output, and according to the decision, outputs the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, Controls the output of the image display device 23.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14, and the main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, on the back surface of the front door 12, above the symbol display device 14, a sub-board case 87 is arranged, and the sub-control board 80 is housed within this sub-board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged. Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, there is a risk that the filled electrolyte may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when this electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will be released. There is a possibility that it may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, an electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can be prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Furthermore, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be done.

FIG. 23(a) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23A, the circle indicated by a broken line is the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50.

In example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be located at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 2.

Similarly to FIG. 23(a), in FIG. 23(b), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23(b), the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Accordingly, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23(b), each of the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be, for example, four, as shown in FIG. 24( c ).
Figure 24 (c) is a diagram showing example 3 of the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed.
The electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by dashed circles, similar to Figures 23(a) and (b).

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. It is located. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction, although it is different in the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be placed at a position away from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24(d) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing Example 4.
The projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 and showing it with a broken circle is the same as in FIGS. 23(a), (b), and FIG. 24(c).

In FIG. 24(d), like FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 23(a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 86 is arranged at a position separate from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it can be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 in the position shown in FIG. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. This management information display LED 74 is for displaying management information such as advantageous section ratio, consecutive accessory ratio, accessory ratio, etc.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the "continuous role item ratio" means the ratio of the first section to the total number of medals acquired. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special accessory (RB) is activated, and the "accessory ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and also at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74, good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be prevented. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine 10 (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the lower part of the cabinet 13, and projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-shaped protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c extends in the protruding direction. is the direction toward the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, there is a second closing portion 12a that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the second closing portion 12a projects in the following direction. This is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the second closing portion 12a is arranged at a position lower than the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c at the bottom of the front door 12, there is a third closing portion 12b that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, like the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing part 12b The protruding direction of the third closing portion 12b is the direction toward the cabinet 13.

Further, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closure part 12a, the third closure part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closure part 13c.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing is bent like the left and right sides of a U-shape are reversed, as shown in FIG. It will have a shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (rogue acts) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the inside of the casing to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.

Further, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions when the front door 12 is opened and closed. This detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed, and is pushed forward by the spring when the front door 12 is opened.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is detecting the detection piece and is in an off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring and pops out forward from inside the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is not detecting the detection piece and is in an on state.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this way, the opening and closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-back direction as the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the door sensor is turned on and off.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, enters the door sensor and comes out, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position."
Further, the time when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion is located between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c are arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state, the first blocking part 13c is disposed between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It is formed like this.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first changes from the off state to the on state, and then the first blocking part 13c comes out from between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It turns out.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open and sends a door open command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 receives the door open command. When the front door 12 is received, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. notify that the front door 12 is open. Thereby, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closing part 13c does not come out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification starts, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is in a bent shape. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (acts of fraud) such as accessing the medal dispensing device 15 etc. by passing the card through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, there is a space between two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101. The corresponding part can be positioned in front of the ejecting part 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal dispensing port to access the holding part 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is "h2", and the distance between the second blocking part 12a and the second blocking part 12a is "h2". The distance to the third closing portion 12b is “h3”, and the protrusion width (depth) of the second closing portion 12a is “w”.
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a typical medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, there is a case where the clerk drops the medals onto the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish the hopper 35 with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may be dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

In this case, if the setting is made so that "h2>t" is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed with a medal remaining near the first blocking section 13c, the medal that has fallen near the first blocking section 13c will get caught between the first blocking section 13c and the third blocking section 12b. This allows the front door 12 to close without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. It also prevents the medal from getting caught between the first blocking section 13c and the third blocking section 12b, preventing the front door 12 from closing.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". has been done.
By setting so that "w<(d/2)" is satisfied, it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the medals placed on the second closing portion 12a from closing the front door. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modification of the Eighth Embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting portion. However, the invention is not limited to this and may be configured using, for example, a proximity sensor.
Furthermore, even when a door sensor is constructed using a proximity sensor, the first blocking portion 13c is configured to be positioned between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed, but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions as the front door 12 is opened and closed. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, it pops out forward by being biased by the spring. So, I made it go out from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 comes out from inside the door sensor. You may also do so.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is in an OFF state when it is detecting a detection piece, and is in an ON state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be in an on state when it is detecting a detection piece, and may be in an off state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. Configure it as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two parts: a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a, and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or may be divided into three parts. It may be constructed from three members.
The second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may also be configured from two members or three members, similarly to the first closing portion 13c.
In this way, the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, but may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have some parts that are not present.
Similarly, the lower back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a part where the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not provided, it is possible to enter the inside of the casing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as passing a wire to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12, or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first blocking portion 13c is disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a, or the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be provided between the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b, or the first blocking portion 13c and the third blocking portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
In addition, the entire first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b, or only a portion of the first blocking portion 13c may be disposed between the second blocking portion 12a and the third blocking portion 12b.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position corresponding to between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c is provided that protrudes from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13, and a first closing portion 13c is provided that protrudes from the bottom of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2>t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If "h2>t" is set, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal falling near the first blocking part 13c, the medal falling near the first blocking part 13c will be removed from the third blocking part 13c. 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "w<d", even if you try to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medal will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second blocking portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, as well as the relationship between the distance "h1" between the first blocking portion 13c and the second blocking portion 12a and the thickness "t" of the medal, may be set to satisfy "(d/2) <w" and "h1 <t."
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w," it becomes possible to place a medal on the second blocking portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1<t," even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a, the medal placed on the second blocking portion 12a will hit the front end of the first blocking portion 13c before the front door 12 closes, and the front door 12 will not close.
This allows the hall staff to know that medals have been placed on the second blocking section 12a, and ultimately allows the hall staff to remove the medals placed on the second blocking section 12a before closing the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing part 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closing part 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal being placed between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a. It turns out. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the medals placed on the second closing part 12a will hit the first closing part 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will not be closed.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of output of effects on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special prizes (accessory objects), BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special accessory), ;Regular Bonus), and MB (Second Class Continuous Actuation Device; Second Class Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Moreover, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (class 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are won repeatedly, and the stop switch 42 is not operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven gaming states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. The main control board 50 then controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number during MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number in gaming states other than during MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected as lottery targets and the winning probability thereof are a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but it means that the type of conditional device to be selected for lottery and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, when the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving pieces) rate (PB).
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (with an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on an active line within the range of the maximum number of moving pieces), the target symbol will be stopped on an active line (an effective timing). PB≠1 means that it is not possible to pull the ball up to the line.
On the other hand, no matter what position the reels 31 are at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the BB game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, and in the game in which the BB was won, the reels may not be moved to the inside of the BB, but in the next game, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.
Furthermore, when an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which RB winning information is carried over is called "RB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of transition to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the RB interior, or in the game in which the RB is won, the RB is not moved to the interior, and in the next game, the RB is You may move it inside.

Furthermore, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".
In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1", so if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game will always stop on the active line. , will never be inside the MB.

Furthermore, the conditional device (win) of the ninth embodiment can be broadly classified into a special winning combination (accessory object), a replay (replayed winning combination), and a small winning combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays: Replay 1 and Replay 2, and minor roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , right correct answer has seven types: bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as "push order bells."
Furthermore, the "condition device" is a device that operates in accordance with the winning number determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to that winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, any one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any conditional device from non-winning to MB is activated.
In each of the two types of replays, you can win independently, and you cannot win multiple times with other conditional devices (combinations).
Furthermore, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other winning combinations.

Furthermore, there are cases in which watermelon is won alone and cases in which watermelon is won in combination with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has cases in which it wins alone and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB, and Cherry 2 has cases in which it wins alone, cases in which it wins multiple times with RB, and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB. .
Also, BB has cases where it wins alone and cases where it wins multiple times with Watermelon, Cherry 1, or Cherry 2, but RB never wins alone and only wins multiple times with Cherry 2, and MB can only be won individually, and cannot be won in conjunction with other roles.

In addition, "payout" refers to the number of medals paid out when a symbol combination corresponding to each condition device stops (a winning combination is achieved).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct bell, middle correct bell, and right correct bell, the payout differs between the specified number of 3 (game state other than during MB) and the specified number of 1 (during MB), but otherwise the payout is the same for the specified number of 3 and the specified number of 1.

The correct left bell is a push order bell where the first button on the left is the correct button press and any button press other than the first button on the left is an incorrect button press. With a specified number of 3, the correct button press will pay out 8 medals and an incorrect button press will pay out 1 medal. With a specified number of 1, the correct button press will pay out 14 medals and an incorrect button press will pay out 15 medals.
Similarly, the middle correct bell is a press order bell where the first stop in the middle is the correct press order and anything other than the first stop in the middle is an incorrect press order, and the right correct bell is a press order bell where the first stop on the right is the correct press order and anything other than the first stop on the right is an incorrect press order.
The common bell is a bell that will pay out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). This winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Further, the lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Furthermore, winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Furthermore, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "Watermelon+BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As explained in the first embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. and a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, in non-internal and internal cases, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same and the operating condition device may be the same, or even if the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same, the operating condition may be the same. The conditions and equipment used may differ.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. This winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets a winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is The winning flag will be turned on, and the other winning flags will be turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10"" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, so even if you win a role that does not carry over winning information in this game and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. Regardless of whether the player wins or not, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game.
On the other hand, the winning information for special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so if you win a special role in this game and the winning flag of the winning special role is turned on, that special role will be The winning flag remains on until a prize is won, and when the special winning combination is won, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" The two winning flags will be turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" wins in this game or not, "Cherry" will be turned on at the end of this game. The winning flag for "1" is turned off, and the winning flag for "BB" remains on. In this case, from the next game onwards, the game will move to the inside of the BB.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 within BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "Cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
Therefore, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, ” (“Cherry 1” wins alone), the on/off state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, even though the winning combination was not won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the small winning combinations.
For example, during a MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the drawing by the winning number drawing means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning numbers, but all winning numbers are The winning flag for the small winning combination (the above seven small winning combinations) is turned on.
Also, for example, during a MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small winnings (the seven small winnings mentioned above) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on/off of the winning flag. Equipped with. Further, each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When a winning number is determined by a drawing by the winning combination means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to on/off of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than Replay 1 do not stop on the active line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is the stop position determination table that is selected when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop. , when the symbol combination that results in the payout of 8 medals stops on the active line, and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left, the symbol combination that results in the payout of 1 medal stops on the active line. The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined as follows.

Further, the "internal lottery number" column in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers in each gaming state. Divide the internal lottery number by "65536" to get the probability of winning.
For example, since the number set for the winning number "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the number "4" corresponding to the winning number "4" is The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" will operate is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26(c), the mark "*" indicates that advantageous section lottery is executable.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (notifying) an "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is selected.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and when the press order bell is won, it becomes possible to notify the correct press order.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", but this is because in non-RT the winning number "3"("commonbell") is marked with "*". When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined in the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and when the winning number "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined that the answer is "Middle Correct Answer Bell" or "Right Correct Answer Bell", the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but otherwise the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell"), Except for non-RT, when the winning number is determined to be the same as the non-RT, advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of BB is carried over inside BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is decided while inside BB, and when it is determined to be a winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") during BB, and during non-RT (non-internal). The on/off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB internal are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the carried over winning flag of "RB" are turned on. .
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are both special prizes (official objects). The number set and the number set for the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same number "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + RB") or the winning number "13" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in a non-RT, and when the winning number "11" (a single win of "Cherry 2") is determined while inside RB or BB, the winning flag for "Cherry 2" and the winning flag for the special role (gimmick) are the same in that they are turned on.
Furthermore, the total number of places for the winning number "12" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + RB") and the winning number "13" (a double win of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT is "300", which matches the number of places for the winning number "11" (a single win of "Cherry 2") inside RB and inside BB, which is "300".
For this reason, even when the winning number "11" (a single winning number of "Cherry 2") is determined during RB and BB, the drawing of the advantageous zone can be carried out.

In addition, the column of “advantageous section lottery number” in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers for each winning number. Divide the number of advantageous section drawings by "16384" to get the probability of winning.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, RB inside, or BB inside, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is as follows. It becomes "20/16384".
For example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is held in non-RT and RT, but if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game always stops on the active line, so MB To shift to an MB game from the next game without becoming internal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is held, and regardless of the lottery result by the prize lottery means 61, all the minor prizes are won twice. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle The seven winning flags (correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all the small winning combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on. In this case, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (one coin is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, and the payout is 14 or 15 coins.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated at a position other than the first stop on the left (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line. Stop at active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single win of "Replay 2") is determined during MB gaming, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is on, and the right At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 pieces are paid out, and at times other than the first stop on the right (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 pieces are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, a push order that results in a payout of 14 coins is announced, and in the second game during the MB game, a push order that results in a payout of 15 coins is reported.
As mentioned above, the termination condition for the MB game is set when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14, so by making such notification, 29 medals will be paid out during the MB game. You can do it like this. Furthermore, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals, which is the sum of the payout number "29" minus the input number "2".

Furthermore, in order to notify the player of a pressing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to an advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning of the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. This effect group number selection means 64 is for selecting the effect group number corresponding to the winning number and the number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26(c), the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Specifically, production group numbers "0" to "3" are determined in correspondence with winning numbers "0" to "3", and production group numbers "4" and "4" are determined in correspondence to winning numbers "4" to "6". '' are determined, and production group numbers ``5'' to ``13'' are determined corresponding to winning numbers ``7'' to ``15''.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. This pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects the determined winning numbers when the winning numbers corresponding to the pressing order bells (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) are determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the pressing order instruction number (corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the pressing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 sends, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a push order instruction number (when AT is in progress and when the correct answer is pressed). In addition to information such as the winning number (only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device with the , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), the presentation group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell) operating in the winning combination lottery means 61. be able to.
In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell has been won based on the performance group number, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell It is not possible to determine which one of them won (in which order the correct answer was pressed).
Further, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and while waiting for the game.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) sends information ( control command).
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes a performance output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes a performance determination table and the like.
Further, a plurality of performance determination tables are provided that define the performance to be output, and the performance output control means 91 determines the performance to be output using any of the performance determination tables, and determines the performance to be output using one of the performance determination tables. control to output.
That is, the production output control means 91 determines what kind of production to output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any production determination table, and performs the determination. Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a production determination table used in both non-RT (non-interior) and RT (non-AT and non-interior), and FIG. 28 is a production determination table commonly used in RB interior and BB interior. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, there are 18 types of presentation patterns ranging from "no presentation" to "continuous presentation". Furthermore, each production pattern from "Character Production (Enthusiasm)" to "Continuous Production" defines production with different content.
For example, the "confirmation performance" is a performance that lets the player know that he or she has won the special prize, and the "post-first-stop notification performance" is a performance after the first stop (after the first operation of the stop switch 42). It is a performance that is output at a timing, and the "left first stop performance" is a performance that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the "continuous performance" is a performance that is output continuously over multiple games. This is the effect that is output.

Further, the column "Number of performance patterns distributed" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distribution patterns of each performance pattern when each performance group number is received. Dividing the number of performance patterns distributed by "256" gives the selection probability of each performance pattern. In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding conditional device is written below each performance group number.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the production group number "1" is transmitted, the probability of selecting "No production" is "128/256", the selection probability of "character production (liveliness)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "conversation production (liveliness)" is also "20/256", and the selection probability of "cut-in production" is "20/256". The selection probability of ``(strong effect)'' is ``0/256''.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB) to the sub-control board 80; Send the production group number.
Then, the performance output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects a performance determination table according to the gaming state based on the information indicating the gaming state received from the main control board 50, and combines the selected performance determination table with the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which performance pattern to output the performance, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output is The control means 91 selects the performance determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and changes the position in the column of performance group number "12" (single winning of "BB") in this performance determination table. The number is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "40/256", for example.

In contrast, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 in the BB and the performance group number "0" is transmitted, the performance output control means 91 selects the performance determination table used commonly in the RB and the BB shown in Fig. 28, and uses the number entered in the column for the performance group number "0"("non-winning") in this performance determination table to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in Fig. 28, when there is a "non-winning" in the BB, for example, a "confirmed performance" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for a game in which the role selection means 61 has won "BB" alone during a non-RT (non-internal) game and a game in which the role selection means 61 has become "non-winning" during a BB. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to " is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB-only stop position determination table."

"Stop position determination table for single BB" is a stop position of each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and so that the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than BB does not stop on the active line. determining the position.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over "BB" Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" is selected as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT.
For this reason, when the winning combination lottery means 61 in the BB is "non-winning", the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "BB" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Furthermore, "stop control of the same reels 31 is performed" means that if each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (pressing order and operation timing), each reel 31 will stop at the same position, and the same reel 31 will stop at the same position. This means that the stopping number will be displayed.

In this way, when the role selection means 61 wins "BB" alone in non-RT and when the role selection means 61 becomes "non-winning" during BB, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the main control board 50 performs the same stop control of the reel 31, the sub-control board 80 can output different effects, thereby diversifying the effects.
Furthermore, even if the main control board 50 controls the stopping of the same reel 31 and displays the same stop result, the sub-control board 80 outputs a different effect, allowing the player to guess that he or she has won a special role (is in the internal role).

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the sub-control board 80 for when non-RT "BB" wins alone and when "non-winning" inside BB, "BB" during non-RT When winning, a performance determination table with a low probability of selecting a confirmed performance (a performance that lets the player know that he has won the BB) is selected, and when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, a performance with a high probability of selecting a confirmed performance is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that he or she has won "BB" in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for players to understand, it is possible to make the player aim to win the "BB" and to prevent the player from staying in the BB forever, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in a non-RT, if the winning number "8" (double win of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the role selection means 61 and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 which is used commonly in non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and uses the number entered in the column for effect group number "6" (double win of "watermelon + BB") in this effect determination table to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, in the case of a double win of "watermelon + BB" in a non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" to select "character effect (lively)", "conversation effect (lively)", or "cut-in effect (strong effect)", and a probability of "30/256" to select "continuous effect".

On the other hand, if the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "5" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 , select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used in both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number set in the performance group number "5" (single winning of "Watermelon") column in this performance determination table. , determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 28, when "Watermelon" is won alone in the BB, for example, "Character production (Enjoyment)" or "Conversation production (Enjoyment)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 Select a continuous performance with a probability of "/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 controls the game in which "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB inside. The performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, during the non-internal period, in order to maintain the player's expectations for winning "BB" for a long time by showing the player a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the continuous performance can be selected when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during BB, if the player is shown a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the winning of "BB" will be delayed and the player's medals will decrease, so "Watermelon" can be won individually. In order to make the player aim for the "BB" prize early, the selection probability of the continuous performance is set low at the time of the winning, and the selection probability of the confirmed performance at the time of "non-winning" is set high.
Note that the probability of winning each role and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous performance may be set high.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" included in the "Watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table."

"Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed to allow symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB to stop on active lines, and to prevent symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than watermelon and BB from stopping on active lines. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over winning number "7". While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition, turn on the winning flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to winning number "7", and win "Watermelon" and "BB". " Winning flags other than "" will be turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "Watermelon" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 while inside BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB, The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, when you win "Cherry 1 + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, when you win "Watermelon + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, As in the case of winning "Watermelon" alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use this to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

Furthermore, when you win "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 2" alone in BB or RB, you can win "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. In the same way as in the case of multiple winnings and in the case of a single winning of "Watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stopping position of the reel 31 using the same stopping position determination table, but the sub control On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different performances can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to diversify the performances.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28, when a "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when a "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the number of allocations for each presentation pattern is the same, so the probability of selecting each presentation pattern is the same.
However, when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT, the winning flag for "watermelon" is on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off, whereas when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the two winning flags for "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is different when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB.
In this way, when "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone during a BB, the probability of selecting each presentation pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side, but the stopping control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in multiple game states, when the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means of the role selection means 61 is the same, the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the role selection means 61 is the same, and the same condition device is activated, the stopping control of the reel 31 for each game state (the selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each presentation pattern (the selected presentation determination table) may differ.

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each gaming state, but the selection probabilities of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device When activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) Types of combinations shown in the ninth embodiment, types of conditional devices, types of gaming states, prescribed numbers in each gaming state, payout when each winning combination, allocation of internal lottery numbers, advantageous section lottery settings The allocation of the number, the type of performance pattern, the allocation of the allocated number of each performance pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be set as appropriate depending on the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1 was shown, but six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and each setting value has a different internal drawing. A number table for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the gaming state and the performance group number to the sub-control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 side determines the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects a production pattern with a probability according to the gaming state and condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit to the sub-control board 80 a winning number determined by an internal lottery, or transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to a winning number determined by an internal lottery. Good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the received winning number and information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating the condition device determined by internal lottery and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has won, but does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side will change. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and information indicating the performance group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side You may also select a performance pattern.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating whether the winning flag is on/off and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is on is received, but information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is in the BB internal state. It can be determined that

Also, since the lottery for "BB" is not performed while inside the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag for "BB" is on is received while inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is not performed. It can be determined that the winning number is "0"("non-winning").
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the production pattern is created on the sub control board 80 side. may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean winning only the roles other than the special role, and not winning the special roles at the same time, and "multiple winning" means winning only the roles other than the special role. , is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are won at the same time.
For example, the winning of "Watermelon + Control Role 1" in the BB is a double win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but it is only won for roles other than the special role, and the special role is Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, it is a single election.

Also, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + Controller 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) in non-internal and when "Watermelon + Controller 1" in BB is won (single winning), Since the on/off state of the winning flag is the same, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stopping position determination table, but since the winning number and presentation group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
In addition, the "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby changing the stop control of the reels 31, and making it possible to win a prize. It's not a role for you.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in RB or BB, advantageous section lottery can be executed, but multiple types of When winning a winning combination that overlaps with a special winning combination, the advantageous section lottery may not be executed.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting changing), setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, when power is turned on, when starting interrupt processing for the first time, when starting a program, etc.). (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation), in the RWM abnormal error state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are controlled to be in a lighting state.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of four-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are lit, "8888" is displayed. This makes it possible to check whether there is any problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

When the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device transitions to a setting change state in which the setting values can be changed. Furthermore, when the device transitions to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The five seconds from the specified timing based on power-on is set to a time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on.

Here, for example, suppose that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are first turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (the hall clerk) may suspect that there is some sort of malfunction with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any period of time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. It may be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further explained below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs included in the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6,""digit7,""digit8," and "digit 9" in order from the left.
Furthermore, among the four-digit LEDs that the management information display LED 74 has, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are called "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are called "ratio segment". It is called "Seg."

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Lower digit of the ratio segment.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The test pattern display on the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lit state and a non-lit state.
Further, when displaying the test pattern on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Settings being changed (mode) (4) Settings being confirmed (mode) (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, firstly, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of a test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (any time other than 5 seconds is sufficient).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs are in a lit state and in a non-lit state during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the test pattern.
A second test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern displays of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are shown by solid lines, and unlit segments are shown by dotted lines. Furthermore, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the response to turning off the light is indicated by a white circle.
Furthermore, in the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in the unlit state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display for each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit, and segment G is turned off.
The other pattern is to display "-." More specifically, the pattern is such that segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are off.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have an inverse relationship between lit and unlit segments, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29(a), "0." is displayed in the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment, and "-." is displayed in the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processing. For example, when you start the display in Figure 29(a), you set "447(D)" in the counter, and subtract "1" for each interrupt process, and when it reaches "0", An example of this is a) ending the display. As a result, the display shown in FIG. 29(a) can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045 ms".

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29(a) ends, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29(b).
Furthermore, the display in FIG. 29(b) is the display in FIG. 29(a) in which the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." are replaced. That is, in the display of FIG. 29(b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29(a), "-." is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment are displayed as "-." is displayed as "0.".
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupt).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) ends, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "7.U.5.0.". Further, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, when "0." and "-." are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create lighting states and non-lighting states for all segments (A to G and DP), so segment failure (lighting (or the lights cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying a ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "0.-." or "-.0.". Therefore, there is no possibility of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display contents were changed every second and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used to display the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is met.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used to display the test pattern display within a predetermined period after the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are off) are repeated alternately. In other words, this is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." is displayed blinking.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all segments shown in FIG. 30(a) is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all segments shown in FIG. 30(b) is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the light-off state shown in FIG. 30(b), a blinking state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, if you set "134 (D)" as the initial value of the timer, and subtract "1" from the timer value every 2.235ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the lights-out time has passed. Thereby, by counting the number of interrupts "134", it is possible to count "299.49" ms.

Also in the second example of the test pattern display in FIG. 30, by using "8." and "*.", it is possible to create a lit state and a non-lit state for all segments. Therefore, segment failure (unable to turn on or turn off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display will blink regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." will be displayed and the segment DP will not light up. On the other hand, when displaying "8.8.", the segment DP is also lit, so there is no confusion between the two.

The ratios displayed on the management information display LED 74 are updated (calculated) when the game ends (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been completed). The updated ratios are then displayed in the subsequent interrupt process. Here, if a power outage occurs just before the ratios are updated and a test pattern is displayed for five seconds after the power is restored, the ratio update (calculation) process is executed during the five seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. Then, when the display of the test pattern ends and the ratio display begins, the updated ratios are displayed after the power is restored from the power outage.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (C) is a figure which shows the setting value display LED73 in 11th Embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31(A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display, and in this embodiment in particular, it is composed of seven segment LEDs (so-called 7 segments).
These digits 1a to 4a are all seven segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of digit 4a (lower digit of the number-of-achievement display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31(A), a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that each display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c are all configured to light up.

Moreover, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is lit before the game ends and the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when a bet is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on a replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that an automatic bet state is in place.
Note that the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A) includes, for example, a payment display LED (an LED that lights up during payment processing), but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

Further, in FIG. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29, and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b, like the above-mentioned digits 1a-4a, are a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P). Digits 1b to 4b indicate the upper information type, the lower information type, the higher numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
Further, the segment P of digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Furthermore, the segments P of digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) consists of digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A 7-segment digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED consisting of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED consisting of 8 segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments"; however, in this specification, In the book, the term ``7-segment'' includes an LED made up of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, segments A to G constitute the seven upper digit segments of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, each of segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the earned number display LED 78, and segment DP is unused.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower 7 segments of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is an LED that constitutes status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to the 1 bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to the 2 bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Furthermore, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of management information. Furthermore, segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally off, but are lit when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED for making the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value clear and facilitating confirmation. Note that while the above-described test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off like the segments P of other digits, or it may be kept on all the time.

Furthermore, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during a setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during a setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to segment B, . . . , and the D7 bit corresponds to segment P.
For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1a, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and P are turned off, so the segment data becomes "00111111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying "1" in the digit 4a and lighting up the advantageous section display LED 77, segments B, C, and P are lit, so the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)."
Furthermore, before the game starts, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111(B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG. 33.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) that transmits a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) that transmit segment signals are provided. .
Output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Further, the output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73.

In output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper digit)) are output. A drive signal is provided.

Furthermore, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, the advantageous section, AT, specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, and external signal 4 indicating that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power outage has occurred, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it performs control so as to obtain the sub-control data signal from a buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
In addition, output ports (not shown) other than output ports 2 to 5 shown in Figure 33 output, for example, a signal from motor 32, a signal from blocker 45, a drive signal from hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (the so-called winning number), a sub-control data signal, a test signal, etc.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (B) is a figure which shows the LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, the main control board 50 processes a main process (M_MAIN) (described later in FIG. 41) performed for each game, and an interrupt process (M_MAIN) performed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process. I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is a 1-byte data counter that is continuously updated every interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be lit. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" on the LED display counter is lit.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" and so on (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)", but at the time of the interrupt, initialization processing of the LED display counter is performed, Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the value "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digits 5a and 5b can be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 and the numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be lit. .

Moreover, FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit that is permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34(B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 2.
As shown in Figure 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit while changing settings, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit while checking settings. be. In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", if you AND the two, it will be "00010000 (B)" and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (while waiting for the game and during the game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled so as not to light up.

On the other hand, during a setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is output. Enables lighting.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78) (upper digit) and a digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, when generating the segment signal of output port 3 at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. To do this. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is outputted from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, names, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address “F000(H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the set value data.
The set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040(H)" which will be described later, "8(H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting all the segments as "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the start switch 41 is 2), the specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78. In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. The push order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 described later are "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the winning number data. As will be described in detail later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, when the push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address “F030(H)” is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated. For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
Furthermore, the operational state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

Address "F031 (H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag.
During the main processing in FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. This value is maintained until the next game's medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address “F042(H)” is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet upon replay winning, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process in FIG.
Address “F043(H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in the medal management process (detects the inserted medals and performs the bet process and the credit addition process) in step S276 during the main process in FIG.

Address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34(A), and as described above, is updated every time an interrupt process is performed.
Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode.

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when the section is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Note that the timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not need to be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Second, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (to notify the correct pressing order) in a gaming state where it is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. Turn on LED 77.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reels 31 start rotating, until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for the game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the winning combination lottery) is excluded. .
When lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and there is no need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section every game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated every game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous section or not, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the number of differences initially progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the number of differences turned to increase. The difference counter counts the time when the difference number reaches its lowest value in the process of playing the game, so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

Furthermore, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, so for example, if the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the current game, the current game In this case, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the maximum number of difference in the number of coins in the gaming machine is obtained, the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15", so the difference in number of coins in the next game will be "+14", The difference counter value at the end of the next game will be "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

Note that the determination of whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating, etc. This also includes determining the difference counter value (the same applies hereinafter).
In addition, when determining whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, if it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Furthermore, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the difference number turned to increase. . In example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. In other words, regardless of the accumulated value of the number of differences as the game progresses up to that point, if the number of differences counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the number of differences reaches the lowest value, the advantageous section is entered. (The next game will be controlled so that it will be a game in the normal section).

Note that when updating the difference counter during the normal section, there is a possibility that the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation may occur if the player wins a special prize many times and plays the special game repeatedly. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is temporarily reset to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during an advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, the processing As long as the process is executed regardless of the difference, the difference counter will be cleared even if it exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.

In contrast, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process specific to the favorable period, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.
When the advantageous period starts (the first game of the advantageous period), the difference counter is cleared (set to an initial value of "0"; step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, it does not matter what the difference counter is before the advantageous period starts.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the favorable period,
2) When the number of games played in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 games,
satisfies the end condition of the favorable zone.
When the conditions for the end of the advantageous period are met, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason for clearing the difference counter at the end of the advantageous period is to prevent data (values) related to the advantageous period from being carried over to the normal period when the advantageous period ends and the period transitions to the normal period. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases as the game progresses, and the number of differences further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts ("A" in the diagram) until proceeding to "B" in the diagram. An example is shown below. Note that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section there is a CZ, precursor, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state). In the case of a specification where the starting point is (while waiting for a replay win to win), the number of differences may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Further, even if AT is started, if the situation continues where it is difficult to win the push order bell, the number of differences may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at point "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, under a situation where the number of differences is decreasing, the difference counter value maintains "0". Therefore, the difference counter value remains at "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences starts to increase from point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when reaching point "C" in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the difference counter starts counting positively from the point when the difference number reaches its lowest value ("B") after the start of the advantageous section, rather than from the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. Medals will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the number of balls increases (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being aroused.

The above points will be explained more specifically using numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, the number of differences may decrease as the game progresses when it is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, suppose that player X wins the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section, but AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200 coins."

Next, assume that player Y starts playing on the gaming machine, and wins the AT when the difference becomes "-50 coins", and the AT starts. After the advantageous zone starts, if the advantageous zone (AT) continues until the difference exceeds "+2400 coins", player Y will win "2400 + 250 = 2650 coins".
Therefore, as described above, by setting the end condition as "from the point where the difference number reaches its lowest value until it exceeds +2,400 coins" after the advantageous period has begun, it is possible to prevent a player from winning coins including those of other players, and to avoid encouraging gambling.

Example 2 shown in Figure 37(b) shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal zone, turns positive at point "D" midway, and then the favorable zone starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference number counter value is updated to include the normal zone, the difference number counter value is positive at point "E" in the figure. However, the difference number counter value is initialized (cleared, i.e., updated to "0") at the start of the favorable zone (at "E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous zone (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to count positively from point "E", and the advantageous zone ends when it exceeds "2400 (D)".

The explanation returns to FIG. 35.
Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Further, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41, which will be described later).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured from a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Furthermore, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is met during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins an additional lottery. In this case, the increased amount is added to the AT game counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number of sheets that can be acquired is set. In addition, if you win an additional prize, the difference in the number of additional tickets will be added. Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number of coins for the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

Next, each process during the game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 38.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a maskable interrupt, etc.), and setting the parity bit to be added to the control command to be sent. setting (for example, setting to even parity). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, the process advances to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, calculation of the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation is executed for the same range (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power-off processing.
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the current checksum has been calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process advances to step S206.

Furthermore, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is to be initialized, similar processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
Note that when it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all ranges) of the RWM 53 has been completed normally, the normal value is stored as power-off recovery data. On the other hand, if the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S203), or if it is determined that there is an abnormality when calculating the checksum (full range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off process is terminated. Store abnormal values as recovery data.

In the next step S207, level data of a predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register). Next, the process advances to step S208, and based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51, it is determined whether the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" refers to a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (casing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a set door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. Note that the setting door is not required.) Signals of the setting key switch (a switch that turns on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a specified direction) There are three.

Then, the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is opened), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow settings to be changed only in certain cases. When all three specified switches are on, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one specified switch is not on, the process is not allowed to proceed to the setting change process in step S212. .
In other words, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal is Since it is impossible for this to be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the settings change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all designated switches are on, the process advances to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process advances to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that it is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change prohibition flag is on. Here, the setting change prohibition flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. This is the flag to be used. Then, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process advances to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
Note that in this embodiment, a setting change prohibition flag is provided, but if the configuration is such that the settings can be changed at all times, the setting change prohibition flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S213 to perform power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is entirely within the usage area. On the other hand, "outside the used area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

In addition, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes setting value data (address "F000 (H)"), gaming state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range in which the flags, etc. of special winning combinations having , etc. are not initialized is defined as a "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described below, if BB2 is in operation before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process will not be executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data regarding advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process advances to step S222, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range within the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is the entire range within the usage area including the setting value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the usage area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S224 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. The AF register is saved because, although it would normally be the F (flag) register that is wanted to be saved, the AF register is saved instead due to the nature of the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, where a specified range outside the area in use is stored as the initialization range of RWM53. The "specified range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been performed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power outage is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer etc. that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the area used by the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, interrupt processing startup settings are performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since this embodiment uses timer interrupt processing as the interrupt processing, processing for setting the timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, "2.235 ms") is included. Then, after the processing in step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that no interrupt processing is executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the time of starting the setting change. This process is a process in which a control command to be sent to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 side that a setting change process is to be started.

Note that "output request set" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, the control command here does not only mean the command actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command actually transmitted.
Next, the process advances to step S235, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be sent to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, the process advances to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts reaches "224" ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and until the set number of interrupts reaches "0"). This waiting process is also called delay processing or standby processing because it does not allow the main processing to proceed further. Note that during this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is not allowed to proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

In this way, the reason why the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 side is still in the initialization process, the main control board 50 side has already completed the initialization process, and the process progresses further. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
Furthermore, after executing the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initializing the RWM 83, but the wait time is set to be sufficient for the initialization of the RWM 83 to be completed. do. As a result, after the initialization processing of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub-control board 80 side, the processing on the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is sent to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to steps S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236 ends, the process advances to step S237, and the setting change display data is stored as acquisition number data. Next, the process advances to step S238, and the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

Through the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (obtained number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) can be lit.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S238, it is possible to display "8" in each of digits 3a and 4a ("88" is displayed in the acquired number display LED 78), and digit b5 (setting value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the acquisition number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization process in the used area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239, and interrupt wait processing is executed. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process advances to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch, it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the setting value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the setting value data is updated, the updated value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during a setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the start-up data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process advances to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the start-up data of the setting change switch is on.

If interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined that the setting change switch is on in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch will be turned off. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more even if the setting change switch is operated only once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt wait processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that settings are being changed. Next, the process advances to step S245, and a value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal mode is stored in the LED display request flag.

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S244, the display of digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Furthermore, the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245 causes digits 1a and 2a to display "0" (the credit number display LED 76 displays "00"). Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. In contrast, digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) does not light up because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, the process advances to step S246, and similarly to step S234, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process ends the setting change process and transfers the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80. This process sets a control command to be notified. Next, the process advances to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 similarly to step S235. Then, the process advances to step S248 and shifts to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the setting value data is read and checking whether the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (is it within the range of setting value 1 to setting value 6)? It is determined whether the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs and the process proceeds to step S264, where the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area within the used area of the RWM 53 is set in a register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, it is conceivable that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraudulent activity, so be sure to initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, the process reads data from a predetermined input port 51. This process is for updating each data item (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262, where an interrupt is started. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interrupt period, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S263, where the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, i.e., set to "0." Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined "No" in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since the determination in step S209 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is determined "No" in step S222 and step S228, the entire range inside and outside the usage area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" All data will be initialized.

2) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation has been performed normally, when proceeding to the setting change process, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. Since it is determined "Yes" in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (inside the used area and outside the used area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, if the setting change process is not performed, the power-off process (step S213) is performed. 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As mentioned above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start setting processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, and saving an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, adds "1" at a time) the random number for processing (calculation process) to a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated specified number display data and the payout number data have been previously stored as the acquired number data, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the obtained number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated specified number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process is executed to display "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turn it off).
Further, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared in step S280.

Next, the process advances to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined based on the winning combination lottery result by the winning lottery processing in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of additional AT games may be determined. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the additional amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
In addition, after receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this. After the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (after step S290). The AT game number counter may also be updated.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is activated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the medal payout process due to winnings has been completed (after step S300). Update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of winning lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the acquired random number corresponds to any winning combination using the winning combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. This process is the process of FIG. 44 described later. In this embodiment, when the lottery for transition to a favorable zone is executed, an AT lottery is also executed. As shown in FIG. 44 described later, when the player is in a favorable zone but not in an AT (for example, when the main game state is a CZ), an AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG. 44.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number is set (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48, and is a process for generating push order instruction numbers and displaying push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game during the AT (displaying the push order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing such as determining whether the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum playing time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)". It is. In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process proceeds to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum game time is "0" or not, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, so that the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality (an "E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304, where an unrecoverable error process is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where an update process for the payout number is executed. This process is a process for storing the payout number for the game in question as the payout number data and the payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is inhibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is inhibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and includes clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, a control command is set 1. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 the fact that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 ends, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, from this point on, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. 41. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game was "8" and the player made a payment by operating the payment switch 43 and ended the game, "00" will be displayed after about 1 minute. be done. This has the effect that the number of empty tables can be reduced by allowing the hall clerk or another player to recognize them as empty tables.
Note that instead of displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit ``0'' may be displayed. In any case, it is only necessary to display a table so that a hall clerk or another player can recognize it as an empty table.

Next, the process advances to step S312, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process for clearing the push order instruction number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB activation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be won during 1BB operation (1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins that can be won during 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operation status flag is generated. This process is a process for generating a value of the operation status flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S317, the operation status flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operation status flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operation status flag (which is stored in the A register, for example, at this point) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the information of the operation status flag up to that point is replaced with the information of the operation status flag updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (when 1BB is won), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the operation status flag changes from "0" to "1."

In the next step S319, it is determined whether RB operation has started. In addition, in this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off ("0") at the end of the 2nd game (or when winning twice), but when the end conditions of the 1BB game are not satisfied ( (when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start setting process. If it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start RB operation, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that it is not time to start RB operation, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of wins when the RB is activated are saved. This process saves (stores) "2 (H)" in the number of games played when the RB is activated counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53, and saves (stores) "2 (H)" in the number of wins when the RB is activated counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53. Then, proceed to step S321.

In addition, the number of games played when RB is activated and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are both set to "2 (H)" as the initial value, and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1". This is a counter that is decremented by 1. However, the initial value of these counter values is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1", it is incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)" may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether a condition for specifying a specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a specified number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, a specified number may be specified at the start of the game, so this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, specified specified number display data is stored as acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is specified, and when the specified number "2" is specified, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, the obtained number data is "0B(H)". Remember.
Furthermore, when displaying the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed instead of "02" in order to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and push order instruction information.
The number of payouts is displayed as one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, for error numbers, "A" is not displayed in the lower digits.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medal in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal passage error of medals CH: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality in the input sensor 44 C1: Abnormal medal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door opened E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

The types of errors are not limited to those mentioned above. An error whose highest digit in the error number is "E" indicates an unrecoverable error.
As described above, there is no case where an "A" is displayed in the lowest digit of an error number, so there is no confusion between the error number and the specified number.
In addition, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the push order instruction information and the instruction specified number.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the designated specified number display data as the number of acquisitions data, the number of payouts in the previous game may be stored as the number of acquisitions data (if a small winning combination was won in the previous game) ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (described later in FIG. 49) due to winnings. Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the previous payout number data may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for clearing the acquisition number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination in the replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet on in the previous game. Next, the process advances to step S325, and automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process advances to step S326, and an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, etc. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that "previously" (means before the filing of the present application and does not mean "publicly known"; the same applies hereinafter) refers to the time when the bet number is added, specifically, during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S276. In the medal management process, the acquisition count data was cleared. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared during the bet number adding process.
However, in this embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When a specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. In this embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, but when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after operating the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the same as before, when the number of bets is added, The acquisition number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the process of clearing the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the current game, and when it is determined that the specified number has been specified. When it is determined that the prescribed number has not been specified, the acquired number data may be cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process advances to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, unless AT is in progress, the AT game count counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". In this process, the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 is read and it is determined whether the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (processing related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with the number of bets (regular number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when a game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, even when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) if the bet number is not "3" even during AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery processing in step S283 in FIG.
In this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but this is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process may be executed independently. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be only the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (prescribed number) for the current game is 3. If it is determined that the number of bets is 3, the process proceeds to step S342, and if it is determined that the number of bets is not 3, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is "3", the advantageous zone transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous zone transition process (processing related to the advantageous zone) in step S347 described later can be executed, and the AT lottery process (processing related to the instruction function) in step S348 can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (it is an advantageous section), step S348 Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning winning combination is the lottery target in the advantageous section. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win both a special role and a small role, or if you win a small role (rare small role), it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because in a game in which the winning combination is not won (a game in which the conditional device is not activated), processing related to the advantageous section is not executed.
If it is determined in step S343 that the lottery result is a target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not a target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed, or the advantageous zone is not selected). (Winner)

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, among the winning hands to be drawn, the middle cherry (winner alone or winning in combination with a special prize) may be set as a guaranteed winning hand (a hand that will definitely win) in the advantageous section transition lottery. If you win a middle-tier cherry, it may be determined that it is a specific lottery result.
When it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that it is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed, and if the result is a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer process (step S347) is executed without performing an advantageous section transfer lottery (always transfer to an advantageous section). do). Note that it is also possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery even if the result is a specific lottery result, and to set it so that the probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery is 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed. An example of the advantageous section transition lottery is to use a lottery table with predetermined numbers according to the winning lottery results, and to conduct a lottery in the same way as the winning lottery. For example, when the winning number is "A", there is a 35% probability of winning in the advantageous section, and when the winning number is "B", there is a 60% probability of winning in the advantageous section, etc. can be mentioned.
In addition, if the winning combination lottery result is not subject to the lottery for the advantageous section, the result is "No" in step S343, so if "Yes" is determined in step S343, that is, the winning lottery result is the subject of the lottery for moving to the advantageous section. At this time, in the advantageous section transfer lottery, a lottery is conducted using a lottery table having a number of at least "1" or more. However, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to be 1/17500 or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section was won in the lottery at step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 45, and is a process of setting flags and counters based on winning in the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 46. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Note that, without being limited to the example of this embodiment, when moving to an advantageous section, AT may always be started (without performing an AT lottery). Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the AT may always be non-AT, and after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to perform AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S352, and the main control board 50 sets an initial value of the number of games in the advantageous section to "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter.

In the next step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". If the difference counter is continuously updated during the normal period (non-advantageous period) and is always set to "0" when the game ends when the period is not advantageous, the process of step S353 is not required. However, the initial value "0" may be set to prevent noise, etc.
At the end of the favorable period, an initialization process is performed including the difference counter, so at the start of the normal period, the difference counter is set to "0." Therefore, in the case of specifications in which the difference counter is updated only during the favorable period, the difference counter is set to "0" at the start of the favorable period, so it is possible to omit the process of step S353.
On the other hand, in the case where the difference counter is continuously updated during the non-advantageous zone as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous zone. For this reason, the difference counter is set to "0" in step S353. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery processing in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is performed based on the result of the lottery. As in step S345, the lottery may be performed using a lottery table in which the number of winning positions is determined for each result of the lottery.
In addition, the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and for example, there may be role lottery results that do not determine an AT and role lottery results that always determine an AT.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. If it is judged that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and if it is judged that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game count determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game states of this embodiment include normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. Note that it is also possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after winning AT and before starting AT, but in this embodiment, to simplify the explanation, when AT is won, AT is started immediately. shall be. Further, information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether the winning combination in the current game is a confirmed winning combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle cherry is set as the confirmed combination. When it is determined that the confirmed role has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the confirmed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the initial number of AT games is distributed depending on whether or not the confirmed winning combination has been won. A lottery may also be performed. In other words, even if it is a winning lottery result, any number of times of playing may be selected from among a plurality of number of times of playing.
Also, during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game count. When winning the lottery for adding up the number of AT games, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether an instruction condition (a condition for operating an instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a combination with an advantageous push order such as push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
Note that if you win the advantageous section in the current game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and win AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), you will win the advantageous section from the next game. This time, the game is not in an advantageous period. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). For this reason, for example, even if a game is started with the bet number "2" during AT and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function will not operate (the correct push order will be (not notified).

In the next step S383, a winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384, and a press order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process advances to the next step S385.

In step S385, the specified address data is set. In this process, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value becomes the new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the push order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing push order instruction numbers; not shown in Figure 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored as the acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination is the same as that shown in FIG. 58 (the twelfth embodiment) described later. When the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during the AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data by the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, where it is determined whether the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process advances to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether the game state of the current game (RT or main game state) is a game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that whether or not the gaming state is such that the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game is determined to be a game state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the gaming state is such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process according to this flowchart is ended. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball output rate is in a gaming state exceeding "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning in an advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate is not in a gaming state exceeding "1", at any timing (when an arbitrarily set lighting condition is met) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S392, and it is determined whether or not medals are to be paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether the payout number data (A register value) is "0" or not. When it is determined that the number is "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals are paid out, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals are to be paid out, the process advances to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the number of credits data is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S394, and it is determined whether the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the number of credits data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the number of credits data acquired is "50 (D)". (D)'', it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process advances to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set the waiting time to about 100 ms, the number of interrupt processing times is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S396, and a 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process in which the BC register value is subtracted for each interrupt process and waits until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process advances to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the number of credits data. As a result, the display on the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S397. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process in step S397, the process advances to step S399.

When the process advances from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (processing for paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, it is determined that one medal has been correctly paid out. to decide.
Through the above process, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1." For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03."
In the next step S400, the payout number data is subtracted by "1." In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process advances to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and continues the process.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process to add "1" to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, the display on the credit number display LED 76 can be shown to the player as if it is counting up. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08", and when 8 medals are added to this, "display "08" → 100ms standby process → display "09" → 100ms Standby processing→...→100ms standby processing→Display “16””. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process every time "1" is added, the payout sound ("Pururu...") is output from the sub-control board 80 side. ”) and the counting up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because in order to actually pay out one medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out one medal, so it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually dispensing medals, the dispensing sound can be synchronized with the dispensing sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process is performed to clear the flag of the conditional device (also referred to as winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). This process is a process for clearing conditions other than the special winning combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination has stopped on the active line, processing for clearing the special winning winning condition equipment is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, the process advances to step S413, and the replay activation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether the AT game number counter has reached "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in this embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but this is not limited to this. check processing) or during the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, although this embodiment shows an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter, in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Decide whether it has happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416, and advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50. FIG. 51 shows Example 1, and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether the end conditions of the advantageous section are met 4) When the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, initialize (clear) the data related to the advantageous section. )
Further, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (regulated number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is configured to be executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. For example, the subtraction here is as follows.
"0010(H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F(H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", no downflow occurs and "0000(H)" remains. In this way, no matter what value the value before subtraction is, since it is just one instruction (one step) to subtract "1", it is necessary to judge whether the count value before update is "0" or not. is not necessary, and there is no need to add the value of the carry flag after subtraction. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not it is in an advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and to determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, if the game in the advantageous section is 1500 There is no need to judge whether a game has been executed or not, whether an arbitrary ending condition has been satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section clear counter value before the subtraction was "0". This process is determined based on whether the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process advances to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. The process advances to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this means that the current game is not a game in an advantageous period (the current game is a game in a non-advantageous period (normal period)). ) means that

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is "0". This process is determined based on whether the zero flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag becomes "1", the process advances to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process advances to step S425. In addition, when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the current game ends the game in the advantageous section (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)) ) means.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay activation symbol was displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay won a prize). In this process, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the replay activation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is displayed, the process advances to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is not displayed, the process advances to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S429, and the value of bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value becomes less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag becomes "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process advances to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process moves to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process advances to step S435. Note that when the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area related to the advantageous section (clears the data related to the advantageous section). Data related to advantageous sections include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game count counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state can be mentioned. Note that the information regarding advantageous sections does not include RT status numbers, LED display counters, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is to be cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized to "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter should be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED Even though it is possible to light up the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter ends up being "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, and there is a possibility that the LED appears to be turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data:
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value for minimum play time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of input port 51 6) Data of control command buffer 7) Data of stack area 8) Information of external signals Note that the above are examples of representative data, and it does not mean that the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data.

Next, the process advances to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", particularly in this embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), the process advances to step S437. Note that the reason why the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" at this point is because the player won the transfer lottery for an advantageous section in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. In this case, the determination in step S423 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so the determination in step S436 will not be "No".

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting the advantageous section clear counter to "1500 (D)". Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063(H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, assume that when the difference counter is "2 (D)", the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"), and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the payout number is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is ).

The difference in the number of coins for this game is "+6", so just by adding the difference number of coins "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before updating, the carry flag becomes "1" and the irregular A situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not. If the carry flag is "1" or not, it would be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though no carry down has occurred, and the difference counter would be initialized in step S432. This will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case where a carry or a carry down occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if you first add the payout number "9 (D)", the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then the bet is When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no downflow occurs.
For the above reasons, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process in step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the advantageous section counter is first subtracted (step S422), and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" at step S423, i.e. (when it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when the section is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter update process is performed. Processing efficiency is improved by not executing . Therefore, the processing order is such that the advantageous section clear counter is first subtracted, and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, if the specification is such that it is determined whether or not it is in an advantageous section, and if it is in an advantageous section, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter and updating the difference counter is performed, then the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to perform the update process of the difference counter before the process.

Furthermore, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of replay winning), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing this, even if a situation occurs where an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise etc. at the end of the game, "Yes" will be returned in step S434. , the advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, if such confirmation is not necessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter updating process (steps S427 to S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game where the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the number of payouts for the game may be regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts), and the number of bets for the next game may be regarded as "0", and the difference counter may be updated. . However, for example, if an SB (single bonus) is set as a winning combination during an advantageous period, and the SB is won, the next game is to play one SB game with a bet number of "1", but this SB game If you win a replay, the replay activation symbol may stop displaying. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, a game with a bet number of "1" is not possible). However, in this case, the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, so the problem is how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in a game in which the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a second example of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to processes similar to those in FIG. 51.
In example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter, the carry flag may end up being "1" even if there is no downturn in the end, and the calculation result is It has been explained that it is no longer possible to determine whether the carry flag is "0" or not based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430), and then the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, depending on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register for storing high-order digits) value of the HL register value is "1", the step S441 is performed. It is determined whether the calculation result of is less than "0".

for example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a break every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but if the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "The difference in the number of sheets in this game > HL register For example, if
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the number of coins in the current game <HL register value", for example, firstly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Also, secondly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
becomes.
The upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", so when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
Furthermore, at the end of this game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not met, and the next game Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference in the number of coins will increase the most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference in the number of coins in the game will be "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
becomes.

Furthermore, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except in the case of a downgrade.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference counter value must become "32768 (D)", and the difference number must reach such a value, excluding downshifts. The advantageous section will not continue until the end.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
When this is the case, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD(H)".
Here, “FFFD(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101(B)"
It is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
In this case, when the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)".

Here, “FFFF(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this manner, when a downgrade occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, when there is no digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and when there is a digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0". 1”.
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Since it is determined whether the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the number of bets.

Furthermore, as is clear from the above, even if the difference counter reaches the maximum value "2414 (D)", it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a digit decrease occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , it may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", or it may be determined whether or not the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the relevant bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
Note that, as is clear from the above, in Example 1 (step S431) in FIG. It is also possible to determine whether or not there is.

Furthermore, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not is determined. The judgment (step S424), the judgment as to whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the current game. , executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing a game with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited to this) in parallel with the main process.
When proceeding to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, an interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is done because, for example, a request to execute an interrupt process may be made during execution of a power-off process.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process that subtracts the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed or not is included.

Next, the process advances to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process in which the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) are turned on depending on the state of the slot machine 10.
Note that there are two types of errors that occur in the slot machine 10: unrecoverable errors and recoverable errors. For unrecoverable errors, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but for non-recoverable errors Errors are displayed using this LED display control each time an interrupt is processed.

Next, the process advances to step S457, and reading processing for the input port 51 is performed. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range. Here, read the setting value data stored at address "F000 (H)" and check whether the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (whether the setting value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, a built-in random number check process is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for lottery winnings is detected (such as when the random number update is slow), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460, where it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on or not), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, where the error is detected. If it is determined that this has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to proceed to irreversible error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process advances to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel), the hopper motor 36, and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed to determine whether or not there are any abnormalities in the various sensors.
In the next step S464, a control command transmission process is performed to transmit the set control command (an untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer, the control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 in step S464 in the interrupt processing from that point onwards (in principle, in the next interrupt processing that arrives after that point if the command buffer is empty).

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal board 100) from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process advances to step S467, and ratio display preparation processing is performed. This process is a process that updates a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputs segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, the process advances to step S469, where the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above process, the on/off of the credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79f), setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74 is controlled by interrupt processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, for each interrupt process, if a control command that has not yet been sent to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the command is sent.

Note that during unrecoverable error processing, no interrupt processing is performed (interrupt processing is suspended until normal recovery occurs).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processes based on the abnormal data (updating data in the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, sending control commands to the sub-control board 80), etc. are executed. To prevent this, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
When an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal was on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage falls below a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, V1 or less), a predetermined input signal is detected by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt process, the process advances to step S482, and if it is determined that the power-off detection signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S483.
When it is determined "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. Through this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are rotating) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while paying out medals), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process advances to step S484, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum that includes the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and examples of target program use areas include the program work area, unused area, and stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not calculation of the entire checksum range has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process advances to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the above-mentioned predetermined address are added at the time of checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488, and a reset wait state is entered. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the state waits for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process outputs "00000000(B)" from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process also outputs "00000000(B)" from output port 4, similar to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter is set from "00000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are obtained from the RWM 53. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S497, and error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the storage area of the RWM 53 stores a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on/off of the game start display LED 79d to replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79. A storage area and (1 to 3) a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on/off of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when replay does not win
D6: Unused D7: Unused Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 pieces are bet: 00000000
When betting 1 card: 00000001
When betting 2 cards: 00000011
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
Note that bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the result of the operation is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process advances to step S499, and the register in which segment data for output port 4 is set is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is stored. to judge. If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process advances to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of this embodiment includes LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and (number of credits, number of payouts, setting value, display during setting change, press order) An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying instruction information and specified number of instructions) is provided, and is stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offset and segment data are defined in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501 as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data that displays "0" Offset "1": Segment data that displays "1" Offset "2": Segment data that displays "2" Offset "3": Displays "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data to display "4" Offset "5": Segment data to display "5" Offset "6": Segment data to display "6" Offset "7": Segment data to display "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, first, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained.
For example, secondly, if the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digit The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, if the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number will be "A", and the offset of the lower digit will be "A". The offset will be "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data that displays "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data that displays "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, fourthly, for example, if the specified prescribed number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the obtained number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "A" is obtained.

Next, the process advances to step S502, and first, setting value data is acquired. Here, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data and stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the set value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored at the address (in the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the start address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S503, and it is determined whether there is a request to display set values. Here, if the D register value is "00010000(B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the setting value. When it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S504.

In step S504, credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an offset for upper digits is acquired. This process executes an operation of dividing the credit number data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. It is processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the number of credits, the process advances to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquisition number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Furthermore, at the timing when the settings are being changed, display data "88 (H)" is stored during the settings change. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct a specified number, specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Furthermore, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the press order is notified), a press order instruction number "=x (x=any one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Then, any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether this applies when an error is displayed. This process reads the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497), determines whether it is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed, and step S510 If the value is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process advances to step S511.
In step S510, an LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, processing is executed to store the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register. Therefore, in this case, the start address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) in place of the start address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not an error display (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S513.

In step S513, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This is a process for storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. In other words, the upper and lower digit values are swapped between the A and E registers. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, the segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (the top address of LED segment table 1 or 2) to the data stored in the A register (the offset value), and stores the segment data (of LED segment table 1 or 2) corresponding to the address after the addition in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) to be described later, segment data for digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, when the result in step S503 is "Yes" (setting value display request), and the segment data for displaying the setting value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process advances to step S516, and it is determined whether there is a request to display digit 5 or not. Here, a request to display digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". When it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S520, and when it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. Note that when "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

In the next step S518, data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether the value is "0" or not. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether the digit lit in the current interrupt process is digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is the timing to turn on the digit 4a. In this case, the data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 and "10000000" is set as the segment data for output port 3. As a result, data is set that allows segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a to light up.

Next, the process advances to step S519, and the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
The process then proceeds to step S520, where the digit signal is output from output port 2 and the segment signal is output from output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of output port 2 and output from output port 2.
Furthermore, the data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process advances to step S521, and a segment signal is output from output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000(B)" is output from output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, where the process moves to ratio display processing (processing for lighting the management information display LED 74). Note that in this embodiment, a description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and a power outage (when a power outage occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be explained.
In the interrupt processing, when a power outage is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps, but in this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power outage.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined "No" in step S208, so if the power-off recovery is normal, step The process advances to power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and as described above, this range is an unused area of the RWM 53. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter of address "F051(H)".

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, from step S262 onwards, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, when "No" in step S512, there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, if it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1" in step S518, and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interrupt process is executed in the power cut recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, "Yes" is determined in step S208, and the process moves to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of address "F062(H)". Note that when it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
Thereafter, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, in the LED display control (FIG. 55), the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the timing for lighting the set value display LED 73 comes. Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value becomes changeable (the setting value is changed when the setting change switch is turned on).

Also, in Figure 39, when interrupt processing is started in step S233 and LED display control (Figure 55) is executed, even when the timing for digit 4a to light up arrives, the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is already "0", so the advantageous zone display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the on state and the process proceeds to the setting change process, the advantageous zone display LED 77 does not light up. Even if the setting change process is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process, the advantageous zone display LED 77 remains off.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power outage occurs during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, while the reel 31 is rotating, the following will occur. .
When a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cut.

Next, when power is supplied, the state returns to the state before the power was cut off through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before power-off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) causes one step drive. However, even if a constant speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive has been stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because its rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). The motor 32 is accelerated by, for example, first driving one step at 20 interrupts (20 x 2.235 = 44.7 ms), then driving one step at 16 interrupts, and then driving one step at 12 interrupts, etc. This is a method of driving one step in gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value is such that digit 3a lights up ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) lights up. The timing has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 with "1" to several steps remaining), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and acceleration is performed again, as described above, it will take at least several dozen interruptions before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches a constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters a constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the stop switch 42 becomes ready for operation, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

In addition, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to dozens of interrupts will occur after the interrupt is activated until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31. It takes. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 accelerates again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up before the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is restored from the power cut.

41, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on and a power outage occurs while the hopper motor 36 is being driven during the medal payout process in step S294 due to a winning prize, the following occurs: As explained in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process for winning shown in Fig. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the payout sensors 37a and 37b each normally detect the movable piece 39a as shown in Fig. 7 (S31 to S34 in Fig. 8), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that a number of medals equivalent to the payout number have been paid out.
If a power outage is detected in the interrupt process before all medals have been paid out while medals are being paid out, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in Fig. 54, and the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is also turned off. This causes the medal payout process to be interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process due to winnings) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same way as before the power was cut off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winnings in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous period display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before returning to the medal payout process due to winnings after the power is cut off and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning is completed after the power is restored from the power cut, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that point.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is a momentary power interruption, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power outage is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483, so after this process, the digit signal from output port 2 and the segment signal from output port 3 are is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is segment P of digit 4a, goes out.

Therefore, the process advances to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an on signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and, An example of this is to output a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from output port 3. Note that in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 in FIG. 54 and waiting for reset, no interrupt processing occurs, so the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (statically lit). Thereby, even if a momentary power outage occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power outage is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 will be prevented from turning off in the event of a momentary power outage. can do.

Next, the display of the difference number of sheets on the sub-control board 80 side will be explained. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number of sheets on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number of coins counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Number of pullback games counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to turning on/off the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side changes from off to on, and when it changes from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives the AT flag on/off information from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores information that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has changed from off to on (AT flag rising data) and that it has changed from on to off (AT flag falling data). .

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during AT, and when the AT game number counter reaches "0", ends AT. Further, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the AT (and advantageous section) ends.
The main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous sections, so the difference counter becomes "0" when the game shifts from the next game to the normal section.

In contrast, the sub-control board 80 is equipped with a sub-difference number counter that counts the difference number during the AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" when the AT starts (except when the AT is won during the pull-back period described below and the AT starts), and thereafter the difference number is updated for each game. Note that when a carryover occurs, unlike the difference number counter on the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the carryover remains as it is.

For example, when AT is started,
1st game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
Second game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
3rd game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
4th game: No winning combination (difference in number of coins "-3")
5th game: Push order bell win (difference in number of coins "+5")
Let us assume that it was.
In this case, the sub-difference counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
Second game: FFFD(H)-3(H)=FFFA(H)
3rd game: FFFA(H)+5(H)=FFFF(H)
4th game: FFFF(H)-3(H)=FFFC(H)
5th game: FFFC(H)+5(H)=0001(H)
It will be updated as follows.

Note that when a replay win occurs, the sub-difference number counter is not updated, similar to the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-difference number may be calculated by setting the number of payouts to "0" in the game at the time of replay winning, and setting the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replay) to "0".
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when ending the advantageous section, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 does not change the AT (advantageous section). Even if the initialization process is completed, the initialization process may not be executed immediately and the count may not be stopped. When the sub control board 80 ends AT and continues counting the sub difference number counter, the sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (to "1").

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. If AT ends when the sub-difference number of sheets counter is close to the upper limit value, when AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number of sheets counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately, so in such a case, , so that the difference number of sheets is not carried over to the next AT.

The pull-back flag is a flag for determining whether the AT has been pulled back (won again) within a predetermined number of plays ("50" plays in this embodiment) after the AT has ended.
When the AT ends, the pull-back flag is turned on and the pull-back play count counter is set to "50 (D)". The pull-back play count counter is used to count the number of plays after the AT ends (during the pull-back period). When the AT ends, the pull-back play count counter is set to "50 (D)", and thereafter, if the AT is not won, it continues to subtract "1" for each play. When the pull-back play count counter becomes "0", the AT pull-back has failed, the pull-back flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, after the AT ends, when the pull-back flag is on, the sub-control board 80 updates the sub-difference number counter.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special role such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, the pullback game count counter will be subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pullback game counter reaches "0", the AT pullback is successful, and in subsequent ATs, the number of coins inherited from the previous AT's difference number is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of coins at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference in the number of sheets from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT: -100 sheets, then the difference in the number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets". The image is displayed.

Further, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference sheet number counter is set. In this embodiment, the settings are as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) When the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize stops during AT and the number of coins that can be acquired in the special game related to the special prize (estimated difference number of coins) is "250 (D)", the upper limit value: "2414 (D)" )-250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during pullback period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, further counting of the sub difference number of sheets is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number of sheets displayed as images on the image display device 23 are linked (coinciding). For example, when the sub difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Number of sheets acquired during AT: 1000 sheets".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number of sheets counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum number of difference sheets displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is "2414 sheets". As a result, it is possible to prevent an image displaying an excessively large difference in the number of sheets, and to prevent an image display that greatly arouses the desire for gambling.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be won in BB play is 250, if BB is won during AT and the symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed in a stopped state, the sub-difference number counter value at that time is determined. Then, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it will exceed "2414 (D)" at the end of BB play, so the sub-difference number counter is cleared at the time the symbol combination corresponding to BB is displayed in a stopped state (2) above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays "Congratulations", "Congratulations", etc. as an image display corresponding to the difference in the number of sheets. In addition, in this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" etc. from the beginning of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number counter is kept until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference in number of sheets may increase during the withdrawal period. For example, there is a case where a special winning combination is won during the pullback period and the difference number counter value increases as a result of playing the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that when a specific BB is won, the AT will be won, after the BB game ends, the game will shift to the AT. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the BB game ends, the upper limit value will be reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, if you win a BB with AT during the AT withdrawal period and play the BB game, if the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number of sheets starts from "0" in the AT after the BB ends.

As described above, even if the special game is entered during the pullback period, the pullback game counter is not decremented during the special game. When a special winning combination is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or may be interrupted during the special game. An example of suspending the update is, for example, if you win a BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, these "250" coins are not added to the sub-difference coin counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number of coins starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game " When the player obtains ``250'' pieces, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes ``1250 (D)''. Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number of coins starts from "1250".
In addition, when continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, if the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game you win "250 (D)". When the number of coins is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" at AT after the end of the BB game.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in this embodiment, the difference number of the game is updated only when the game is started with a predetermined number of bets. Update the number of sheets.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined as when the number of bets (regular number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2". does not update the difference number of sheets in that game.

Next, the sub difference number counter management process will be explained using a flowchart.
FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently in progress). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process advances to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process advances to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, during non-AT and when the pullback flag is off, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process advances to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or withdrawal period, if the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the number of bets ("3") from the sub difference number counter. Next, the process advances to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command that allows the number of payouts to be determined to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the number of payouts to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has been turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag has risen or not). When it is determined that the AT flag has been turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned on in the current game (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it has been AT since before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. For example, if the AT flag is turned on in the current game ("Yes" in step S539) and the pullback flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), at this point the sub-difference number Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference sheet number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pull-back flag. In the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the pull-back play count counter. Here, when step S539 is "Yes" and step S540 is "Yes", this corresponds to a case where the AT is won during the pull-back period. Therefore, in this case, the pull-back flag is turned off and the pull-back play count counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, where the sub-control board 80 judges whether the sub-difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit value of "2414 (D)". If it is judged that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. This can occur when the difference number increases during the pull-back period after the AT ends, causing the sub-difference number counter to exceed "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that in a game where BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub difference number counter value), the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As mentioned above, if the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub difference number of coins counter will be "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds , it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the BB game This is to clear the sub-difference number counter before starting. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the AT flag has been turned off in the current game (whether the falling edge of the AT flag is on or not, i.e., whether the AT has ended in the current game). If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process proceeds to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the current game (the falling edge of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551.

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference sheet number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Through the above steps S548 to S550, if the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is set to "50 (D)". Set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is to make the AT pullback within 50 games a continuous AT chance (a condition for carrying over the sub-difference number of coins to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set to various values such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" depending on the specifications.
Also, if the sub-difference number counter is 2000 (D) or more at the end of AT, even if you pull back AT afterwards, there is a possibility that the sub-difference number counter will exceed the upper limit during AT after pulling back. is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is subsequently performed.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game in progress). Note that the information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (BB game), the update (subtraction) process of the pullback game counter is not executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pullback game number counter may be decremented even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback game counter has reached "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game counter is cleared. In addition, when "Yes" in step S554, since the pullback game number counter is "0", the clearing process of the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when the answer is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process advances to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter it remains "0" until AT starts. maintain.

In step S551, it is determined that the BB is in operation, and when the process proceeds to step S558, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the last game in which the BB is in operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not this is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. The decision may be made based on the command that is sent.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process advances to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. As a result, when a BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) is restarted from the next game. ) will be newly set. In other words, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, a BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference sheet number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, if the withdrawal period is in progress, the sub-difference number of coins at that time is determined, and if the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the withdrawal period ends. .

In the sub-difference number counter management described above, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when a bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number of sheets is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game completion check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, the sub-difference number counter may also perform subtraction of the bet number and addition of the payout number after all reels 31 are stopped, similarly to the difference number counter.

Moreover, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a digit decrease occurs), the sub-difference number counter stores the value (the value of the digit decrease). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a downturn occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing may be considered.
As described above, the sub-difference sheet number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit value is "2414(D)" or "096E(H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not a digit has fallen. When it is determined that a digit drop has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number of sheets to be displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of coins paid out, or the difference number of coins is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not this is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a prescribed number (bet number) is instructed before the start of the game.
Note that the display of the push order instruction information is the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function), and here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition device, the prescribed number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the accessory condition device (special combination) includes BB1 and BB2. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.
Further, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends when more than 30 coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If you win BB1 in a non-RT, you will move into BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move into BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops within BB1, the game shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the game shifts to BB2 operation, that is, a BB2 game.
Note that the number of special winnings that can be carried over is limited to one. Therefore, when BB1 is inside, BB2 does not win. Similarly, if BB2 is inside, BB1 will not be elected.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the prescribed number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (accessory object operation). The game cannot be started with a bet number of "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not activated is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Further, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is "16384", it means that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, when the specified number is "2", BB2 is drawn, but BB1 is not drawn. On the other hand, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RTs is "3" or the specified number within BB2 is "3", an advantageous section can be drawn by lottery. In the lottery for advantageous sections, it is set so that the winning section is always won, except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-mentioned "7P" type specifications.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2 and with a specified number of "3". Then, AT is drawn at random within BB2, and when AT is won, AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, whose winnings have been carried over, will not be allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently a non-RT, you need to move from a non-RT to inside BB2 (to win BB2 as a non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the specified number of "2".
Therefore, if the current status is non-RT, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win BB2, and the game is moved to BB2 from the next game. Furthermore, since the advantageous section lottery is received within BB2 when the specified number is ``3'', the game proceeds with the specified number of ``3'' within BB2.

In addition, BB2, which won with the specified number "2," cannot stop displaying that symbol combination unless the specified number is "2." Similarly, BB1, which won with the specified number "3", cannot display that symbol combination on the active line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, if you win BB2 with the specified number "2" in a non-RT, move into BB2, and proceed with the game with the specified number "3", even if the winning combination is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the design combination that corresponds to the winning special prize is stopped, the symbol combination is moved to a special game, and the number of medals is increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), non-RT players can win BB2 with a probability of about "1/5", so they can quickly move from non-RT players to BB2 players.
Furthermore, within BB2, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, there is a 100% probability that you will win an advantageous section. Therefore, within BB2, most of the gaming periods are advantageous periods. Note that it is of course possible to set the probability of winning in the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (processing related to the instruction function can be executed) only when a game is played with a specified number of players, particularly “3” in this embodiment. Therefore, if you win AT during the advantageous section inside BB2 and the AT is executed, if you start the game with the specified number "3" and win the push order bell, by activating the instruction function, , press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won.

Also, similar to the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the specified number "2" during the AT, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in that game, and the advantageous zone clear counter is updated. However, the AT play count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during the AT, the difference number counter, advantageous zone clear counter, and AT play count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) are all updated.
In addition, for RT, a transition is always made when a transition condition is met (when a symbol combination that satisfies the transition condition is displayed in a stopped state) regardless of the specified number. On the other hand, for the main game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.), a transition may be made regardless of the specified number, or a transition may be made only when a game is played with one specified number (for example, "3").

Inside BB2, if a game is started with the specified number "2" due to a player's operation error and the winning combination is not won in that game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that carries over winning can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with the specified number of ``2'' due to an operational error and wins any of the winning combinations in that game, the winning combination in that game will have priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which has a winning status, is not stopped and displayed. However, if you win a replay in that game, the next game will also be played with a bet number of "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has the win will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in BB2 and AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is informed that the game should be played with the specified number "2" (specified number instruction). . This is to make the player play the game with the specified number "2", make BB2 win, and move the player into BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the prescribed number "2" is specified until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. Note that the instruction for the specified number of "2" is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if it is not confused with any of the payout number, setting change display "88", error number, and push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, when the game shifts to non-RT after finishing the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the prescribed number "2" and transfer it to the BB2 at his/her own discretion.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the specified number of "3" and a win is won in the small winning combination or replay, the player also wins in the advantageous section. Then, when it is a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be specified (even if it is a non-AT).
Furthermore, without being limited to the above, when transitioning to non-RT, the prescribed number "2" may be specified regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the player places a bet number of "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player places a bet number of "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management process of step S276, but if it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified. (Execute the process to clear the acquired number data), and if the current bet number is "3", specify the specified number "2" (memorize the specified specified number display data as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

Further, when finishing the BB2 game and moving to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the last game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the process moves to the game start set process for the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is specified there.

In the non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game, or may be played multiple times.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when playing a game with the specified number of "2" in non-RT, there is a possibility of winning a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay). When a replay is won as a result of playing a game with the specified number "2," it is optional whether or not to specify the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be specified before the start of the game, regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped or not, until BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets) in the next game (replay), so it is recommended not to specify the specified number in that game. You can also do this.

This also applies, for example, when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number "3" in non-RT and AT. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number), so the prescribed number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be specified for the purpose of calling attention.
If a game is played with the specified number "2" in non-RT and AT, and you win BB2 and move to BB2 from the next game, you will not be able to specify the specified number unless you change to non-RT again. will not be carried out.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 have stopped, and when there is a payout based on winning a small winning combination, after the payout process is finished, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. before (for example, before it becomes possible to bet on medals (before bets are accepted)). Therefore, after a payout is made based on the winning of a small winning combination in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is specified before the start of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start setting process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. It is determined that it satisfies the requirements.

If it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the instruction condition for the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B (H)” is memorized.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting up digit 3a (the upper digit of the obtained number display LED 78), the upper digit of the specified specified number display data "0B (H)" is set in step S511. The offset “0(H)” is acquired, and segment data for displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Furthermore, at the timing of lighting up the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the specified specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start setting process in step S272 is a process before it becomes possible to bet and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, after the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when specifying the specified number in the next game when a replay prize is won, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is placed. This makes it possible to quickly instruct the player about the prescribed number.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquisition number data (specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the specified function is not activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even if the player wins the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. This is because, in this embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the case where the specified number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, the obtained number display LED 78 The display is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell was won. When this happens, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the obtained number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. 41. Note that since the acquisition number data is cleared in step S280 after operating the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the acquired number data is incremented by "1", so the acquired number display LED 78 displays the number of paid out. Ru.

Then, when proceeding to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number display data is stored as the obtained number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the obtained number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the designated specified number, clearing processing of the acquired number data may be executed. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, clearing processing of acquisition number data may be executed.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was specified, he ignored it and played the game with the specified number "3", winning BB1, moving into BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such behavior, for example, processing related to the instruction function may not be executed within BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate may be set to be less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Furthermore, since it is up to the player to decide which specified number to play, even if the specified number is ``3'' in a game where the specified number is ``2'' in an AT and non-RT game, the game will not be played. No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when specifying the specified number, the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the designated specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. may be set to be almost the same as the display start timing of displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the start of the game). It will be done.
Further, the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or may be different from the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" (5) After winning BB2 in a game with the specified number "2" (6) When all reels 31 stop in a game with the specified number "2" and winning BB2, etc.
In addition, when the designated designated number is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue to display the designated designated number as an image on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<13th embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of a configuration including reels 31 (31A to 31D) and stop switches 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front side of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and is capable of bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a portion of the operation button 24 is formed so that it can be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal thereof is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. The distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L1.
Further, among the four stop switches 42A to 42D, the distances between stop switches 42A and 42B, between stop switches 42B and 42C, and between stop switches 42C and 42D are all W2 (uniform). The line L1 is arranged so as to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Further, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (distance between centers) of the reels 31 is W3, then the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is all W3 (constant). It is.
Further, if the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is all W4 (constant distance). ).

Furthermore, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged to intersect with the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 intersects with the line L4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4, for example. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed to be horizontally long, and a line that touches the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that touches the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, etc., and in the example shown in FIG. 59, has the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42 side. Further, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Further, the right index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly deviated from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A by using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the player can operate the rightmost stop switch 42D by using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide, and similarly, the player can operate the stop switch 42D using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" selection pressing orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" selection pressing orders can be provided.
The higher the number of presses of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not activated and during non-AT, the number of out cards per 100 in sheets. For example, the number of out sheets per 100 in sheets) If the number of out cards is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is 4, the number of bells to be pressed in the lottery is 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, etc. ., 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. As shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winning positions for each pressing order bell is the same, the winning number for each pressing order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, since the number of winning positions for each push order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the push order operated by the player will match the correct push order when the push order bell is won can be reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order in which the correct answers are pressed.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be cited as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, a first method is to set the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. It will be done. For example, when the stop switches 42 are pressed in the order of stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A," "B," "C," and "D," respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

A second method is to apply a color to the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is red (each is a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", the notification may be "yellow red white blue" (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to fourth is displayed darkly (or hidden). can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first > brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third One example of this is to set the brightness of the image ≧ the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponds to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth. An example of this is to make the brightness of the image to be the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is to be displayed as an image as in the above example, "3●12" is first displayed as an image. In addition, "●" is an image corresponding to the "4th" press order, and it may be darkened (hidden) so that the character "4" is not visible at all, or the "4" character may be hidden. It may be dimmed to the extent that the characters are distinguishable.

When the image "3●12" is displayed, the image is displayed in the same way as when selecting 6, so it becomes easier for the player to intuitively understand the pressing order. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, any of the following 1) to 3) may be executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34●2".
2) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to a display such as "-" or "○", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34○2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

Also, after the second stop, images may be displayed as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" in the same way as above.
Furthermore, after the third stop, images may be displayed as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**".
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image of the push order itself may be erased.
Note that even if the order of all the presses is displayed as "4312" as an image as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 will be displayed. It is preferable to erase the stop switch 42 as described in 1) to 3) above, as this makes it easier to understand which stop switch 42 has been operated. Specifically, after displaying the image "4312", "43●2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4●●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image may be displayed ("●" may also be "○", "-", or "*" as described above).

Furthermore, a fourth method is to notify the pressing order using a four-character compound word. For example, when the pressing order is announced using "Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter" as one of the four-character idioms, the correct pressing order is "Spring→Summer→Autumn→Winter."
When the pressing order is "3412" as described above, an example is to notify (display an image or sound) "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image may be displayed as "Autumn/Spring/Summer" before the first stop, and "Autumn/Winter/Summer" after the first stop.
In addition, in any of the first to fourth methods, if a mistake occurs in the pressing order, the image of the pressing order may continue to be displayed, or the image of the pressing order may be displayed as is. You may also delete the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a push order bell with 24 options is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the press order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section lottery was performed only when the winning lottery result became the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as mentioned above, when the lottery result is non-winning (when the conditional device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transfer lottery, which is the processing related to the advantageous section, is carried out. This is because we thought it would be preferable not to do so. Therefore, it does not necessarily have to be set in this way, and the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process was executed after the advantageous section transfer lottery. Here, we set a winning lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be in an advantageous section, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transition process (Figure 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may. Similarly, a winning lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the AT setting process (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, we provide a lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transfer process and AT lottery process are not executed. AT set processing may also be executed.
Further, in the case where a winning lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous section transition lottery is provided, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed even when the winning lottery result is obtained. In this case, the winning number in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such an AT that manages the number of games, but may also be an AT that manages the number of differential cards. In the case of a difference number management type AT, when an AT is won, an initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.
In the case of such a differential number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the specified number is one (for example, "3"), but when it is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting is set to a state where the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, when the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting change becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an advantageous section may be displayed after the state in which settings can be changed (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before proceeding to main processing (before step S248). Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may also be executed. In this way, it becomes possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated every time the game is played. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0" or the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter. Determine whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process advances to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is played, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is determined whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. to judge. When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded or the upper limit value is the same value, the process advances to step S435.

If you judge the advantageous section clear counter value and/or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, the advantageous section clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value can be determined more accurately.
Note that if the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and second difference counter do not match, an error message will be displayed and the game will not proceed. (main processing) can be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to step S545, where it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub difference number counter is cleared, in that BB game, a special performance different from the normal BB game may be output. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (this is an example of a threshold value, and this value ) may be determined. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared and a special effect (a performance indicating that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. You can also output it.

Furthermore, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game (the special effect has not been output yet), the power will be restored from the power outage. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, at the time of recovery from the power cut, the sub difference number counter value and the fact that a BB game is in progress may be read to determine whether or not to output a special effect.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels 31 of a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game, the above-mentioned special effect may be output from the game that returns from the power outage. good. Therefore, in this case, if there is no power outage, the special effect will be output from the next game, but if there is a power outage while the reels 31 are rotating, the special effect will be output from that game. Become.

(7) Play the game with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), win the push order bell, and accidentally operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order. , When a small winning combination is paid out and the difference sheet counter exceeds ``2400 (D)'', at the end of the game, an effect indicating the end of AT, such as an image display such as ``END'', can be output. preferable. This is to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not reported and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as mentioned above, in order to prevent AT from ending in a game where the correct pressing order is not announced, for example, if you play a game with the specified number "2", you will win the pressing order bell. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the number of payouts for the game is set to ``2'' or less (the difference in the number of coins for the game is ``0'' or less), so that the AT does not end in the game. It's okay.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when winning a BB during AT and moving to BB gaming, the sub-difference number counter may not be updated (updating of the sub-difference number counter may be interrupted during BB gaming). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the BB is in operation (determined based on the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 are unnecessary. If "No" in step S547, the process advances to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similarly to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, this takes into account the rules. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number is "3") in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This was done in consideration of the fact that according to the rules, the transfer lottery for advantageous sections (processing related to advantageous sections) is limited to one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, unless this point is taken into consideration, advantageous section transition lottery may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2, and it is irregular for BB2 to win and shift to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after executing AT within BB2, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, BB2 is made to win and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied within BB2, after the game that satisfies the AT end condition (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been executed when a small prize is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before bets can be made), the specified number "2" is instructed to encourage winning of BB2. In the twelfth embodiment, BB2 is won with a specified number of “2”, so the specified number for winning BB2 is “2”, but for example, if a BB is provided that wins with a specified number of “1” In order to win that BB, the specified number "1" is specified.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When the specified number is specified, it is executed in the game start setting process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, it is not limited to this, and it may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is judged whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number for the next game is specified at the time of the game end check process. However, when a small role is won in the final game of the BB2 game, a payout is made, and the payout number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the specified number is specified after the payout number is displayed. Note that if the LED that indicates the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be specified on the dedicated LED while the payout number is being displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when a freeze is executed in the final game of BB2 game, the specified number for the next game may be indicated at the end of the game either before the freeze is executed, while the freeze is being executed, or after the freeze has ended.

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a game during an advantageous period, in a situation where it is advantageous to play with the specified number "3" (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set only for 3 bets. It can also be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is during the advantageous period and in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "3" bet is placed. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3" during the advantageous period, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet will not be placed. Set it as follows.

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2", it may be set so that "2" is bet when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated. In particular, in FIG. 58, in the non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that "2" is bet when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated when the number of credits is "2".

(6) When setting most of the game sections to advantageous sections as in the twelfth embodiment, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from a difference number counter) that can count the minus number of difference numbers is provided to calculate the payout rate for a predetermined period. When the ball output rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value according to regulations, for example), an instruction function is activated to increase the ball output rate. Good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
Activating the instruction function when a predetermined lower limit value is reached may be included in "AT" or may not be included in "AT". However, since the instruction function is still activated, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number is the acquisition number display LED 78. However, this is not limited to this, and may be set to another existing LED, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified command number is provided separately, after the information corresponding to the specified command number is displayed in the game start setting process, the information corresponding to the specified command number does not need to be erased even if the start switch 41 is operated. Furthermore, even if all the reels 31 stop, a small winning combination is achieved, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the specified command number does not need to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the specified number, the specified number can be displayed in any manner since it will not be confused with the payout number, error number, etc. For example, if the specified number is "2", it can be displayed as "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example was given in which the specified number “2” is specified, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” or “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of specifying any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the obtained number display LED 78 when specifying the specified number "1" is set to "A1", and the specified number is set to "A1". For example, the display indicating "2" may be set as "A2", and the display indicating the specified number "3" may be set as "A3".

C. 13th Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the four stop switches 42 may all be arranged to the right of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. On the contrary, all four stop switches 42 may be placed to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numerals may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the next stop switch to be operated is 42C, a lamp with the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
Furthermore, the ranges in which the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written are given different colors, and the stop switches 42A to 42D can also be given colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. It will be done.

(3) Furthermore, a portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be constituted by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is given a different color. In this case, when notifying the push order, for example, when specifying the stop switch 42B (blue), the area around the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 selections of pressing orders can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three choices for the first stop pressing order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When displaying an image of the correct pressing order when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the stop switch 42 that is the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, an image of "XX1x" may be displayed.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as the stop switch 42C, the second stop as the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and fourth stop as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D may be used). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Furthermore, when displaying the correct answer press order as an image, in the above example, "2x1x" may be displayed as an image. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image such as "2×-×" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information.
Hereinafter, fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start or display end timings of the push order instruction information are different will be described.

<Fourteenth embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (A). The main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 of the embodiment, the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in FIG. 48, the medal payout by winning in FIG. 49, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. ).
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the push order bell is won during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

If the input port reading process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then the lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are performed. ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a role with an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during the AT, a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored as the winning number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

In the 14th embodiment (A), an interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms, as in the 11th embodiment. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that five interrupts make one cycle.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in Figures 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, the display of push sequence instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 will begin after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, within 5 interrupts (2.235 x 5 = 11.175 ms) after the push sequence instruction number is stored as the winning number data.

After the push order instruction number is stored as acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interrupt, and the press order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interrupt. Information may also be displayed.
Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285. In the control command set 1 between the push order instruction number set and preparation for starting reel rotation, the production group number or the push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting a control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80. 2 control command to the sub control board 80. This makes it possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, the control command buffer can store 32 control commands. Then, by transmitting the control command during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
Note that if a control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt processing at that time.

From the above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) or not, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in about one interrupt (2.235 ms).

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of effects during play and during game standby. The second sub-control board is also a control board subordinate to the first sub-control board. The main control board 50 transmits control commands unidirectionally to the first sub-control board, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bidirectionally.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command sent from the main control board 50. Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command regarding the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Furthermore, peripheral devices for presentation such as a presentation lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub-control board. The second sub-control board selects a performance based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls the peripheral equipment for performance to output various performances.

Specifically, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
In addition, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, when it determines that it is a control command related to an image. stores an image command in the command buffer according to the analysis result.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command transmission processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= cycle of sub-main processing It takes about 16ms x 2).
The second sub-control board then executes a drawing process based on the received image command, and displays the image on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board sends an image instructing the push order (push order instruction image) to the image display device. It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) until the image is displayed on 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Before this occurs, that is, before the rotation of the reels 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 is ready for operation, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reels 31 start rotating.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated) or not, the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and then the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control commands stored in the control command buffer are sent to the sub-control board 80 by control command transmission (step S464) during interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that it is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first). When this happens, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is 2 sub-control board, and when it is determined that the command is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last), the control command is sent to the second sub-control board. Send the image command to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompting the operation of the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a press order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. Displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is finished, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (an image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 stop ("Yes" in step S289), the acquisition number data is cleared (step S290). For example, assume that when the push order bell is won during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is first completed, and then the push order instruction on the acquisition number display LED 78 is completed. The information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed based on winnings. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquisition number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning. As a result, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is increased by "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S399. For example, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when medals are paid out, the number of acquired medals is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during AT and the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, all the reels 31 stop. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". Thereafter, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 remains at "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when there is a payout of 10 medals, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 will be "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → "09" → "10" when the medals are paid out. Count up.

As explained above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the winning combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated). After this is done and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), it is possible to immediately start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78.

<Fourteenth embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in the timing at which the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 starts, and the push order instruction information is displayed at the start of rotation of the reel 31. This is the start of the process.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the process is executed in the order of setting the push order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation, but in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number set and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and the push order instruction number set is executed after preparing to start reel rotation.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, the winning lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), and the reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. After step S601, the process advances to step S285.
Further, in step S285, preparations for starting reel rotation are executed. In this preparation for starting the reel rotation, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the minimum game time (the minimum time from when the reel 31 starts rotating to when the reel 31 starts rotating in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 has an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time. The initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)." Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt process (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0," it is again determined whether the timer value is "0," and when it is determined that the timer value is "0," the initial value of the timer value is set and the process proceeds to step S284.
In this manner, in the preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. After step S602, the process advances to step S288.
Note that the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, the flowchart of the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 41.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 64 shows the timing when the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the push order instruction information is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the production group number or the push order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, more specifically, after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board) in about 235 ms).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285 is executed, and then the push order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 will start when the reels 31 start rotating.

Further, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 in the push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display an image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Before this becomes possible, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 will start.
On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 start rotating.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 63, first, the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 begins, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 begins.
In contrast, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 64, first the display of a push order instruction image begins on the image display device 23, and then the display of push order instruction information begins on the number of winnings display LED 78.
In other words, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum play time has elapsed, the order in which the push order instruction information starts to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 and the push order instruction image starts to be displayed on the image display device 23 is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. After the start switch 41 was turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 started rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 was started. That is, after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 was immediately started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the win number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 may be turned on due to winning a winning combination with an advantageous push order such as the push order bell in the winning lottery (internal lottery). (Operation) The player will immediately know after performing the operation.
Although this does not have an advantageous pressing order, there is a risk of discouraging players who have been waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is a condition for determining the additional number of AT games.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, by storing the push order instruction number as the number of acquisition data, when the reels 31 start rotating, the number of acquisition display LEDs 78 are pressed. Start displaying order instruction information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum gaming time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

In addition, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the 5th interrupt (2.235 x5=11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) is stored. However, it takes approximately 65.33 ms from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes time.

In this way, the time required from storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data to displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set as "X", and the main control board 50 sets the push order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after sending it to the first sub-control board is "Y", it is necessary to satisfy "X<Y". It is set to .
Furthermore, when the cycle of the interrupt processing is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt processing is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the number of acquisition data, and then the number of digits that are pressed is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. It takes a maximum of "T×N" time to display the order instruction information. Therefore, it is set to satisfy "T×N<Y".
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is first started, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is started. The display of the instruction image is started.

<Fourteenth embodiment (C)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (C), the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends is different from that in the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B), and the display of the push order instruction information ends when the medals are paid out.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers.

In FIG. 41, when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in step S289, the process proceeds to step S290 and the obtained number data is cleared, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and the symbol display is determined without clearing the obtained number data.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from FIGS. 41 and 49 of the eleventh embodiment.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then the winning lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) , control command set 1 (step S601), and preparation for starting reel rotation (step S285).
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

In addition, in FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop reception check (step S287), and then the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed. This is similar to FIG. 62 in (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, where symbol display is determined. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps that are different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the acquisition number data between step S398 and step S400.

FIGS. 67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing. Accordingly, the number of acquired medals (for example, "10" when 10 medals are paid out) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medals are paid out. Subsequently, when medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 switches from the push order instruction information to the acquired number (for example, from "=1" to "10").
Note that the timing of starting to display the number of acquired medals, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are as described in the fourteenth embodiment ( This is the same as A).

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the number of wins data is maintained without being cleared, and the number of payouts is used as the number of wins data in step S611 of medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. 66. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.
Furthermore, until it is time to pay out medals, the press order instruction information continues to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the press order instruction information to the acquired number, so that the acquired number is displayed. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for pressing order instruction information and the number of acquired coins, it can be arranged so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of coins.

<Fourteenth embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the timing at which the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and the reels 31 can be stopped. When the button is pressed, the display of press order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reels 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, and a push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
The contents of the process in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
Further, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

FIGS. 70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction number set is executed, so as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the game starts before the minimum gaming time elapses. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information will be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. is started.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the After the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 start rotating.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether this is the case, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable; , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. First, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and then the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reels 31 can be stopped, so as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. , the pressing order instruction information can be notified to the player before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth embodiment (E)>
The fourteenth embodiment (E), like the fourteenth embodiment (B), starts displaying the push order instruction information when the reels 31 start rotating, and like the fourteenth embodiment (C), medals are paid out. The display of the push order instruction information is then terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 in the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

FIGS. 73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reels 31 start rotating, the order of presses on the obtained number display LED 78 is The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended when medals are paid out, similarly to FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

Note that the timing to start displaying the number of acquired medals, the timing to send the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing to start and end the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are as described in the 14th embodiment (B ).
In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, so that the reel 31 At the start of rotation, display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (E), as in the 14th embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the data on the number of wins is maintained without being cleared, and the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medals are paid out.Furthermore, when the medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 can be continued. Since the pressing order instruction information is switched to the number of acquired coins, although the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number of coins, it is possible to prevent the display of the acquired number of coins from being obstructed.

<Fourteenth embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel 31, stop switch 42, and operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. As shown in FIG. This stop instruction lamp 25 instructs the reel 31 to stop, and is constituted by an LED lamp.

A stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the left reel 31 and lights up when instructing the left reel 31 to stop is the left stop instruction lamp 25.
Similarly, a stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
Further, the stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the right reel 31 to stop.
The sub-control board 80 then controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub-control board 80 is made up of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop indicator lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
The second sub-control board controls the turning on/off of each stop indication lamp 25 and displays images on the image display device 23 based on the control commands transmitted from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a role with an advantageous push order, such as a push order bell, is won during the AT, the main control board 50 stores the push order instruction number as a control command in the control command buffer in control command set 1 during the main processing (M_MAIN).
Then, the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-control board by sending a control command (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Further, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub-control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, if it determines that it is the push order instruction number, , store lamp control commands and image commands according to the analysis results in a command buffer.

Further, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
Therefore, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board sends a lamp control command and an image. It takes about 32 ms (=16 ms cycle of sub-main processing x 2) until the command is received.

Then, the second sub-control board controls the lighting/extinguishing of the (left, center, right) stop instruction lamps 25 based on the received lamp control command, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating a left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the user to operate the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt process.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms after receiving the lamp control command sent from the first sub-control board until it lights up the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. It takes.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from the time when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board performs drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so one image is displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) until the push order instruction image is displayed on the display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Figure 76 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum play time has elapsed, and Figure 77 shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum play time has elapsed.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the 14th embodiment (F) as well, as in the 14th embodiment (B), whether the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed. Or, regardless of whether it is after the elapse of time, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when turning on the third stop switch 42 is detected, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, due to the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.
Note that the timing to start displaying the number of acquired medals and the timing to transmit the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms after the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reels 31 start rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. An order instruction image is displayed, and finally, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since it is necessary to execute drawing processing in order to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights up faster.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (F) in that it includes a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the push order instruction information, and that the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (F). The rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Note that a dedicated 7-segment display for displaying push order instruction information is referred to as a push order instruction LED.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), a storage area for press order instruction data is secured in the RWM 53. The push order instruction data is data for displaying push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

FIGS. 78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

In the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game Regardless of whether the time has elapsed or not, the display of the push order instruction information starts when the reels 31 start rotating.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a push order instruction number is set in the storage area of push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, in the interrupt process executed after this process, press order instruction information is displayed on the press order instruction LED.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (F), since the press order instruction information was displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, by clearing the acquisition number data by the time of paying out medals, the acquisition number display LED 78 It was possible to display the number of medals earned.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction data is maintained without being cleared even when medals are paid out, so as shown in FIGS. Pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

In this manner, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED, so that the push order instruction information is not displayed when medals are paid out. Even if the process is continued, the display of the number of acquired medals can be prevented.
Furthermore, the timing of starting to display the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The timing of display termination is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
Push order instruction information is transmitted from the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the time when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the correct pressing order can be notified to the player before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information is as follows.
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating , and before the reel 31 can be stopped. 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is terminated from the time the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number of medals can be prevented from being impeded.
Therefore, the timing for the end of displaying the push order information is as follows:
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on and then turned off (when the player releases his/her hand from the third stop switch 42).
3) When all reels 31 stop; and 4) When medals are paid out.
In addition, when the push order instruction information is displayed on a dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may continue when the medals are paid out, and the display of the push order instruction information may be terminated after the medals are paid out.

Furthermore, before the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates a control command, and the main control board 50 sends the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80. It takes a certain amount of time to transmit the control command to the sub-control board 80, receive and analyze the control command on the sub-control board 80, and perform drawing processing and display on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Also, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the rotation of the reels 31 and the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 may be started. The order of may be changed.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows:
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; 2) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, the period from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the sub-control board 80 to when the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is also , it takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends is after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G), and can be set in any appropriate combination.

In addition, in a game where the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if a press order error occurs during the game, the press order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the press order instruction information may be terminated when a press order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a press order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a press order error occurs midway through, the press order instruction will continue until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the push order instruction image may be terminated when a press order error occurs.

In addition, when three medals are inserted and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet and the game can be started, so that the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1 bet display LED 79a is turned on, and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

Thereafter, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit in sequence, and finally the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay prize is won when 3 coins are inserted, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up, and when the 2 bet display LED 79b, 3 bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order The display on the acquisition number display LED 78 of instruction information may be terminated.

In addition, when winning a small prize, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. However, when winning a replay prize, when the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order of the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information may be ended.
That is, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be made different between when a minor winning combination is won and when a replay winning is achieved.
Of course, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be the same when winning a small winning combination and when winning a replay prize.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and a first control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 via one parallel communication line and a second control command is sent to the sub-control board 80 via the other parallel communication line, making it possible to send a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data to the sub-control board 80 with a single interrupt processing.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the first control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during one interrupt process, and the second control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2 bytes of data may be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, or control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. Good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and The board) executed a drawing process based on the received push order instruction number and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) The drawing process may be executed based on the received condition device number, and the press order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23.

For example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) receives the received effect group number. The pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 by executing the drawing process based on the above.
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of the addition process for medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47.
Below, we will explain fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) which differ in the timing of the medal addition process.

<Fifteenth embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted through the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal path in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided on the medal passage in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, a blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 first pass through the passage sensor 46 and then reach the blocker 45 . Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal path pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the input sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance apart.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Furthermore, when the medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a first changes from off to on, and the input sensor 44b remains off.

When the medals further flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains on, and the input sensor 44b changes from off to on.
After that, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a changes from on to off, and the input sensor 44b remains on.
Thereafter, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.
The medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state of (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred, and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error message to the sub-control board 80, as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send a command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80 (d) continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, as in the cases of (b) and (c) in Fig. 80, and transmits an error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Also, when the state shown in FIG. 80(e) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (a bet process or a credit process).
80(e), if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that point is "1", the process of adding "1" to the number of bets updates the number of bets from "1" to "2".

In addition, when the state of (e) in Figure 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Furthermore, when the state shown in FIG. 80 (e) is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passage error occurs before the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the medals and does not send the input command.

Furthermore, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the main control board 50 controls the operation of the start switch 41. The game is brought into a state where it can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to medals.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, explanations are omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since this is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and processes the addition of "1" to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), after the process of adding "1" to the medal and outputting the insertion sound, there are cases where it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred and an error sound is output.
In this way, when the state of (d) in Figure 81 is reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of medals is executed and the insertion sound is output. If the state of (d) in Figure 81 continues for a predetermined period of time or more and an error sound is output thereafter, the insertion sound is output followed by an error sound, so that even if an error occurs, the player can be informed by the insertion sound that a medal has been inserted.
In addition, when a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in Figure 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" increment process, nor does it send an insertion command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Furthermore, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state (e) in FIG. The game is set in a state where it can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
For this reason, in the 15th embodiment (B), the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, the timing for outputting the input sound, the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on. The timing is different.

Here, as explained in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the process of adding "1" to the medal is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to carry out
However, if the medal flows down the medal path to the position shown in (d) in FIG. 81, the medal enters the hopper 35 because it has already passed through the blocker 45.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the input sensor 44b remains on and the input sensor 44a changes from on to off), the medal is "1". Executes addition processing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent medals from entering the hopper 35 even though the medal adding process has not been executed, so-called swallowing of medals.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, if the state of (d) in FIG. After transmitting the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition process has already been executed and the input sound has been output, so the error can be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector can be put into the hopper 35. Thereby, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal comes off the medal path at the position of the blocker 45. The medals are returned from the medal payout port 16.
At this time, at the timing when the 50th medal is in the state (d) in FIG. 81 (the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on), the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, and the blocker is Turn off 45. Thereby, the 51st medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout port 16 without being swallowed.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the start switch 41 is operated. will be ready to accept. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the start command, the sub control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing (e) in FIG. 80, when the start switch 41 is brought into a state in which operation can be accepted and the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. Make it available for reception. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 from overlapping.

<Fifteenth embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to the medal, but the output timing of the input sound is different from the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. 80 and 81, so explanations are omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since this is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, it will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and processes the addition of "1" to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing (e) in FIG. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 continues for a predetermined time or more, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, but the error sound is output without outputting the input sound. Thereby, priority can be given to error notification.

Then, when the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22 based on the received input command. This allows the player to be informed that medals have been inserted, thereby making the player feel at ease.
Furthermore, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted, The lighting of the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides the medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, the chute passage 48, and the chute sensor 49, in which the medals M input from the medal input port 47 pass through the input sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, and chute sensor 49, and enter the hopper. FIG.

The chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. The medals M inserted from the medal input port 47 reach the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35.

The chute sensor 49 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifling act, and is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is placed at a predetermined position in the middle of the chute path 48. and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is arranged downstream from the input sensors 44a and 44b.

In the 16th embodiment, the input monitoring counter adds "1" ( This is a counter that is subtracted by 1 (-1) when the shoot sensor 49 detects passage of the medal M. Therefore, during normal operation, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0".
Note that the timing at which the input monitoring counter is incremented by "1" is the timing at which the input sensor 44b is turned from on to off (timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (e)).
Furthermore, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing when the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, but also the timing when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (as shown in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b) timing), the timing at which the input sensor 44a changes from on to off (the timing at (c) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b changes from off to on. (The timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (d)) may be used. This is because if the medal M reaches these timings, it is considered that the medal M will enter the hopper 35.
Furthermore, when the medal M passes through the chute sensor 49, the chute sensor 49 changes from off to on to off, but the timing at which the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1" is the timing at which the chute sensor 49 changes from on to off. be.

Further, when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (the input monitoring counter = "+1") and the chute sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M. When the passing of the medal is further detected, the input monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error.
Furthermore, when the input sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M and only the chute sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 It is determined to be a passing error.

Note that the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error not only when the input monitoring counter becomes "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passing error occurs when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more or a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred when the shoot sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shoot sensor 49 detected the medal M. When the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, it stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medals M inserted from the medal input port 47 pass through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 and reach the hopper 35. At this time, it passes through the input sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, and chute sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47, the position M2 indicates the position of the medal M stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position M3 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the path 48 is shown, and the position M4 shows the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute path 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, the chute is moved to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute path 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute path 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and if this condition continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, suppose that three medals M are inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 when the specified number is "3" and both the bet number and credit number are "0". In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 places the start switch 41 in a state in which it is ready to accept operation (play can begin) and turns on the game start indicator LED 79d. At this time, if the first medal M (M2) gets stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. If this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred and stops the progress of the game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing with medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

Note that the position of the chute sensor 49 is not limited to a position where it can detect the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. If the specified number is "N", the chute sensor 49 should be placed at a position where it can detect the Nth medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. 87 is a side view of the passage forming member 130. It is a sectional view taken along the line AA.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front, and a front door 12 that closes the opening of the cabinet 13.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 in the lower part.
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. is located.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12, a medal receiving tray is provided at the bottom front of the front door 12 to receive the medals paid out from the medal payout port 16, and A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower part.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position at the bottom of the back surface of the front door 12, thereby forming a return medal passage 132 and a payout medal passage. 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage that guides medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout port 16.
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
Note that the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided at the upper part of the passage forming member 130. This upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening that becomes the upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and is closed when the front door 12 is closed. It is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector.
The medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 pass through the upper medal receiving port 131, are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and toward the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). This lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening that forms the upstream end of the payout medal passage 134, and is formed so as to be located in front of the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
Then, the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the front side of the passage forming member 130, forming the back side of the front door 12. Boards are placed. In this way, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12.
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, passing through the dispensing medal passage 134, and passing through a position opposite to the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. It hits and bounces off. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short, the medals M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medals M that are next ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. There is a possibility that the medals M collide with each other.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This makes it difficult for the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 to collide with the medal M that is ejected next from the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15.

That is, the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 falls downward due to gravity, heading toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87). Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the position at which it was ejected. Furthermore, the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 falls downward due to gravity, heading toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (to the left in FIG. 87).
Furthermore, by setting the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 to more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, a sufficient difference in height can be secured between the medal M that is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 and heads toward the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12, bounces off, and heads toward the lower medal receiving opening 133, making it less likely that the two medals M will collide.

In addition, if medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 will collide with the medal M that bounces off the back surface of the front door 12.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounds, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It is set.
That is, the interval at which medals M are ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. is set so that the above relationship is satisfied.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 at a lower position than the ejected position, and after falling to an even lower position, the next medal M is ejected from the medal dispensing device 15. If the medals are ejected from the no. 15 ejecting section 103, a sufficient distance and height difference between the two medals can be ensured, and it is possible to make it difficult for the medals M to collide.
Here, when the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 collides with the medal M that is ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next, the medal There is a possibility that the medal M gets stuck in the passage 134.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so as to be difficult to collide with each other, thereby preventing the medals M from clogging in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. .
In addition, in this embodiment, the settings are made such that the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M that is ejected next from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 are unlikely to collide. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103, this does not mean that all the medals M before and after will not collide, but at least the first medal M and the second medal M will not collide. It is sufficient as long as there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out, so if the setting is made so that the first medal M and the second medal M are less likely to collide, it is possible to place them near the lower medal receiving opening 133. This is because the medals M can be prevented from becoming clogged in the payout medal passage 134.

Further, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding parts 102 along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101, which can hold the medals M stored in the hopper. There is.
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are met, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are met, two or more medals M are consecutively released from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Medals M are held in two adjacent holding parts 102 of the hopper disk 101, respectively.
(b) When the number of medals remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "N" and the number of medals M paid out by winning is "M", "(MN)≧2" is satisfied.
(c) The payment switch 43 was operated when the number of credits was "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, medals M are held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C", respectively. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding section 102 located at the position of the letter "D".
For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" 102 and the holding unit 102 located at the position of the letter "D", when the medal M is held respectively, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in Figure 17 (b) of the sixth embodiment, when a medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 at the position of the letter "B," the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C," and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D," the above condition (a) is met.
Of course, when medals M are held in all of the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is met.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of credits until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "3", and at this time, the number of payouts If a small winning combination of "5" or more is won, the above condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of credits until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "0", and at this time, the number of payouts is "2". ” or more wins, the above condition (b) is satisfied.

From the above, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" have medals, respectively. If the condition (b) or (c) above is satisfied in a situation where M is held, two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but at least the medal M is held at the position of the letter "C". Even when the conditions (b) or (c) above are satisfied in a situation where medals M are held in the holding part 102 and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "D", medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are successively ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the device 15.

Further, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 may bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133. If the returned medals M pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, they fall inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T" ”.

In other words, the height "L2" of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if a medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12, bounces off, and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133, the returning medal M can be made to hit the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 and not pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in an inclined state with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving port 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the medals M to be ejected.

Here, the height direction is a direction perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the medal M that has been ejected in an inclined state. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. It is set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

Thereby, even if the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 rotates within the payout medal path 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from becoming parallel to the vertical plane within the payout medal path 134. Therefore, the medals M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
Note that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<18th embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to external signal transmission processing.
In the 18th embodiment, signals indicating on/off can be output as external signals 4 and 5.
In the 18th embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch on signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (that the power has been turned on).
Further, the external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the 18th embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether input port 0 is on/off. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D4: Unused D5: Unused D6: Power-off detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the "power-off detection signal" of the D6 bit is input when a power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (11th embodiment)). It's a signal.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Furthermore, it is equipped with a full sensor that turns on when a medal comes into contact with the sub-tank when it becomes full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 is changed from off (during the previous interrupt processing) to on (during the current interrupt processing). The storage area for input port rise data is used to store data indicating that the input port is rising, and the data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has changed from on (during the previous interrupt processing) to off (during the current interrupt processing). It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port falling data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0, and for example,
(1) Input port 1 into which operation switch signals such as the bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are input;
(2) Input port 2 into which signals from the passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc. are input
Equipped with etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Furthermore, if only a storage area for input port level data is provided (in a case where a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data is not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt processing is In addition, a storage area for input port level data from the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery at address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts the time for outputting external signal 4 at power-off recovery. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, when the power switch 11 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power-off, "136 (D)" is set as an initial value in the address "F013 (H)". and is decremented by 1 for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, in the 18th embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "2.235 ms" like the other embodiments. Therefore, "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96ms". As a result, when recovering from power-off, the external signal 4 is turned on for approximately 300 ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is a storage area for timer values for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when starting the output of the external signal 4 (excluding when returning from the power cut mentioned above), and is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating "on" can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at address “F015(H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In this embodiment, an initial value "24 (D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
Similarly to the above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating "on" can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, in this embodiment, the external signal 4 output time, external signal 4 management time, and external signal 5 management time at the time of power-off recovery are all 1-byte timers because they measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are then subtracted by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing in FIG.
Here, in the 18th embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in the timer measurement, in the first step, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00(H)", the result is "00(H)". .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when an error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". For example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105 (D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051 (H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are illustrated as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are illustrated as unrecoverable errors. In contrast, the errors “E0” to “E7” in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, the progress of the game is, in principle, stopped. Further, even when at least one reel 31 is rotating, error detection is executed for at least some errors (in the example of the 18th embodiment, "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors). When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the game continues to progress until all reels 31 stop, and when all reels 31 stop, an error state ( (error display), and the progress of the game is stopped. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occur while the reels 31 are rotating, the progress of the game will be stopped (stop control is not performed by operating the stop switch 42). ) is also possible.

In FIG. 88, the "E0" error is an error that occurs when the insertion sensor 44 determines that medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b in the correct order.
The "E2" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The "E3" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 determines that medals are stuck (stuck) in a situation where a medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on in a situation where no medal payout signal is output.
The "E6" error is an error that occurs when the input sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", it becomes possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address "F051(H)" may be output to the acquired number display LED 78, and an error number may be displayed. Specifically, when the error field code "101 (D)" is stored in the address "F051 (H)", the digit At the lighting timing of 3, lighting data of digit 3 and segment data for displaying "E" as lighting are output. Furthermore, at the lighting timing of digit 4, the lighting data of digit 4 and segment data for displaying "1" as lighting are output.

Also, when any error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)" (when it is not "0"), external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). ).
After the hall clerk eliminates the error that has occurred, he turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether the error that occurred has been removed. When it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the current status (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that occurred has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored at address "F051 (H)" is cleared. When the error number of the address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number using digits 3 and 4) ends.
Although the above is an example of displaying the error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the other embodiments described above, the error number is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or the error number may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. A dedicated LED may be provided and the information may be displayed on the LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294 (H)" is a storage area for remembering that an error has been detected, in case it is not possible to immediately transition to the error state when an error is detected. It is. In the example of FIG. 88, bits D0 to D2 in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. The "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are all errors that may be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, even if the reels 31 are rotating, for example, it is determined by interrupt processing whether an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not occur immediately at that point, but only after all reels 31 have stopped. The system enters an error state before the payout process is executed.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. Furthermore, when the error detection flag is stored at address "F294(H)" and then the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", when should the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" be cleared? is optional. For example, first, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (external signal 4 indicates on). (enables signal output). When it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Second, after storing the error detection flag at address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" is cleared. There are many things you can do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). ). Further, when the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Thereafter, when it is determined that the error has been removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Note that when an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, etc., it cannot immediately shift to the error state (error display) (it cannot shift to the error state until all reels 31 have stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or can immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether or not to do so is optional. To simplify processing, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where a transition to an error state is possible, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, if the error state cannot be immediately transitioned to (for example, while at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". '', and when the situation is such that it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (eg, waiting for a game), the error number may be stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the above storage area of RWM53, the storage areas of addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . In contrast, the storage area at address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the used area. Further, a program for detecting errors is stored in a control area of the ROM 54 outside the used area.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5. FIG. 89 shows example 1, and FIG. 90 shows example 2.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between on/off of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be outputted as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in the interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), when the level data of input port 0 is read in the input port read process of step S457 and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external Turn on signal 4 (enable to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4).

Further, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned on and then turned off immediately (for example, after "10" ms have elapsed), the external signal 4 remains on (external) until at least "50" ms have passed. (It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that 50 ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON was enabled to be output as external signal 4). , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). If 50 ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the external signal 4 will be turned off as soon as the setting key switch is detected to be off. (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, when the setting key switch is detected as being on and external signal 4 is turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is on) and then the setting key switch is detected as being off before 50 ms has elapsed, external signal 4 is turned off (making it possible to output a signal indicating that external signal 4 is off) after a minimum of 50 ms has elapsed as the output time for external signal 4.
On the other hand, when it is detected that the setting key switch is on and external signal 4 is turned on (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), and then 50 ms or more have elapsed since the setting key switch is turned off, it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. "Detection of error" here corresponds to the fact that any bit in the error detection flag of address "F294(H)" is "1", and "non-detection of error" means that the error concerned This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
When "1" is stored in the error detection flag, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be outputted as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Further, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating "on" can be outputted as the external signal 4) (time t3). Further, when the error detection flag is cleared, it is possible to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). Note that, as described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed, and when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), before "50" ms has elapsed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4. ).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag became "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), more than "50" ms has passed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between error display/non-display and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "error display" means that the error number of address "F051(H)" has a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any value from "100(D)" to "107(D)") ) is stored, and "hidden error" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". Note that a storage area may be provided for storing a flag indicating display/non-display of errors, but as in this embodiment, data stored in the storage area for displaying error numbers may be provided. By determining whether to display or hide errors, it is possible to reduce the amount of storage space used.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when a value other than the error number "0" is stored until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, once a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). In addition, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the error number When cleared, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, after the error number is stored and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), if the error number is cleared before "50" ms has elapsed, After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, if the error number is cleared after 50 ms or more has passed after the error number is memorized and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), It is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods can be used to determine whether the power is turned on (whether the power switch 11 in FIG. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is stored.
When the power is turned on (when the initial value is stored in the output time of external signal 4 at power-off recovery), it is possible to immediately turn on external signal 4 (indicates on as external signal 4). (can output signals). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( Time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of external signal 4 becomes "0" at power-off recovery, it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the power switch 11 is turned off. When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off after "300" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (the external (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the output time of the external signal 4 is " When 300'' ms has elapsed, even if the power switch 11 remains on, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(e) shows the relationship between opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to the time when it is detected that the door switch is turned on. In particular, in the 18th embodiment, this corresponds to when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When it is detected that the door switch is turned on, the external signal 5 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is turned on until the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Further, when it is detected that the door switch is turned on, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 remains on for at least 50 ms (external signal 5 indicates on). signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch was on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5), the off state of the door switch was detected before "50" ms had elapsed. In this case, the external signal 5 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch was turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5), it was detected that the door switch was turned off after 50 ms or more had elapsed. In this case, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of external signal 4 or external signal 5 is a hall computer, etc., but external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4 or 5). ), the hall computer (data lamp) etc. can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch momentarily (for example, about 5 to 10 ms) or a fraudulent act including momentarily opening the front door 12, the hall The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG. 89.
In FIG. 90,
The time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from the time when the error number shown in (c) is stored until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t1 from when the door switch shown in (e) is turned on to when the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5)
are both set to "0" ms.

In addition, in FIG. 90, the interval of time t1 is illustrated as exceeding "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing when the setting key switch turns from off to on and the timing of the external signal 4 are changed. The timing at which the output turns from off to on is almost the same (the timing at which the setting key switch turns from off to on, and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 turns from off to on is within 2 divisions). .
Further, the external signal 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure are turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4 and 5) at a time t3. is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is similar to the example in FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 in which the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) in FIG. 89(d) is "300" ms, as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
The time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is turned off to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until turning off the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating off as the external signal 4);
The time t2 from when the external signal 4 output time becomes "0" at the time of power-off recovery shown in (d) until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from the time when the off-state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected until the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5)
are all "50" ms.

To do this, for example, a timer is required to manage the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is turned off, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. Set the value "24 (D)", subtract "1" from the timer value for each interrupt processing, and turn off external signal 4 when the timer value reaches "0" (turn off external signal 4). ).
Similarly, when the off-state of the door switch is detected, a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and "1" is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt processing, When the timer value reaches "0", the external signal 5 may be turned off (a signal indicating off may be outputted as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flowchart. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing example 1 of external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. 91. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing. Furthermore, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is a process that is inserted between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG. 53, for example.

First, example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process advances to step S3237, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not on, the process advances to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process advances to step S3237, and if it is determined that any bit is not "1" (no error has been detected), the process advances to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0" or not. If it is "0", it is determined that no error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3234, and if it is a value other than "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms have passed since the power was turned on. As mentioned above, when recovery from power off is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power off recovery at address "F013 (H)", and It is subtracted by "1". In step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is "0", and if it is "0", "300" ms have passed since the power was turned on. After determining that, the process advances to step S3235. On the other hand, if the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 management time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0" (when it is determined that the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed), The process advances to step S3236, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).

In contrast, if the answer is "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233 and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether the setting key switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. Whether the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data has changed to on in the current interrupt process is, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the input port 0 rising data is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt process is saved, and if the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt process was "0" and the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt process is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on in the current interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that it has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, by saving the error detection flag from the previous interrupt processing and performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag from the current interrupt processing, the error detection flag can be changed from OFF to ON during the current interrupt processing. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number has changed from being hidden ("0") to being displayed (other than "0"). Here, for example, by saving the error number from the previous interrupt processing and comparing it with the error number from the current interrupt processing, we can determine whether the error number from "0" to "0" is different from "0" during the current interrupt processing. determine whether it has become. If it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the process advances to step S3240; if it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process advances to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)", which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, as an initial value. . Then, the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 management time is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S3244, and when it is determined that it is not "0", step Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data is Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Second, save the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt processing, and make sure that the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "0" in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3246, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms as an initial value. Then, the process advances to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, when a new error number is stored, the output time of external signal 4 is set.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, the current interrupt processing is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether or not the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIGS. 91 and 92. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, if "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery of address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) When it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
respectively, proceed to step S3240 and store the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms at the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was on, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set to the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". Thereafter, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on in the current interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the external signal 4 management time "24(D)" is reset. When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined that an error is being displayed in step S3233, and when it is determined that an error is being detected in step S3233. The same is true. After step S3240, the process advances to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that error detection is not in progress, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. If the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as external signal 4), and if the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 and turns on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

Next, the process advances to step S3242, where it is determined whether the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24(D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)". In this case, similarly to the above, it is determined that the door switch is on in the previous interrupt processing, and "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246. If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244, where the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is If it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, whether the setting key switch is turned on from off, whether the error detection flag is turned on from off, and whether the error number is from "0" to anything other than "0" is determined. In each judgment as to whether or not the external signal 4 management time is set as "Yes", the external signal 4 management time is set for each interrupt processing, and thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the external signal 4 management time for each interrupt processing, and the external signal 4 management time is set to "0". ”, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, when the error detection flag is "1", and when an error number other than "0" is stored, the external signal 4 continues to be on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, when the external signal 4 management time reaches "0", the external Turn off signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4).

In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms has passed since the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, if an error is detected or the setting key switch is turned on for a moment (for example, just the "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is set as the external signal 4). Even if the conditions (enabling output) are met, the external signal 4 can be turned on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

In addition, in the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24(D)" is set for external signal 4 in step S3240, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". Thereafter, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) is met, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

Thereafter, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) is no longer met, processing in step S3240 is performed. Since the timer does not pass through, the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3235, so the process proceeds to step S3236 and turns off external signal 4 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 4). possible).

By doing this, the external signal 4 is turned on (turns on as the external signal 4) from when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) are met. output of the signal shown). Then, as long as the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) are met, turn on external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as external signal 4). possible). Next, when the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating that it is on as external signal 4) are no longer met, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1 (D)". The external signal 4 is turned on until the timer value reaches "0 (D)" (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" related to external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is "24(D)" is subtracted from "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, when the door switch is on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5)) , the process advances to step S3246, and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 5) is no longer met) ), the process of step S3246 is not passed through, so the timer value ultimately becomes "0(D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3243, and the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off external signal 5 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 5). possible).

By doing this, the external signal 5 is turned on from the time the door switch is turned on (the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (to be able to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is met). (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, as long as the conditions for turning on the external signal 5 (to output a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5) are met, turn on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5). possible). Next, when the conditions for turning on external signal 5 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 5) are no longer met, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1". The external signal 5 is turned on until the timer value reaches "0 (D)" (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).
In example 2 of FIG. 93 above, there is no need to generate rising data and there is no need to check the level data etc. from the previous interrupt processing, so the external signal output processing can be simplified and the hall computer can It is possible to secure the time during which the signal indicating that signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, the steps that perform the same processing as those in FIG. 93 are given the same numbers, and the steps that perform different processing are underlined.
In example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether to output external signal 4, first, in step S3251, whether or not the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)" is "0" is determined. to judge. If it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241 and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 management time is "0" and the output conditions for the external signal 4 are satisfied in the judgments of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process advances to step S3240 and the address "F014 (H )", the external signal 4 management time is set to "24 (D)", which corresponds to the output time "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that the output conditions for external signal 4 are not satisfied, the process advances to step S3236 and turns off external signal 4 (as external signal 4). (It is possible to output a signal indicating off).

Regarding the external signal 5, in the same way as above, when determining whether to output the external signal 5, first in step S3252, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not. If it is not "0", the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). On the other hand, if the external signal 5 management time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms, and the process advances to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3244 and turns off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

In this way, in example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is "0" and the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer Set the value. Even if the set timer value reaches "0", the timer value is set again when the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied.
Similarly to Example 2 in FIG. 93, the method of Example 3 in FIG. 94 also does not generate rising data and does not require checking the level data etc. from the previous interrupt processing, so external signal output processing is performed. It is possible to ensure the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on, while simplifying the process.

Although the 18th embodiment has been described above, the 18th embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the 18th embodiment.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any of the error indications is satisfied, external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may turn on each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, and 7) (make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as external signals 4, 6, and 7). It's okay. Also, a specific external signal (for example, external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch and the door switch are on. It may also be possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing, but this is not limited to this, and "N (N≧2)" The value may be subtracted by "N" for every "N" interrupts, or "1" may be subtracted for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) The various modifications and numerical values described in the 18th embodiment are merely examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 have a minimum of "0" ms, so they can be set variously, such as "5" ms, "10" ms, etc.

In addition, in FIG. 89, time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is a minimum of "50" ms, so for example, "75" ms or "100" ms. etc., various settings can be made.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer etc. reliably receives external signals 4 and 5. The time may be as long as possible, and depending on the performance of the hall computer etc., it may be less than 50 ms.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set in various ways according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch was turned on from off, or when the setting key switch was on, external signal 4 was turned on (it was possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), but the setting It may be configured such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) when the change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the 18th embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is used as the external signal 4). When configured to enable output), even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). possible).
On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered, the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on while the setting key switch is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the status of the setting key switch (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). do). However, there may be cases where the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the 18th embodiment, any one of the following: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is displayed, or when "300" ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on. When these two conditions were met, the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating that it was on could be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions; the external signal 4 is turned on only under one or some conditions, for example, when the setting key switch is on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4). ) may be configured. In other words, the configuration does not turn on the external signal 4 (does not enable output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) even under other conditions, such as when "300 ms" has not elapsed since the power was turned on. You can also use it as
(6) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 18th embodiment, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change completion sound.
The settings change end sound will be explained in the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). do.
In addition, in the following explanation, "setting change state (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change processing in progress")" is a state in which setting values can be changed and the game is started (proceeding). ) is in a gaming state where it cannot be played. Note that in the setting change state, it is also possible to end the process without changing the setting value.
Further, "setting confirmation state (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation processing in progress")" is a state in which setting values cannot be changed but current setting values can be confirmed. In the settings confirmation state, the game cannot be started (proceeded) similarly to the settings change state.
On the other hand, "normal state (also referred to as "normal mode")" refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (proceeded) except in special circumstances such as an error occurring.

<19th embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the 19th embodiment (A), and corresponds to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, as components not shown in Fig. 1, there are provided a door switch 17, a setting key insertion port 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153. Although the above components are not shown in Fig. 1, this does not mean that the above components are not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or confirming settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 is opened and detects that the front door 12 is opened. When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
Further, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. This is the switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value in a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed.
In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153,""setting change switch 153," and "reset switch 153."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 with the power turned on and rotated, for example, 90 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 152. When the door switch 17 is turned on while the power is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

In addition, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, rotate the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, turn on the setting key switch 152, and turn on the power switch 11. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

When the slot machine 10 is powered on as described above, a checksum is executed (step S204) as shown in FIG. Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (Step S210), it becomes possible to move to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switch" in step S208 is two switches: the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that is turned on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is used. If provided, there are three switches including a set door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided, and the designated switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

Then, in step S208 in FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, a determination of "Yes" is made in step S208, and a transition to the setting change state is enabled. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on, or when both switches are off, the determination in step S208 is "No", and the setting is changed. will not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or the setting key is not inserted, the setting change state will not be entered in a situation where there is a high possibility of tampering.

In addition, in FIG. 38, "starting the setting change state" is defined firstly when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the "setting change state" includes the processes in steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as well.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the time of starting the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change) An example of this is to set "the start of the setting change state" as "when the setting change state is started".

However, this is not limiting, and in FIG. 39, the period immediately before step S221 may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Also, the period immediately after step S231 (when initialization ends) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Furthermore, the period when an interrupt is started in step S233, or the period immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state."

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "the end of the setting change state" may be determined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the end of setting change is set in step S246 and control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to end the setting change). An example of this is to define "the end of the settings change state" when the
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined) may be defined as "the end of the setting change state".

Further, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on the condition that the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end while the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Further, if the front door 12 is closed at the time when the setting key switch 152 is turned off (when the door switch 17 is off), the setting change state may not be ended. This is to prevent cheating.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 in FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs a setting change end sound and visually indicates the end of the setting change (output by the production lamp 21).
Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a sound from the speaker 22 saying "setting change is finished."

There are various ideas regarding the speed at which words (Japanese) can be spoken, but if you follow the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, then the message ``Finish changing settings.'' For example, "T01", which is the time from the start of audio output to the end of audio output, may be set to about "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command indicating that the setting change has been completed, it immediately outputs a setting change completion sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if it is determined "Yes" in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243, the setting change is completed in step S464. command is sent.

Then, in the sub-control board 80, interrupt processing is executed independently on the sub-control board 80 side, and for each interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received. ing. When it is determined that a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is received, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to the interrupt by the main control board 50. The time for one interrupt is "2.235" ms.) from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. Afterwards, the sub-control board 80 starts outputting the setting change end sound or outputting the setting change end sound. In other words, after the determination is "Yes" in step S243 in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command, and starts outputting the setting change completion sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are made to coincide.

In addition, as a performance to indicate that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the setting change completion sound described above, an effect is executed in which the performance lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode ("lighting" is a concept that includes flashing, and "lighting mode" is a concept that includes the lighting color).
Here, when lighting the performance lamp 21, at least the lighting mode is not the same as the lighting mode when lighting the performance lamp 21 when a special role (gimmick) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A of the performance lamp 21 is lit in the lighting mode a as a performance indicating that a special role has been won, a lamp other than the lamp A can be lit when lighting the performance lamp 21 as a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed. In this case, if a lamp other than the lamp A is lit, it may be the same as the lighting mode when indicating that a special role has been won.

In addition, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that a special combination has been won.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting state of the effect lamp 21 is not the same as that of the effect notifying that a special role has been won (that a special role has been won in the game, or that the winning of a special role has been carried over). This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing that a special role has been won when a game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special winning combination has been won, so that the two do not get confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other productions, and when the lighting pattern is seen, it is a production that means the completion of the setting change. It is preferable to make it easy to understand.
Furthermore, for the production lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed is made the same as the lighting pattern indicating that the special role has been won, and for other lamps other than the production lamp 21, the setting change is made. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended and the lighting pattern indicating that the special winning combination has been won may be different.
Specifically, for example, to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the production lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit up, and to notify that a special prize has been won, the production lamp 21 is turned on. For example, the lamp may be turned on, but the other lamps may not be turned on. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general), the administrator can grasp which state the game machine is in.

Furthermore, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect to indicate that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, it is possible to output the setting change end sound at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time T01 is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be considered in which the setting change state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (a state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started.
In the following, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state ends until the game starts (until the game start conditions are met) (preparation time until the game starts) is referred to as "T11". do. Further, the time (one game time) from the start of the game to the end of the game (after the game start conditions are met) is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared, so even if there is bet data and credit data, for example, before the start of the setting change, these are also cleared. . Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert the medals M from the medal slot 47 and bet the specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the generally used regulation number, but in the 19th embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the regulation number. , it is assumed that the game can be started with the number of bets "1". Note that when the prescribed number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the prescribed number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at position M1 and is released into the medal selector, it passes through the passage in the medal selector and reaches the input sensors 44a and 44b, as described in the first embodiment. Detected. When the input sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a bet of "1" is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time from when medals M are inserted from position M1 until they are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and when the prescribed number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not take into account the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the specified number is "1", it is necessary to insert one medal, when the specified number is "2", it is necessary to insert two medals, and when the specified number is "3", it is necessary to insert one medal. Requires the insertion of 3 medals. In Figure 2, the time from the state of medal M1 until one medal is inserted and a "1" bet is made is "T11a", and the time from the state of medal M1 until a "2" bet is made after two medals are inserted. Let's say "T11b" and the time from when 3 medals are inserted until a "3" bet is made is "T11c".
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since it is possible to insert two or three medals in succession, T11b (when the specified number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is "3") is considered to be shorter than three times the time T11a (when the specified number is "1").

When a prescribed number of bets is placed, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41, so in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number of bets is placed until the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 revolutions per minute. When a speed of 80 revolutions per minute is reached, a constant speed state is maintained at that speed. Operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, and after the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reels 31 start rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42. In other words, the time from the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 until the first stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. Before the process ends, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 (this example will be described later). Let the total time of these be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, the next (second) stop switch 42 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the next stop switch 42 can be operated. In other words, the time from when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first ends until the second stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state has elapsed, similarly to the above. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second until the third stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state is required, similarly to the above.

Note that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when the time in the four-phase excitation state for the last reel 31 ends, It is determined that one game has been completed (if there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any combination in the game stops, the game is determined to have ended when the payout process ends, specifically, when the process in FIG. 49 ends.
Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined not as the end of automatic bet processing but as the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.

For example, firstly, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the process of adding to the credits is executed, the end of the process of adding to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination has stopped and the actual medal payout process has been executed, the last medal payout (driving the hopper 36) is finished, and "Yes" in step S401 in FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is ``0'') is determined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change ends, the number of credits is "0", and even if you start playing immediately after the setting change state ends and you win a small role with a maximum payout number of "15", All medals paid out will be credited. Therefore, medals are never actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change ends.
The time period from when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is finished to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is finished is "T12c". shall be.
However, when the winning combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

Further, when a performance (such as a performance announcing a winning combination) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the performance time is not included in one game time. For example, even if a performance is output for several seconds after all the reels 31 stop, at the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 when the last reel 31 stops (at that point, all reels 31 stop). (Even if the performance that started output at the time is continued), one game is assumed to end. That is, the end of one game is based on the control by the main control board 50.

As described above, when the player performs the operation to start the game immediately after the end of the setting change state and starts the game, the preparation time "T11" is required until the game starts.
Furthermore, one gaming time "T12" is, as mentioned above,
(1) Time “T12a” from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated
(2) Time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) Time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) “T12c” is the time required to complete the payout of medals (addition to credits) when winning a small prize.
It takes.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
Note that it is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is held (step S282 in FIG. 41), and if, for example, a special role (a role object) is won in this lottery, a freeze (also called a "freeze effect") may be selected to be executed.
In this case, "freeze" refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is performed, a special role is won, and it is decided to execute a freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special role, the reels 31 do not start spinning. Then, after the freeze ends, the reels 31 start spinning. When the progress of the game is stopped by the freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
In this case, if the freeze time is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a + T12b x 3 + T12c + T12d".

Next, the shortest time for one game time "T12" will be considered. In order for one game time to become the shortest time, freezing will not be executed and no winning combination will be won.
Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, the specified number is set to "1", and the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position M1 in FIG. 2 until the bet is placed (the time required to start the game) It is assumed that "T11" is approximately "800" ms at the shortest.
Further, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted is about "1200" ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is controlled to stop and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is as follows. As shown in FIG. 13, the shortest time is approximately 140 ms (the reel stop control time is approximately 40 ms at the shortest, and the 4-phase excitation state time is approximately 100 ms at the shortest). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms It will be about.
When medals are paid out after all reels 31 have stopped, or when a freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" is longer than the above-mentioned time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is finished, the setting change end sound is output for a time of "T01" (approximately 2000 ms), and the effect lamp 21 is activated to notify the end of the setting change. The lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when a game is started immediately after the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound "T01" that is output immediately after the setting change state ends, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game. The relationship with the time “T12 (minimum time)” is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if you perform an operation (preparation) to start a game from the moment you finish the setting change state and start a game at the moment when you are ready to start the game, the game will end. This means that the output of the setting change completion sound has already finished.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, in the above example, after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state ends, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this manner, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the next interrupt process.
In this case, of the above-mentioned "T12b" time, the time of the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (minimum time) = 40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even when controlled in this way, "T01<T11+T12" is satisfied.

In addition, the performance timing of the slot machine 10 is when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped). When the second reel 31 is stopped) and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 are stopped), an effect that finally announces the winning combination of the game (the most important effect in the game) is output. The timing for this is often when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, when all the reels 31 are stopped, when outputting an effect announcing the winning combination of the game, the effect will be output after the setting change end sound is output, so when all the reels 31 are stopped, The effect and the setting change end sound do not overlap. Therefore, even if the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped can be accurately understood.

However, if there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment includes a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change completion sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the winning combination notification effect. As a result, even if the winning combination notification effect is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound has started, the setting change end sound will not be deleted midway. However, it is possible that the setting change completion sound and the winning role announcement sound may overlap.

In addition, the lighting time T02 of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02 = T11 + T12
T02>T11+T12
However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating the completion of the setting change is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem will occur.

In addition, the preparation time "T11" before starting the game is the time to close the front door 12 after finishing the setting change state and eliminate the door open error (an error indicating that the front door 12 is open). It does not take into account the time required to do so.
When the setting change state is finished, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. It is not possible to proceed (start) the game when a door open error occurs. When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (a state in which medals are returned), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, no bet is made. Even if a bet is placed, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. Although it is possible to configure the door open error to be resolved the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally the key is inserted into a key insertion slot provided in the front door 12 for opening the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to open the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the end of the setting change state includes the operation time for closing the front door 12, inserting the key, and canceling the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started even if the door open error has occurred.

Note that when ending the setting change state on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, it is possible to end the setting change state even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started with the front door 12 open, and the lighting of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is also started.

On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the setting change state does not end unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, simply turning off the setting key switch 152 does not end the setting change state, but closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the conditions for ending the setting change state. Note that the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change completion sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled. In this case, when the door open error is cleared, output of the setting change completion sound is started.

Even if the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game is "T11 + T12". Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T01", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game ends immediately after the setting change ends.
Furthermore, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, even if the front door 12 is open, if the setting change state is to be ended, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even if you close the front door 12 afterwards, cancel the door open error, and end one game after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound will end before the end of the game. .
Furthermore, if the (operation) time from the end of the settings change state to the time when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled is "T10", the time from the end of the settings change state until the start of one game is The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is a case where the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the winning combination result is non-winning.
(2) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when a special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery result. In addition, when a special winning combination is won in the winning lottery result, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, so the average time thereof is "T12". For example, when winning a special prize, if a freeze is executed with a probability of ``p''%, and a freeze is not executed with a probability of ``100-p''%, the average value of 1 gaming time ``T12'' is:
"Average one game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average one game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
becomes.

<Nineteenth embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change completion sound, and one game time in the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
First, an overview of the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Further, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In addition, in FIG. 98, illustration of the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown so as to be visible from the back side. Furthermore, in FIG. 98, illustrations of board cases other than the main board case 550 are appropriately omitted.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

In a hall, a pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. First, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame formed to surround the outer periphery of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97 so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 is openable and closable relative to the outer frame 501, making it possible to access the back side of the front frame 502.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various prize openings (including a starting opening 532 to be described later), and the like. Further, the portion of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 is provided with a presentation lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion slot 521 is formed on the right side edge of the front frame 502 in FIG. 97 .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), by inserting the key from the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation between the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (towards the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, production lamp 541, speaker 542, upper plate 506, lower plate 507, and firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side The entire body including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached to the front surface of the game board 504 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the game area. For example, this is to solve the problem when game balls become clogged in the game area. By inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation on the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522, which will be described later, is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, it is configured to notify a door opening error.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530, which corresponds to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a sub-control board, which corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, etc., similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on turning on the power switch 511, the power supply board 510 controls the supply of power.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal wires")). . It is assumed that the boards shown in FIG. 99 are all connected by harnesses. Although the relay board is not shown in FIG. 99, in reality, each board shown in FIG. 99 may be connected directly or via a relay board. There is.
A firing board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The firing device 513 is a device that launches a game ball onto the game board 504 (game area). When the firing handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the firing device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. A payout device 524 is connected to this payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and also pays out prize balls corresponding to the winnings when the game balls win. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a door open error, for example.
Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a frame opening error, for example.

A starting port switch 533 is connected to the main control board 530 for detecting a win to a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports provided in the gaming area of the game board 504. When a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, a random value is obtained as described later and a judgment of success or failure is executed (lottery process). Then, based on the result of the validity judgment, the variation time and stop symbols of the special symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and the stop symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled to correspond to the determined results.

In addition, on the game board 504, there are general winning holes and big winning holes (winning holes that become jackpots and are opened during special games) as winning holes other than the starting hole 532. The explanation will be omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the result of the judgment based on the turning on of the starting port switch 533 using a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that displays whether the result of the determination is a win or a non-win, depending on the stopped symbol after variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7 segment display.
In addition, the flow from the start of variation of the special symbol to the stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion port 534, and a setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that the setting key insertion port 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion port 534 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed. In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 536,""setting change switch 536," and "reset switch 536."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, turn the setting key to turn on the setting key switch 535, and turn on the reset switch 536. By turning on the power switch 511, it is possible to shift to a setting change state.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The setting value display LED 537 is equivalent to the setting value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in Fig. 1, and is configured, for example, by a 7-segment display.
When changing the set value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the set value increments by "+1." For example, when there are six set values, each time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, the set value changes cyclically from "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → .... Then, when the setting key is rotated, for example, counterclockwise and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state ends, the set value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.

In addition, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotate the setting key, turn on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off, and it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.
Note that, unlike the slot machine 10, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 500 does not shift to the setting confirmation state, and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, is called a performance display monitor. The management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segment displays, similar to the management information display LED 74.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, and is a board for determining the presentation content based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and for controlling the output of the determined presentation. Although FIG. 99 shows one sub-control board 540, in reality, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub board (for example, an image display board). (a board for controlling the image display of the device 23);

Similar to the slot machine 10, the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, and their outputs are controlled by a sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a portion of the presentation lamp 541 is attached to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502. Further, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is installed so that an image is displayed approximately in the center of the game area of the game board 504.

Next, control processing of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 will be explained.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the process of starting up the pachinko gaming machine 500 after it is powered on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, corresponds to the main CPU) 530 determines whether the conditions for transition to the setting change state are satisfied. to judge. In this embodiment, the conditions for transition to the setting change state are set such that the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all of these conditions are satisfied, the process advances to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process advances to step S703. In step S702, the process moves to setting change processing (setting change state). When the setting change process is completed, the process advances to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are satisfied. In this embodiment, the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are set such that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. When it is determined that these conditions are met, the process advances to step S704, and when it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process advances to step S706.

Proceeding to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. Next, the process advances to step S705, and it is determined whether the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for ending the setting confirmation state are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704 and the setting confirmation state (display of setting values) is continued.

When the determination in step S703 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. When it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process advances to step S709, and when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process advances to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the information at the time of power-off is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and the next time the power is turned on, it is determined whether the information at the time of power-on matches the information at the time of power-off. do. When they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and when they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process advances to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process advances to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state when the power was turned off. Then, the process advances to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is finished, when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on in step S706, or when it is determined that RWM is not normal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Then, the RWM clearing process is executed. This process is a process for clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process for initializing the predetermined storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include setting value data. Then, the process advances to step S710.

In step S710, a timer interrupt is permitted. This is a process for enabling interrupt processing. Therefore, after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, when the interrupt processing timing arrives, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, a random number update process (random number counter increment process) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of symbols to be stopped, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the start time of the setting change process (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within a normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value is "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5", and when it is determined that it is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in the RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The setting value "1" becomes a basic setting value as described later. Then, the process advances to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the setting value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the setting value display LED 537. For example, when the RWM value is "0", the setting value display LED 537 displays "1".
Next, the process proceeds to step S725, where the main control board 530 judges whether the setting change switch 536 has been operated. If it is judged that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and if it is judged that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, the set value is incremented by "1". For example, if the set value display LED 537 has displayed "1" up until that point, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is updated from "0" to "1". In the example of FIG. 101, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724, and if it is judged in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process skips the process of step S726 and proceeds to step S727.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit value has been exceeded. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated in step S725 when the set value "1" to "5" is displayed in step S724, it is determined that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded in step S727. is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM setting value data, and "1" is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, the process advances to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for terminating the setting change process (setting change state) are satisfied. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for terminating the setting change processing are satisfied. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and when determining that the setting key switch 535 is on, returns to step S724, and determines that the setting key switch 535 is off. If so, the process advances to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, the process advances to step S731, and the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes a process of lighting the production lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has ended.

The timing at which the setting change state of the pachinko gaming machine 500 ends is as follows:
(1) When the answer is "Yes" in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off).
(2) In step S730, the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is made non-display.
(3) When a setting change end command is sent in step S731.
The timing for ending the setting change state in the 19th embodiment (B) is set to “when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 has been turned off” as described above in (1).
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above (2) or (3) may be set as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When a game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, one game will start even if the game ball has not arrived within the game area.
(2) When the game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504 and the game ball enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the gaming area to the left side to the upper left for guiding the gaming ball fired by the firing device 513 into the gaming area. ing. The moment the game ball comes off the rail (the moment the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the gaming area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, there are various possible starting points for starting one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but in this embodiment, in the case of (3) above, "the game ball is placed in the starting hole 532". The start timing of one game is set as "when the game enters".
Further, the timing at which one game ends is when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 is completed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the process advances to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, a jackpot lottery (judgment as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss), a special symbol lottery (stop symbols of special symbols) (a lottery to determine which symbol to use) and a variable pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the varying time of the special symbol).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) is executed based on the winning of the ball into the starting hole 532. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Among the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least a part of the lottery results including the variable time are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. Upon receiving the lottery result of the current game, the sub-control board 540 controls the performance lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 in accordance with the lottery result.

Next, the process proceeds to step S744, and the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. In addition, the special symbol display device 531 can change the special symbol on the condition that the previous special symbol has finished changing at that point, and if the special symbol is in the process of changing, the next special symbol will change. The fluctuation is suspended, and after the fluctuation of the currently fluctuating special symbol ends, the fluctuation of the next special symbol is started.

Further, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 causes the image display device 543 to change the decorative pattern. The variation of the decorative symbols corresponds to a part of the performance in this game.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stopped symbols after the change by the special symbol display device 531 include special symbols corresponding to the jackpot (for example, “7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the miss.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern is changed by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change in the special pattern. When stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a jackpot, the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol such as "777" corresponding to a jackpot. On the other hand, when stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol corresponding to a loss (a symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to a jackpot). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, when playing games) It is formed to a size that occupies more than half of the area. Thereby, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a jackpot by looking at the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative pattern in step S745 is controlled to be within the variation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol is completed, the process advances to step S746, and the main control board 530 varies the special symbol for the variation time determined by the lottery, and then changes the special symbol so that it becomes the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process advances to step S747, and special symbol post-stop processing is executed. The post-stop processing includes, for example, processing for moving to a special game when the current game is a jackpot.

In the nineteenth embodiment (B) of the pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound is emitted and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change is turned on. Execute. Furthermore, when it is assumed that a game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is configured to end before the game ends.
As mentioned above, if it is assumed that the setting change state is ended when the determination is "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound from the speaker 542.

The time from when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 until the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting of the production lamp 541) starts is longer than "0" ms, for example, in step S729. The timing is approximately when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed since the "Yes" decision. In other words, after the determination in step S729 is "Yes", the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.
As in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting change end sound is a sound that says "The setting change is finished." Further, if the time from the start of output to the end of output of the voice saying "Settings change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). ), it can be set to about "2000" ms.

In addition to the above-mentioned setting change completion sound, the control section 540 executes a performance that lights up the performance lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting manner as a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed.
Here, when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit, at least the lighting mode should not be the same as that when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit at the time of a jackpot. For example, if it is determined that lamp A of the production lamps 541 is to be lit in lighting mode a to indicate that the jackpot has been won, the production lamp 541 will be lit as a production to indicate that the setting change has been completed. In this case, a lamp other than lamp A may be turned on. In this case, as long as a lamp different from lamp A is lit, it may be lit in the same manner as the one used to indicate a jackpot.

Further, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating a jackpot.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is made not to be the same as the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 when a jackpot is achieved. As a result, when a player starts playing immediately after finishing a setting change, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on to indicate that the setting change has ended, the player will not misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is different from the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 when a jackpot is achieved, so that the two do not get confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 that indicates that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other productions (or is used very infrequently), and if you see the lighting pattern, you can change the setting. It is preferable to make it easy to understand that this is a performance that signifies the end of.
Furthermore, for the production lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when a jackpot is achieved, but for other lamps other than the production lamp 541, the setting change is not allowed. The lighting pattern indicating the end of the game may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is reached.
Specifically, for example, to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all lit up, and when a jackpot is achieved, the effect lamp 541 is turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. One example is to prevent the light from turning on. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general), the administrator can grasp which state the game machine is in.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, the effect may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Further, if the lighting time of the production lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the 19th embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be described in which the game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is finished.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the configuration is such that the firing device 513 cannot be operated to launch the game ball into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, at least unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and even in the setting change state, it is possible to operate the firing device 513 and launch the game ball into the game area. In this case, even if a game ball enters any of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so that the prize ball is not paid out. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 532, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special symbol display device 531 and the image display device 543 do not vary the decorative symbols. It will be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above, but first, a case will be described assuming that it is possible to play even when the front frame 502 is open.
The timing for starting the game is when the game ball enters the starting hole 532, as described above.
First, if the preparation time before starting the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launcher 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the time until the game ball hits the starting hole 532. The total time becomes time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball fired from the firing device 513 enters the starting hole 532.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532, it is determined as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. , stops the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the process in step S746 is one gaming time, and this one gaming time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 in a state where there are no reserved balls, one game time "T22" is determined from a range of approximately "10,000" to "30,000" ms, for example. shall be. Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

Note that a shortening function is known that increases time efficiency by shortening the variation time of special symbols when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), but in this embodiment, the setting Since this is the state after the end of the change state, there are no reserved balls. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the special symbol variation time shortening function is not taken into consideration.

From the above, the time required to start the game immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (Time when setting change end sound is output) < T21 + T22 (Preparation time to start the game + 1 minimum time for the game)
becomes.

Furthermore, when lighting the production lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has been completed immediately after the setting change state ends (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound starts), the lighting time T02 of the production lamp 541 and "T21+T22 ” The relationship between
T02 (approx. “2500” to “4000” ms) <T21+T22
becomes.
As a result, even if you start playing immediately after ending the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound will end before you end one game, and the production lamp will indicate the end of the setting change. This means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned one game does not take into account the time required to close the front frame 502 after the end of the setting change state, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
Similar to the slot machine 10, when the setting change state is finished, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects a frame opening error and issues an error notification. When a slot opening error is being reported, the game cannot be started. Note that when a frame opening error occurs, the first thing to do is not to operate the firing device 513. Second, although the firing device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if a game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (the lottery process (not executing, not starting fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, not paying out prize balls).

In order to cancel the frame opening error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening switch 523 is turned off. Furthermore, by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame opening error is resolved (the error notification is ended). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502, inserting a key, and canceling the frame opening error. Assuming that the time required to resolve the frame opening error by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame opening switch 523 after the setting change state ends is "T20",
T01 (output time of setting change end sound) <T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of production lamp 541) <T20+T21+T22
becomes.

In the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. However, this is not limiting. It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the front frame 502 is closed (the frame open switch 523 is turned off) and an operation to clear the frame open error is performed (such as inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and rotating it in a specified direction). In this case, the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the operation to clear the frame open error is completed, and the output of a setting change completion sound begins. In addition, the setting change state may be ended by closing the front frame 502 on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned off (without performing an operation to clear the frame open error). In this case, the setting change state ends when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, and the setting change completion sound is output.

Therefore, even if the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change until the end of one game is " Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game is finished immediately after the setting change ends.

The above is a case where one gaming time "T22" is completed in the shortest time.
On the other hand, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change until the end of one game can be set in various ways as shown below. .
(1) Set the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the total time of the average one game time “T22” when you lose the jackpot lottery (non-winning) and the preparation time “T21” Set.
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it loses is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and the average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
One example is to set it to .

(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the preparation time "T21".
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a jackpot occurs is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and the average time is "T22 (avg2)",
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
One example is to set it to .

<Twentieth embodiment>
The 20th embodiment relates to a board case of a control board.
As a board case for accommodating a control board, double door type and sliding type are known, and the 20th embodiment is a sliding type board case.
In the sliding method, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than in the double door method, so the number of points that can be accessed by unauthorized persons can be reduced accordingly.
Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are configured to slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 that is exposed during sliding movement is a solder surface.
Note that in the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as the "component surface," and the surface to which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as the "solder surface."

In the 20th embodiment, a board case 550 for accommodating a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to this, and the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but can also be used for the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but also the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards equipped with the CPU, and have security features. It can be applied to cases that accommodate control boards that require
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
Note that the board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, although the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment simultaneously.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and main control board 530, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control board 530, viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Furthermore, FIG. 106 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 107 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550, viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the "front side" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the "upper" in "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as "front case (or cover)" or "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in "lower case 570" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530, and refers to the "rear (back) side case (or cover)" and the "solder side case (or cover)". It may also be called.
Furthermore, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the above-described setting change (reset) switch 536 and a setting key insertion slot 534. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection to other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. The various parts shown in the 20th embodiment such as FIG. 103 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
Furthermore, holes 530a are formed at the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to the upper case 560.

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion slot 534 have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i are formed through which the openings 563a to 563i can be passed.
Furthermore, a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so as to be openable and closable at a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion slot 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in this embodiment, opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor, but it is also possible to detect opening and closing of the cover 561 by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to a setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open), or it is set on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open). The changed state may be terminated.

Caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided at one end of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, at the left edge when viewed from the front in FIG. 103, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when they are fitted together. After sealing (caulking), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulking portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 opposite to the one end side (the side where the caulking parts 562 and 572 are provided, respectively). It is being These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together.

In Fig. 104, four bosses 564 are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. Two bosses 564 are visible in Fig. 104. The spacing between the four bosses 564 is the same as the spacing between the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Furthermore, the bosses 564 are formed with screw holes.
In the state shown in FIG. 104 , when the main control board 530 is placed against the back side of the upper case 560 , the four holes 530 a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 are aligned.

Furthermore, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560, and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
Similarly, connectors 539b and 539c of main control board 530 pass through opening 563b of upper case 560, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 550.
Furthermore, connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of main control board 530 pass through openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 560.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, so that their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on the main control board 530 pass through the opening formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g are set to be an appropriate gap, so that each connector 539a to 539h is connected to each opening 563a to 563g. 563g without resistance, and after passing through, so that there is no more gap than necessary between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g (for example, the gap between the connector and the opening) The design value is approximately 0.5 mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to perform a tampering operation.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 of the main control board 530 penetrate openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and are contacted (accessed) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over these setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the front side I have not been exposed to. However, the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It becomes.
In the above state, if screws are inserted into the holes 530a (4 locations) from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screwed to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. be done.

As a result, even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 .
In this manner, since the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, there is no relative movement between the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together. Therefore, by forming the openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 on the upper case 560 side and configuring the connectors 539a to 539h to pass through the openings 563a to 563g, it is possible to achieve a structure in which no more than necessary gaps are generated between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, even if the relative positions of upper case 560 and lower case 570 are displaced by a thief action after upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together, upper case 560 and main control board 530 do not shift relative to each other, so it is not possible to increase the gap between each of connectors 539a to 539h and each of openings 563a to 563g. This makes it possible to suppress thieves.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side sectional view showing the fitted state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, (a) shows the temporarily fitted state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows the fully fitted state ( (after moving the slide).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched for ease of viewing the drawing. Further, in the figure, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower edge of the upper case 560 in the longitudinal direction (lower case 570 side) is referred to as a lower edge 560a. Moreover, the edge in the longitudinal direction of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so that they overlap in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed so as to be in contact with each other. This position is referred to as a "temporary fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, upper case 560 and lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108(a), the upper case 560 can be moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 without any interference with parts or the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the side wall 565 and the vicinity of the side wall 571 viewed from the lower case 570 side in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, so one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 is visible from this gap L. There is. Here, in the connectors of the main control board 530, if the legs of the connector 539g are called connector legs 539g' and the legs of the connector 539h are called connector legs 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' are arranged in the longitudinal direction. There are two rows of legs (see Figure 104).
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, only one outer row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' is exposed. In other words, even in the temporarily fitted state, all of the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not exposed, but only a portion thereof is exposed.

The lower case 570 is configured to be slidable relative to the upper case 560 from the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a). Note that the direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the left direction in FIG. 108(a).
When lower case 570 is slid relative to upper case 560, upper case 560, main control board 530, and lower case 570 can be moved without interference until the end of the slide movement. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), it can be slid to a position where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 come into contact. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the final fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact (full fitted state).

In the fully fitted state, engagement members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 engage with each other. This makes it impossible to move the upper case 560 in a direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570. However, in this state, it is possible to slide the lower case 570 with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above, and by sliding in the opposite direction, the fully mated state can be returned to the tentatively mated state at any time. be able to.

In the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a), the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 are misaligned in the vertical direction; In the fitted state, the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap, allowing caulking using both. If the caulking part 562 and the caulking part 572 are caulked at this position, unless the caulking part 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 will not be separated or the upper case 560 will be separated. On the other hand, it is no longer possible to slide the lower case 570 and return it to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 may be slid with respect to the upper case 560 to return to the temporarily fitted state by some method, thereby exposing the solder surface of the main control board 530.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed, but only a part of the connector legs are exposed, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the connector legs.
Furthermore, even in the temporarily fitted state, not all connector legs are exposed; in the example of the 20th embodiment, the exposed connector legs are connector legs 539g' and 539h'; The legs of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539g are not exposed.

When a sliding method is adopted for the board case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connector is arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530. For example, if a connector is provided in the center of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector has to be approximately square-shaped with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is arranged inside a substantially square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530, as shown in FIG. 103.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, a connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
Each of the connector openings 563 of the upper case 560 has a structure in which there is no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the upper (outside) side in the figure.

Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563c, 563d and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e and 539f pass, respectively, is substantially L-shaped with no side walls on the upper and right sides (outside) in FIG.
Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h pass, respectively, has a side wall only on the left side (inner side) in the figure, as shown in Fig. 105. This shape makes it easy to insert and remove the connectors.

Further, when the connectors are arranged as described above with respect to the main control board 530, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the first exposed legs of the connectors are the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h. feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of sliding movement is made larger than in this embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in this embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f are not exposed even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to connectors 539b and 539c), the amount of sliding movement can be increased more than in this embodiment. Even if provided, it is possible to configure the connector 539f so that its legs are not exposed.

Further, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed; Rather than exposing all of the feet, only a portion of the feet are exposed, making it as difficult as possible for the foot to tumble.

It is preferable that the number of connectors in which at least some of the legs are exposed due to sliding movement be as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N" (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2), the number of exposed legs should be "N-1" or less (that is, not all of them are exposed). It is preferable. Furthermore, when the number of rows of legs of the connector is "1", it is preferable that the legs of the connector are configured not to be exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", the "n"th ("n" ≤ "N-1") of the "N" pins is ''), but the pins after the "n+1"th pin are not exposed (that is, all the pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one pin serving as a reference may be configured so as not to be exposed. By preventing at least one pin from being exposed, it can be made more difficult to tamper with than when all pins are exposed.

Further, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards, electronic components, and the like. Connections are made using lead wires. Further, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530.
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire that should particularly ensure security is the lead wire into which the signal of the starting port switch 533 (signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that its connector legs are not exposed even when it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). is preferred.

Furthermore, with respect to the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout from occurring, the legs of the connector are not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.
Furthermore, a lead wire that supplies power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 if the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a lead wire that supplies power to the sub control board 540, For each connector to which the connected lead wires and the lead wires connected to the board for outputting external signals are connected, make sure that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, etc.
Of the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire that should particularly ensure security is the lead wire into which the signal of the start switch 41 (signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, even if the connector is slid, the legs of the connector are not exposed (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire through which the signal from the input sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input is connected, even if it is slid, the legs of the connector will not be exposed (at least one row of legs will not be exposed, or at least one pin will be It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.

Furthermore, each connector is connected to a lead wire connected to the medal dispensing device, specifically a lead wire for outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36, and a lead wire for inputting a signal from the dispensing sensor 37. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing discharging gore, it is preferable to configure the connector so that its connector legs are not exposed even if it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, there is a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals. It is preferable that each connector to which each line is connected is configured so that at least one leg row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also referred to as a "signal wire").
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wire related to starting is made the thinnest, and within one connector terminal having the lead wire related to starting, at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire related to starting is provided, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire related to starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting, and it is possible to suppress misbehavior (starting illegally or starting at an intentional timing). It is something to do.
Note that since the lead wires have manufacturing errors to some extent, they do not have exactly the same thickness. Therefore, "the same thickness" includes the range of "±ε" when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε". In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
In the slot machine 10 , the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 .
In addition, the "start-related lead wire" actually consists of two wires, one of which is a start signal wire and the other is a GND wire. In this embodiment, the start signal wire is referred to as the "start-related lead wire" and does not include the GND wire. However, the lead wires other than the start-related lead wire may include the GND wire.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
Note that in FIG. 110, illustration of the board case 550 is omitted. Further, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530, and can be applied to the main control board 50 as well. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the tips of harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal."

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when gaming machine enforcement authorities use the verification device to check data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Further, connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
Further, FIG. 111 is a front view showing in detail each harness B to H and the harness B to H connector terminal.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, harness B consists of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (top row in the diagram) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (bottom row in the diagram). It is a harness that

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H consists of two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F consists of one row.
Note that the harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured, for example, in three or more rows. Further, the number of lead wires in one row is determined depending on the purpose (number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. 111, and may be one or more than 10. .
Note that even if it is composed of one lead wire, it will be referred to as a "harness."
Furthermore, in addition to harnesses with each lead wire separated (regardless of whether they are bundled or not), such as discrete wire cables, there are also harnesses that have separate lead wires, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. Also includes those in which all the lead wires are integrally connected (regardless of whether they are separable or not).

Further, in FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are illustrated. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, for example, if the thickness of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is the diameter D1, and the thickness of the lead wire indicated by a double circle is the diameter D2, "D1<D2".
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and the harness may be constructed from lead wires of three or more different thicknesses.
Further, in the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 111), all the lead wires are configured to have a circular cross section, but "circular" is not limited to a perfect circle, but also includes a substantially circular shape. Furthermore, the cross section is not limited to a circular shape, and the cross section may be non-circular (for example, the cross section is substantially square). In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wire refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in the cross-sectional shape.

In FIG. 111, lead wires related to starting (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, lead wires connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the lead wires connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 530) ) is the seventh lead wire of harness D. As the lead wire for starting, the thinner one of the two thicknesses is used. This is to make the lead wires related to starting as inconspicuous as possible by using thin lead wires. Furthermore, by using thin lead wires, the wires are more likely to break in the event of fraudulent activity (modification, etc.), making it easier to detect abnormalities. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraudulent activity compared to thin lead wires, and if a bundle of thick lead wires is bundled, even if a part breaks, it will be difficult to detect. This is because it is difficult.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire related to starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when lead wires of three different thicknesses are used, a lead wire of an intermediate thickness may be used as the lead wire for starting.
Note that there are cases where only two lead wires related to starting and its GND wire are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Further, in the harness D including the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting, at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting is provided. Even if it is known that a lead wire related to starting is included in the connector D, this is to make it difficult to identify which lead wire it is (to make it difficult to make mistakes). In this example, lead wires No. 2, No. 4, and No. 8 are made to have the same thickness as lead wire No. 7 (a lead wire related to starting).

Furthermore, a No. 8 lead wire of the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the No. 7 lead wire of the harness D. This is to make it difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire related to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the No. 8 lead wire located on the right side of the No. 7 lead wire in the harness D is made to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire, but this is not limited to this. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be set to be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the No. 7 lead wire correspond to the No. 3, No. 6, and No. 8 lead wires in the example of FIG. 111. At least one of these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, lead wires No. 1, No. 3, No. 5, and No. 6 have different thicknesses from the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting. By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the lead wire related to starting in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make it more difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting.

In addition to lead wires related to starting, important signal wires, specifically lead wires related to inputting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc., are also used to prevent misbehavior. From the viewpoint of It is preferable.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires related to starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, if lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wires No. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. This can be mentioned.

Further, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between both connector terminals is short, When setting the lead wire as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the No. 1 lead wire of the harness H as the lead wire for power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are lined up in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G There is no problem even if the wire is set as a lead wire for starting, and the No. 1 lead wire of harness H is set as a lead wire for power supply.

Furthermore, when a connector terminal of a harness including a lead wire related to starting is adjacent to a connector terminal of another harness, the harness including the lead wire related to starting is placed below the other harness, and It is preferable to wire the lead wires so that they are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. In FIG. 112, in order to simplify the drawing, harness D and harness E both consist of one row of lead wires, harness D consists of three lead wires, and harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. It is assumed that the lead wire of the harness D that is closest to the harness E is set as the lead wire related to starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is set to the harness E side, and the harness E is wired so as to pass above the harness D. Thereby, the lead wire for starting the harness D is hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to a setting change state. Although the description of the 22nd embodiment partially overlaps with that of the 19th embodiment, it will be explained anew.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, before shifting to the setting change state, check whether the door switch 17 is on, whether the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether the reset switch 153 is on. It is possible to move to the setting change state on the condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, even if the setting key switch 152 is accessed by illegally drilling a hole in the front door 12 with a drill or the like, the setting change state will not be entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Further, even if the door switch 17, setting key switch 152, and reset switch 153 are all turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not occur. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be checked, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that in the case of transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the door switch 17 is on. Furthermore, in the case of transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is off.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the setting change state are set such that the setting key switch 152 is turned from on to off, and that the door switch 17 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the setting change state ends before the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of misbehavior).
Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to enter the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and it is possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to enter the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined at the end of the setting change state. It's okay.

Secondly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off status of the door switch 17 is not judged, but when the setting change state ends, the on/off status of the door switch 17 is judged, and the setting change state cannot be ended unless the door switch 17 is on.
Thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value may be set not to be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated.
Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined, and while in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153. However, when the start switch 41 is operated, which is an operation for confirming the setting value, if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value is not confirmed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM 53).

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. After moving to (setting change processing), the current setting value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the setting value becomes changeable. In this case, the set value data becomes "0". Therefore, the setting value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes a game count counter, a payout count counter (including a ring buffer), and each ratio data.

In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame release switch 523 is on, whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is checked. It is possible to shift to a setting change state on the condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state does not occur.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the island installed in the hall, it is conceivable that the player could sneak around to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and access the main control board 530 without opening the front frame 502. However, if the frame release switch 523 is not on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (setting values cannot be changed).

Moreover, even if the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not occur. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting key switch 535 does not shift to the setting change state and also shifts to the setting confirmation state. do not.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is in the off state), , it is possible to move to the setting confirmation state.

Further, in a case where opening of the front frame 502 and opening of the glass door 505 can be detected separately as in this embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are opened at the same time (i.e., the door A specification may be adopted in which transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state is permitted when the release switch 522 is on and the frame release switch 523 is on).
By setting in this manner, the function of the set values can be inspected without performing any extra steps in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500. Furthermore, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko machine 500 during board maintenance work in the hall after the pachinko machine 500 is installed in the hall, the settings can be changed or checked in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected. Therefore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be open or closed. However, when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, the glass door 505 is to be closed, and when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, it is determined whether the door open switch 522 is on or off, and it must be off. It may be possible to shift to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state under the condition that.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor (hereinafter referred to as a "cover sensor") that detects the opening and closing of the cover 561 may be provided, and a transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state may be made possible on the condition that the cover sensor is on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, which is common to the slot machine 10.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is the operation for confirming the setting value, whereas in the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 is the operation for confirming the setting value and ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be ended on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned from on to off and the frame opening switch 523 is on. This makes it possible to eliminate a state where the setting change state ends with the frame opening switch 523 off, i.e., the front frame 502 not being opened (a state where there is a high possibility of cheating).

In this embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and the setting change state can be terminated on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on/off state of the frame release switch 523 is not determined. You may also do so.

Second, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but when the setting change state ends, it is determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, and the frame release switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but if the frame release switch 523 is not on, even if the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value will not change. You can also set it so that it does not occur.

Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, and during the setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536. If the frame release switch 523 is not turned on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for confirming the set value, is turned off, the set value will not be confirmed (the new set value will not be stored in RWM). May be set.

Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance The data related to the information displayed on the display monitor) 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 be provided on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessible even if the front frame 502 is slightly opened.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting The change (reset) switch 536 is arranged on the right side within the area of the main control board 530. Thereby, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be placed closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, since the left side in the figure is the open side, if it is formed as shown in FIG. can be placed.

In the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion slot 151 and setting change (reset) switch 153 are connected to the rotation axis of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is opened, on the main control board 50. It is preferable to arrange them so that they are close to each other. For example, if the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22, and when the front door 12 is viewed from the front (player) side, the left side is the rotation axis side of the front door 12 and the right side is the open side. If you open the door 12 and look at the main control board 50, it will appear as shown in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are placed on the left side in FIG. A switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a measure to make it difficult to transition to the setting change state due to cheating, for example, in the pachinko game machine 500, the setting key switch 535 may be configured to be turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534 and then rotating the setting key counterclockwise. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise as well and the transition to the setting change state is not made when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state can be made difficult to notice.
In particular, if the structure is designed so that, when inserting a key into key insertion port 521 to open front frame 502, front frame 502 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the direction of rotation of the key when front frame 502 is opened will be opposite to the direction of rotation of the setting key, making it difficult to notice the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10 as described above.
The setting key switch 152 may be configured to be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151. In this case, by configuring the settings key so that it can be rotated clockwise, and by configuring it so that it does not shift to the settings change state when the settings key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the settings change state will be made less obvious. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front door 12, if the structure is such that the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the rotation direction of the key when opening the front door 12 and the rotation direction of the setting key and are in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case 560 of the board case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion slot 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that in FIG. 113, like FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of setting key insertion slot 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming it in this way, for example, when attempting to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting mistakes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the top surface of the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the top surface of the cover 561 is , is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming it in this way, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, an attempt is made to insert a wire-like object between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover Even if an attempt is made to open the 561, it can be made difficult to do so, so it is possible to suppress the setting mistake.

Although the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation completion sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is finished. For example, it may output a voice saying "Setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if you start playing at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game at the earliest.
b) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is ended before the end of the game when the game ends in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game that won a special prize (in the case of slot machine 10) or the game that became a jackpot (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500) , ends the output of the setting confirmation completion sound.
One example is to set it as follows.

(2) Furthermore, at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends, an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended is outputted by the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500). It's okay. In this case, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the performance time by the lamp is
a) End the lamp performance before the end of the game at the earliest.
b) End the lamp effect before the end of the game when the game ends in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game that won the special prize (in the case of slot machine 10) or the game that became a jackpot (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500) , ends the lamp display.
Examples include:

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), a setting change (or confirmation) completion sound and a lamp effect are output. However, these setting change (or confirmation) completion sounds and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, this is not limited to the above, and when the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended, an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has been ended may be executed by an output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion slot 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they are provided separately from the main control board 50. A setting change board may be provided, and a setting key insertion slot 151 (setting key switch 152), a setting change (reset) switch 153, and a setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 500. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion slot 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 are provided on this setting change board. Good too.

(5) Although we have shown an example of outputting the sound "Settings change has finished" as the settings change completion sound, it is not necessarily limited to this wording; for example, "Settings have been updated" etc. There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, an example is shown in which the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends, but during actual hall operation, it is assumed that the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends. I haven't. For example, it is assumed that a hall manager changes settings and then tries out one game. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly completed by outputting the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, be careful not to confuse the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp with the effect output during the game. One of the objectives is to

B. Twentieth embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to enable sliding movement. However, there are various methods for engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before sliding movement, and the method is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 108. In addition, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap with a certain degree of freedom when overlapped. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How to arrange the connectors 539a to 539h on the main control board 530, and which connector legs should be set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and lower case 570 are temporarily fitted. , various methods can be mentioned.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide as in this embodiment, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first, as shown in FIG. 109. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a symmetrical position to the connectors 539g and 539h, its connector legs are not exposed even if the amount of sliding movement increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, as shown in FIG. 103, from the connector 539a side (left side in the figure), connectors important in terms of security (connectors with signal lines related to starting, signals related to reception and payout of game media) connectors with signal lines, connectors with signal lines related to output of external signals, and connectors with signal lines related to presentation) are arranged in sequence, and connectors with signal lines that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as connectors 539g and 539h. This can be mentioned.

(3) Although the board case 550 has the crimped parts 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can be applied to the board case 550 that does not have the crimped parts. For example, the board case that houses the sub-control board 540 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have a caulking part, but the 20th embodiment can be applied to such a board case as well.

C. Twenty-First Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may be made entirely of thick lead wires, or may be made entirely of thin lead wires.
Further, the harness E has been shown as an example in which only thin lead wires are arranged in a single row, but the harness and connector terminal may have two or more rows of thin lead wires.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may have any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which thick and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, there may be at least one thick lead wire in the row, and at least one thin lead wire.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector on main control board 530 is defined as "one harness."
For example, harness G connected to connector 539g is one harness, and harness H connected to connector 539h is one harness. When harness G and harness H are tied together at a further end, it is called a "harness group" and not called "one harness."

(3) When the main control board 530 and other boards are connected by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, at the other end of the harness, the N lead wires are divided into Nx wires (Nx≧1) and Ny wires (Ny≧1), and a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires. The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal It is assumed that the line is connected to the same board or a different board).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is possible to shift to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, but similarly to the slot machine 10, the setting key switch 535 must be turned on after the power is turned on. It may also be possible to shift to the settings confirmation state. In this case as well, it is possible to determine whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, and to shift to the setting confirmation state on the condition that it is on.

(2) As described above, a setting change board may be provided as a separate board from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the open axis of the front door 12 (closer to the open axis) inside the casing, in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, the substrate is arranged. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting is made on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side of the hinge mechanism 503 (closer to the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to arrange a modified board. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion slots 151, 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153, 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Furthermore, even in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 be placed far from the open end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with a management information display LED 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable that the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 is disposed in a position away from the open side, and the main control board 50 or 530 is also disposed in a position away from the open end.
However, it is possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 in a position away from the open side on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted in approximately the center of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, it is also possible to make the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 easily invisible by simply arranging the main control board 50 or 530 in a position away from the open end.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<23rd embodiment>
The twenty-third embodiment relates to a presentation lamp (decorative lamp section) 541.
Here, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes things that are approximately the same but not completely the same due to manufacturing errors, and things that are not completely the same but appear to be the same visually. Moreover, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same".
Although the description of the 23rd embodiment partially overlaps with the 19th embodiment (B), it will be explained anew.
FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 115 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side).

116 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper lamp cover 613 and the right lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper part of the upper lamp cover 613 and the right lamp cover 622. 118 is a perspective view of the right base member 650 seen from the right side with parts removed, and FIG. 118 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. It is.

119 is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. 121 is an enlarged top perspective view of the right base member 650 with the upper part removed, viewed from the left side, and FIG. 121 shows the right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. 650 is an enlarged view of the upper left side.

122 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 123 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.
FIG. 124 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper lamp cover 613, the upper part of the right lamp cover 622, and the right lamp board 621 removed, and corresponds to FIG. 116.
FIG. 125 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
FIG. 126 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. It is equipped with
Further, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with the game area (not shown) facing the front side, and a game board 504 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to cover the game area of the game board 504.

Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, etc. are attached.
Furthermore, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501.
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion slot 521 into which a key for operating the locking device is inserted is provided on the right side of the glass door 505. .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 and the key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502, the front frame 502 It can be opened (moved) forward (towards the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, upper plate 506, lower plate 507, firing handle 508, etc. attached to the front frame 502 are Together with the frame 502, it moves forward relative to the outer frame 501 about the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.
Note that when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, and thereby, the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed to the front frame 502 and the key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 to unlock the front frame 502 and the glass door 505, the glass door 505 The front frame 502 can be opened forward about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis.
Note that when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, and thereby the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

Further, the game area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval, and are arranged at the upper part of the front side of the glass door 505, the right side part, and A presentation lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 is attached to the left side so as to surround the glass plate.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, a glass plate is located in front of the game area of the game board 504. Thereby, the game area of the game board 504 can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the effect lamp (decorative lamp part) 541 includes an upper frame lamp part 610 arranged along the front upper edge of the glass door 505 and a front right edge of the glass door 505. The right frame lamp part 620 is arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp part 630 is arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505.

That is, the upper frame lamp part 610 is a decorative lamp part formed in a horizontally long manner from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505.
Further, the right frame lamp section 620 is a decorative lamp section formed in a vertically long manner from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp part 630 is a decorative lamp part formed vertically from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505.

Furthermore, the right end of the upper frame lamp part 610 and the upper end of the right frame lamp part 620 are continuous, and the left end of the upper frame lamp part 610 and the upper end of the left frame lamp part 630 are continuous.
As a result, the glass plate placed in the center of the glass door 505 has its upper edge, right edge, and left edge surrounded by the upper frame lamp part 610, the right frame lamp part 620, and the left frame lamp part 630. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right lamp board 611, an upper frame left lamp board 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613.
The upper frame right lamp board 611 has a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as "light emitting means") for causing the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected. -b is a mounted lamp board, which is placed on the right side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp board 612 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the left side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the element facing the front side.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 116, 119, and 120, four LEDs 641a to 641d are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611. Further, although not shown, four LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame left lamp board 612 as well as the upper frame right lamp board 611. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.

In addition, full-color LEDs are equipped with three LEDs: one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light. By adjusting the output of these three LEDs, it is possible to express full color. It is something.
In other words, it is equipped with three light-emitting elements: a light-emitting element that emits red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full color LED.

Furthermore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made of white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or performing silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612, and is attached to the upper front part of the glass door 505 as shown in Figures 114 and 115.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 613. As a result, when the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to glow.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is made of a colorless and translucent resin. Therefore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made of green or black, for example, the appearance of the upper frame lamp part 610 will be poor when the light emitting elements are turned off. When the light emitting element emits light, it may appear to emit light in a color different from the set color.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is made of white. Thereby, even if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the appearance of the upper frame lamp part 610 is not deteriorated. Can be done.
In addition, by configuring the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and upper frame left lamp board 612 in white, the light emitted from the light emitting element is transmitted to the upper frame lamp cover on the light emitting element mounting surface. It is efficiently reflected toward the 613 side. Thereby, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can be made to appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, by configuring the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in white, the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly. In particular, when the light emitting element emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in a preset color.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 , the right frame lamp unit 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622 .
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the right frame lamp unit 620 and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected, and is positioned on the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting element facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front right side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, seven LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper part of the right frame lamp board 621. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are also mounted on the lower part of the right frame lamp board 621 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is made of white. As in the case of the upper right lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the right lamp board 621 on which the light emitting elements are mounted by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621, and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115.
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 622. Thereby, when the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to shine.

By configuring the entire surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted in white, the appearance of the right-frame lamp section 620 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is The above-mentioned upper frame lamp part 610 makes the right frame lamp cover 622 appear to shine brighter by efficiently reflecting the light toward the cover 622 side, and makes the color of the light emitting elements appear clear. It is similar to

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the left frame lamp section 630 includes a left frame lamp board 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632.
The left frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness is connected for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the glass door 505 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp board 631 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 631 is made of white. As in the case of the upper frame right lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed by coating or silk screen printing a white resist on the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 631.

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 631, and is attached to the front left side of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 631. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 632. As a result, when the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 emits light, the left frame lamp cover 632 appears to shine.

By configuring the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 631 in white, the appearance of the left frame lamp section 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting elements is The above-mentioned upper frame lamp section 610 makes the left frame lamp cover 632 appear brighter by reflecting the light toward the cover 632 side efficiently, and makes the color of the light emitting element appear clear. It is similar to

Further, the glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 116 to 121) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member that forms the skeleton of the right side portion of the glass door 505, and the left base member is a member that forms the skeleton of the left side portion of the glass door 505. Furthermore, the left base member is formed to have a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape with the right base member 650. The right base member 650 and the left base member constitute the frame of the glass door 505.

Also, as shown in Figures 119 to 121, the upper front part of the right base member 650 is provided with an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is mounted, and an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 to which the right portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 119 to 121, the front right side of the right base member 650 is provided with a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which the right frame lamp board 621 is attached, and a right frame cover mounting portion 654 to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached.

Although not shown, the upper front side of the left base member includes an upper frame left side board attachment part to which the upper frame left lamp board 612 is attached, and an upper frame left side cover attachment part to which the left side part of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached. is provided.
Further, although not shown, the left side of the front surface of the left base member is provided with a left frame board attachment part to which the left frame lamp board 631 is attached, and a left frame cover attachment part to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is attached. .

The upper frame lamp section 610 is composed of the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper frame right side board mounting section 651, the upper frame left side board mounting section (not shown), the upper frame right side cover mounting section 652, and the upper frame left side cover mounting section (not shown).
As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
In addition, the right frame lamp section 620 is composed of the right frame lamp board 621, the right frame lamp cover 622, the right frame board mounting section 653, and the right frame cover mounting section 654.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp section 630 is composed of a left frame lamp board 631, a left frame lamp cover 632, a left frame board mounting section (not shown), and a left frame cover mounting section (not shown).

The upper frame right board attachment part 651 is a part to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached, and is provided at the upper front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 120 to 122.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 120 to 122, the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is provided with a board support rib 661a shaped along the outer periphery of the upper frame right side lamp board 611. This board support rib 661a is for supporting the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame. When the upper frame right lamp board 611 is placed at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611 rests on the board support rib 661a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, the upper frame right board attachment portion 651 is provided with three positioning bosses 682a to 682c. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used for positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position in the upper frame right board attachment part 651, and are formed in a cylindrical shape.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 123, a screw boss 681 is provided on the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651. This screw boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right side lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board attachment part 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. Further, a screw hole 684 is provided at the center of the screw boss 681.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, a positioning hole 685a is provided in the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a. This positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting part 651, and is a hole on one side of the upper frame right lamp board 611. It penetrates from one side to the other side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, a fixing hole 686a is provided in the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the screw fixing boss 681. This fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board mounting part 651, and extends from one side of the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the other side. Penetrating.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the opposite side of the upper frame right lamp board 611 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board attachment part 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided at the center of the screw fixing boss 681 matches the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, insert the screw 683a into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, and screw this screw 683a into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached to the upper frame right board. 651.

As shown in FIG. 123, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. Further, the fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, and the short axis of the positioning hole 685a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the long axis of the positioning hole 685a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. It is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688.
Furthermore, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

In this way, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. As a result, when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board attachment part 651, it is possible to avoid confusing the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a, and the assembly work can proceed smoothly. I'm trying to be able to do that.
Further, since the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a, and this also prevents the screw shaft 688 from being fixed to the positioning hole 685a. This is done so as not to confuse it with the use hole 686a.

Further, when the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right side board mounting part 651, the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a, as shown in FIGS. The tip of the LED 641a protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right lamp board 611 of the upper frame. The tip of the positioning boss 682a that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a is referred to as a protrusion 687. This protrusion 687 is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the protrusion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, so that the upper frame lamp part 610 appears to shine beautifully.

Also, insert a screw 683a into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, and screw this screw 683a into the screw hole 684 to attach the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123.
As shown in FIG. 123, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the LED 641a mounting surface is set larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the LED 641a mounting surface.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the LED 641a mounting surface is "T1" and the height of the LED 641a from the LED 641a mounting surface is "T2", it is set to satisfy "T1>T2". .
In other words, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than that of the LED 641a.

Further, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LED 641a. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, by setting the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a to be larger than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, and by applying surface treatment to the screw head 689 to reflect light, it is possible to prevent light from emitting from the LED 641a. The emitted light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 appears to shine neatly.

The upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is a portion to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached, and is provided at the upper front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120.
Further, the upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. This cover fitting groove 662a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650. Then, when the upper end edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662a and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached to the upper frame right side cover attachment part 652. Fixed.

The right frame board attachment part 653 is a part to which the right frame lamp board 621 is attached, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 124.
Further, as shown in FIG. 124, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with board support ribs 661b to 661e shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. The substrate support ribs 661b to 661e are for supporting the right frame lamp substrate 621. When the right frame lamp board 621 is placed at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621 rests on the board support ribs 661b to 661e.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, the right frame lamp board 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b adjacent to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, and is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653. It penetrates all the way to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board attachment part 653, and penetrates from one side of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other side. .

Although not shown, a positioning boss is provided at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 685b in the right frame board mounting portion 653, and a screwing boss is provided at a position corresponding to the fixing hole 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided on the right frame board attachment part 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board attachment part 653. Then, by inserting a screw into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to k on the right frame lamp board 621 and screwing this screw into the screw fixing boss provided in the right frame board mounting part 653, the right frame lamp The board 621 is fixed to the right frame board attachment part 653.
Note that in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, illustrations of the positioning boss and screws are omitted to make it easier to see the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 119, in this embodiment, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are both formed circularly. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b and the opening area of the positioning hole 685b are different. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
Thereby, when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board attachment part 653, it is possible to avoid mistaking the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly. .

The right frame cover attachment part 654 is a part to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 119, 120, and 124.
Further, the right frame cover attachment portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. This cover fitting groove 662b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650.

Then, when the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the right frame lamp The cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover attachment part 654.
As shown in FIGS. 118 and 125, the left edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 (the edge on the game board 504 side) covers the outside of the left edge of the right base member 650 (the edge on the game board 504 side). It is formed like this.

Further, as described above, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 116), and the right frame board mounting portion 653 is shaped along the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621. (See Figure 124). The width W1 in the lateral direction of the right frame lamp board 621 (FIG. 116) is configured to be substantially the same as the width W2 in the lateral direction of the right frame board mounting portion 653 (FIG. 124).
That is, when the width of the right frame lamp board 621 in the short direction is "W1", and the width of the right frame board attachment part 653 in the short direction is "W2", the setting is made to satisfy "W1≒W2". has been done. As a result, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board mounting portion 653.

The entire surface of the light-emitting element mounting surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 is made of white, and by covering the right-frame board mounting portion 653 with such a right-frame lamp board 621, the light emission on the right-frame lamp board 621 is reduced. The entire mounting surface of the element can function as a reflector, and thereby the color of the light emitting element can be clearly displayed.
Note that "substantially rectangular shape" means "approximately rectangular shape." Therefore, as long as the shape is approximately rectangular, for example, there may be unevenness along the long side or short side, or all or part of the long side or short side may be curved or inclined, and Further, the corners may not be right angles, and may be rounded. Furthermore, the term "substantially rectangular" is a concept that includes "rectangle".

Further, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is formed in a shape along the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is formed in a shape along the outer periphery of the right frame board mounting portion 653. It is formed. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621.
Therefore, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board attachment part 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover attachment part 654, the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 is covered with the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered with a substrate 621. Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 appears white, and the light emitting element appears to emit light clearly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a lens portion 670 is provided in the right frame lamp cover 622 at a position facing the right frame lamp board 621. As shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 is constructed by joining curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness.
126(a) shows a partial sectional view of the lens portion 670 included in the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 126(b) shows another partial sectional view of the lens portion 670 included in the right frame lamp cover 622. It shows.

As shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 has the same wall thickness at all locations, but the curvature differs depending on the location.
In this way, by forming the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness are joined together, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced, and The light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly displayed.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp board, and the shape of the lens portion is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 622.

Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a main control board 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10. It includes a sub-control board (performance control board, performance board) 540 corresponding to the sub-control board 80, and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub control board 540 controls the output of effects, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524. These control boards are all connected to each other by a harness.

Further, the sub-control board 540, the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are connected by a harness.
The sub-control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Note that connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the content of the presentation based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and controls the determined presentation to be output. At this time, the sub-control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631.
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board that controls the entire performance and a sub-sub board that controls the image display of the image display device 23.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 includes a starting port switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 532 provided in the gaming area of the game board 504. are connected (see Figure 99). When a game ball enters the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 obtains a random number value, executes various lottery drawings based on the obtained random number value, and also activates the special symbol display device. The variable display of special symbols at 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and stop pattern of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of various lottery results, and changes the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 to correspond to the determination. Control the display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532 (the starting port switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value and, based on the acquired random number value, selects a jackpot lottery (a lottery for jackpot or miss), a special symbol A lottery (a lottery to determine which symbol to use as the stop symbol of the special symbols) and a variable pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the time to display the special symbols in a variable manner) are executed (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Moreover, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lottery results, it transmits a command indicating at least some lottery results to the sub control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 receives a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a command (jackpot command) indicating that the jackpot has been won to the sub control board 540.
When the sub control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub control board 540 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to win the jackpot. emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to .
Further, as a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that he has won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface on which the light emitting element is mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, by causing the light-emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors when a jackpot is won, the colors of the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
In addition, when a jackpot is achieved, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and all the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot. The element may be caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In addition, when a jackpot is achieved, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and the right lamp board 621 and The light emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light.
Note that by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can be caused to emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, it transmits a command (door open command) indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 540 displays the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in white. Control it to emit light.

Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the dispensing control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is on, it transmits a command (frame opening command) indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on to the sub-control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the frame open command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to emit white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when it is detected that the door release switch 522 or the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emit white light, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame It is possible to notify the clerk at the hall that 502 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it becomes noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 500, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random value, and based on the acquired random value, the main control board 530 acquires a random value. , execute jackpot lottery (lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or not), special symbol lottery (lottery to determine which symbol to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol), and variable pattern lottery (lottery to determine the time to display the special symbol in a variable manner) At the same time, variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 is started.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of the above-mentioned various drawings, and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 so as to correspond to the determination. Control the display of symbols.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 and the turning on of the starting port switch 533 is detected, one game starts, and the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531 ends, One game may end when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

Moreover, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lottery results, it transmits a command indicating at least some lottery results to the sub control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 loses in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a command indicating the loss (lose command) to the sub control board 540.

Further, when the sub-control board 540 receives the loss command, it executes a performance pattern lottery at the time of failure (a lottery to select either the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2).
The sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in a manner according to the result of the production pattern lottery. In addition to causing the light emitting element to emit light, the red LED mounted on the decorative board on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

Figures 127 (a) and (b) show performance patterns when the jackpot lottery results in a loss, and (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when the lottery results in a loss. , is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 at the time of failure.
In FIGS. 127(a) and (b), "LED1" indicates the LEDs 641e to 641k (all full color LEDs) mounted on the right lamp board 621, and "LED2" indicates the LEDs 641e to 641k (all full color LEDs) mounted on the right lamp board 611 of the upper frame. The mounted LEDs 641a to 641d (all full-color LEDs) are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 127(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504, and "LED4" indicates the decoration on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on a board provided with the device. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504 is made of green.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
As shown in FIG. 127(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED 1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) lights up (turns on) at the same time as the special symbols start changing. , the light goes out (off) before the special symbol changes. Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED2 (LEDs 641a to 641d mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame) lights up after the special symbol starts changing. , before the end of the variation of the special symbol and at the same time as the LED 1 is turned off. In addition, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED 3 (one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504) changes the special symbol. It lights up after the start and goes out before the special symbol changes. Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when presentation pattern 1 is selected, LED4 (another red LED mounted on a board provided in the decoration on the game board 504) lights up at the same time as LED3 lights up after the special symbol starts to change, and goes out at the same time as LED2 lights up before the special symbol stops changing. Also, in presentation pattern 1, the lighting time of LED4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 127(b), when the production pattern 2 is determined, the LED 1 lights up at the same time as the special symbol variation starts, and the special symbol variation ends, as in the case where the production pattern 1 is determined. lights out earlier. Further, in effect pattern 2 as well, similarly to effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 does not light up. Therefore, in production pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 2 is 0 seconds.

127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is selected, the LED 3 is turned on after the special symbol starts to vary and is turned off before the special symbol ends to vary, simultaneously with the turning off of the LED 1. In the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is selected, the LED 4 is turned on after the special symbol starts to vary and at the same time as the LED 3, and is turned off before the special symbol ends to vary and before the LED 3 is turned off. Also, in the effect pattern 2, as in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery, either performance pattern 1 or performance pattern 2 is determined by the performance pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 emit light according to the determined performance pattern. Control.
The LED 1 is turned on (emits light) for 6 seconds when either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time for lighting up (light-emitting) the LED 1 in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 6 seconds.

Furthermore, when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 is turned on for one second, and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 is not turned on.
For this reason, the average value of the time during which the LED 3 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, regarding the LED 3, when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on for 2 seconds, and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on for 4 seconds.
For this reason, the average value of the time the LED 4 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Furthermore, the LED 4 is turned on (emits light) for 3 seconds when either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time the LED 4 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 3 seconds.
From the above, the average value of the time that LED 1 is turned on in a game that loses in a jackpot lottery is set to be longer than the average value of the time that LED 2 to LED 4 are lit in a game that loses in a jackpot lottery.

As described above, the entire mounting surface of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right frame lamp board 621 is constructed in white, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed from a colorless, translucent resin. This allows the light emitted by the LEDs 1 (the LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) to be clearly visible, so that a beautiful presentation using the LEDs 1 can be seen even in a game that does not result in a jackpot lottery.

Although the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the twenty-third embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be colorless or white and have a translucent portion.

Therefore, a lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be, for example, entirely colorless and translucent, or entirely white and translucent.
Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may have only the portion corresponding to the front of the light-emitting element that is colorless and translucent, and the other portions may be colored, such as red or blue, and translucent, or may not be translucent.
Furthermore, lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may, for example, have only the portion corresponding to the front of the light-emitting element be white and translucent, and the other portions may be colored, such as red or blue, and translucent, or may not be translucent.

Further, all or part of the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in substantially the same color or similar color to one of the full-color LEDs serving as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 are set to blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255''), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks almost the same color as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit light in blue, or a blue resin that looks similar to the blue above. It can be made of resin.

Note that due to manufacturing errors, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may vary, for example, with an output value of "0" for red (R), an output value of "0" for green (G), and an output value of "250" for blue (B). The emitted color may be the same as the emitted color when the output value of red (R) is "5", the output value of green (G) is "5", and the output value of blue (B) is "255". It may be the same color.
Taking this point into consideration, the term "substantially the same color" is used.
Note that "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes "the same color." Moreover, "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely the same color but appear to be the same color visually.
FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE (Commission Internationale de Illumination) standard color system (XYZ color system).
In FIG. 128, a range of "substantially the same color" as blue is shown using blue as an example.
In FIG. 128, the black circle indicates blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the circle around the black circle indicates an example of a range of "substantially the same color" as blue.

Furthermore, "similar colors" is a concept that does not include the target color but includes colors in the vicinity of the target color.
FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system.
In FIG. 129, the range of "similar colors" of blue is shown using blue as an example.
In FIG. 129, the white circle indicates blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the hatching around the white circle The circle marked with indicates an example of the range of "similar colors" of blue.

Furthermore, the range of the blue "similar color" is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in FIG. "similar colors" range.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Since this is a range that is recognized as being blue, it can be set as a range of "similar colors" to blue.

The same applies to the range of "similar colors" other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129, the range from 0 to 0.3 on the x-axis and 0.6 or above on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as green, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to green.
Also, for example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129, the range of 0.5 or more on the x-axis and 0.2 to 0.4 on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as red, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to red.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element (light emitting means) on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white, but at least a part of it is made of substantially white. It would be fine if it had been done.
For example, among the mounting surfaces of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the peripheral parts of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611 may be black.
Note that "substantially white" is a concept that includes "white". Furthermore, "substantially white" is a concept that includes a color that is not completely white but visually appears white.

Even if at least a portion of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in approximately the same or similar color as the light emitted by the light-emitting means, by configuring at least a portion of the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board in approximately white, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board from looking bad even when seen through the lamp cover, and it is possible to make the color of the light-emitting means look beautiful, and furthermore, when the light-emitting means is emitting light, it can be seen to emit the color as set.

(2) In the twenty-third embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a modification of the cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 119, and corresponds to FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 130, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the positioning hole 685a from being mistaken for the fixing hole 686a.

(3) In the twenty-third embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, but the positioning hole 685a is not limited to this, and may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the twenty-third embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a may be painted white, for example.

(5) In the twenty-third embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two lamp boards, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one lamp board is provided. It may be provided with only one lamp board, or may be provided with three or more lamp boards.
Further, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, a first member located on the right side (upper frame right side member), a second member located on the center part, It may be composed of three members: a member (upper frame center member) and a third member located on the left side (upper frame left side member).

(6) In the 23rd embodiment, the right frame lamp section 620 includes only one right frame lamp board 621 as a lamp board, but is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. .
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper part and a first member located in the lower part. It may also be constructed from two members: No. 2 (lower right frame member).

(7) In the 23rd embodiment, the left frame lamp section 630 includes only one left frame lamp board 631 as a lamp board, but is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. .
That is, as described in the twenty-third embodiment and modifications (5) to (7), the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 each include only one lamp board. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, the left frame lamp cover 632 may include a first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper part and a first member located in the lower part. It may also be constructed from two members: No. 2 (lower left frame member).

Further, for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and an upper frame left lamp board 612 are attached to the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and an upper frame lamp is installed so as to cover the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. The upper frame lamp section 610 may be configured by attaching a cover 613.
Similarly, a right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, and a right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to cover the right frame lamp board 621 to configure the right frame lamp section 620. The left frame lamp section 630 may be configured by attaching a left frame lamp board 631 to the front left side of the glass door 505 and attaching a left frame lamp cover 632 to cover the left frame lamp board 631.

That is, although the decorative lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 such as the right frame lamp section 620 may be made into a unit, it is also possible to directly attach a lamp substrate such as the right frame lamp substrate 621 to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, and to The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the board.

(8) In the 23rd embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 etc. is caused to emit white light, and the glass door 505 The opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk at the hall.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like may be caused to emit white light to control the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can also let the staff at the hall know that you are there.

Here, although the description partially overlaps with the nineteenth embodiment (B), a setting change state and a setting confirmation state will be described.
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion slot 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99). .

The setting key switch 535 is a switch into which a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion slot 534, and is turned on by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, for example.
The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. Further, the reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state to the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, with the power switch 511 turned off (power off state), the setting key switch 535 and reset switch 536 are turned on, and when the power switch 511 is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. (Step S701 in FIG. 100).
When it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on ("Yes" in step S701 in FIG. 100), the state shifts to the setting change state. (Step S702 in FIG. 100).

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED.
Furthermore, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the set value is incremented by "+1". In this embodiment, the setting value has six stages from setting 1 to setting 6, and in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value changes from "1" to "2". "→...→"5"→"6"→"1"→... and changes cyclically.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is determined and the setting change state ends.

Further, when the setting key switch 535 is turned on with the power switch 511 turned off, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the conditions for transition to the setting change state are not satisfied (“No” in step S701 in FIG. 100) when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 performs the following: Next, it is determined whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

If it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 in FIG. 100), the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. (Step S704 in FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED. This allows you to check the current setting values.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when the state changes to the settings change state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating that the state changes to the settings change state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting change start command, the sub control board 540 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , control the light to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change end command) indicating the end of the setting change state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Furthermore, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the state shifts to the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub control board 540 changes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to white. Control the light to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation end command) indicating the end of the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by emitting white light from the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm that the settings are being controlled in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can notify the store clerk.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is noticeable, and the hall staff can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Note that when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, when controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, and when the light emitting element is to be blinked when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Furthermore, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and then turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state may be that the power switch 511 is turned off, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and in this state, the power switch 511 is turned on. In other words, the condition for transitioning to the setting change state may not be that the reset switch 536 is on.

Furthermore, the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 off, and turning on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be a condition for transition to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the 23rd embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emits white light, and the glass door 505 The opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk at the hall.
In addition, in the above modification (8), in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emits white light to control the setting change state or setting confirmation state. The staff at the hall were informed of this.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when recovering from a power outage, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emits white light to notify the hall clerk that recovery is in progress from a power outage. You can also notify.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), in the pachinko game machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power-off), the process according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 is executed. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when recovering from power-off.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (power off), the main control board 530 stores information at the time of power off in the RWM.
Furthermore, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power-off), the main control board 530 determines whether the information at the time of recovery from the power-off matches the information at the time of the power-off. (Step S707 in FIG. 100).

Then, when the information at the time of recovery from the power-off matches the information at the time of the power-off, it is determined that the RWM is normal ("Yes" in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the state recovery process is executed. (Step S708 in FIG. 100).
On the other hand, if the information at the time of recovery from power-off does not match the information at power-off, it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), and RWM clear processing is executed ( Step S709 in FIG. 100).

Further, the state restoration process (step S708 in FIG. 100) is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power-off.
Furthermore, the RWM clearing process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process for clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (processing for initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed, or if it is determined that the RWM is abnormal ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear process is executed.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the state recovery process (step S708 in FIG. 100), or the RWM clear process (step S709 in FIG. 100 step S710) is executed.
Then, when the process of permitting a timer interrupt is executed, a series of processes executed when recovering from power-off is completed.

Furthermore, when the power switch 511 is turned on (recovering from a power-off), the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery start command) indicating that the power has returned from a power-off to the sub-control board 540. .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power recovery start command, the sub-control board 540 activates the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , control the light to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the process of permitting timer interrupts is executed, the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery end command) to the sub control board 540 indicating that a series of processes executed when recovering from a power-off has been completed. Send.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light while a series of processes are being executed when recovering from a power-off, and when the series of processes executed when recovering from a power-off is completed, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light. ends.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Furthermore, when the power is restored from a power outage, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emit white light, thereby informing the hall staff that the power is being restored from the power outage. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is noticeable, and the hall staff can easily notice that the system is recovering from a power-off.
Note that during recovery from power-off, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, during the recovery from the power-off, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the recovery from the power-off.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during recovery from a power cut, the glass door The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on when the front frame 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and during recovery from a power-off.

(10) In the 23rd embodiment and modifications (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, or When the power is restored from a power failure, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light to indicate that the glass door 505 and front frame 502 are open and that the settings are changed or confirmed. It is now possible to notify the hall staff that the system is under control or is recovering from a power outage.

However, the emitted light color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it is detected that the door release switch 522 or the frame release switch 523 is turned on, when the setting is changed or confirmed, or when the power is restored from a power failure, the The light-emitting elements may be made to emit light in a color that does not emit light during normal gaming.

Further, as a color that is not emitted during normal gaming, for example, a specific red color can be mentioned. Furthermore, as a specific red, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to "255" and the output values of green (G) and blue (B) are each set to "0", the light emitting element One example is the red color it emits. Such a red color is not emitted during normal gaming, and if the light-emitting element is emitted in such a red color, it will stand out, so make sure that the glass door 505 and front frame 502 are open, that the settings have been changed, or It is possible to make it easier for the hall clerk to notice that the system is being controlled to a setting confirmation state or that the system is recovering from a power-off.

(11) In the 23rd embodiment, the presentation lamp (decorative lamp part) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white has been described using the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500 as an example. The twenty-third embodiment can also be applied when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10.
FIG. 131 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to a modification of the twenty-third embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side).
Although the following explanation partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), it will be explained anew.

As shown in FIG. 131, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached to the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening can be opened and closed.
Furthermore, a door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a symbol display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged in parallel is arranged inside the cabinet 13. At a position corresponding to above the device 14, a main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, a door sensor, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a sub-control board 80, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 or an output port 52. ing.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Thereby, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be viewed from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. .

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is arranged at the top of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and production lamps (decorative lamp sections) are arranged at the top, right side, and left side of the front door 12. )21 is attached.
Further, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back side of the front door 12 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23.

The sub control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output, and according to the decision, the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, image Controls the output of the display device 23.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 131, the decorative lamp (decorative lamp part) 21 includes an upper frame lamp part 26 arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12, and an upper frame lamp part 26 arranged along the front right edge of the front door 12. A right frame lamp part 27 is arranged, and a left frame lamp part 28 is arranged along the front left edge of the front door 12.
That is, the upper frame lamp part 26 is a decorative lamp part formed in a horizontally long manner from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.
Further, the right frame lamp portion 27 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a vertically long manner from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp part 28 is a decorative lamp part formed vertically from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12.

As shown in FIG. 131, the upper frame lamp section 26 includes an upper frame lamp board 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a. It is arranged at the upper front of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).
Further, the upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.

Furthermore, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a as light emitting elements. All of these eight LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Specifically, as in the example of the pachinko game machine 500 of the twenty-third embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the upper frame lamp board 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

Further, the upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the right frame lamp section 27 includes a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp portion 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a as light emitting elements. All of these 16 LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, similarly to the upper frame lamp board 26a.

Further, the right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp portion 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a as light emitting elements. All of these 16 LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 28a is made of white, similarly to the upper frame lamp board 26a and the right frame lamp board 27a.

Further, the left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 28b.

As in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp The appearance of the upper frame lamp part 26, right frame lamp part 27, and left frame lamp part 28 is improved by configuring the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the board 26a, right frame lamp board 27a, and left frame lamp board 28a in white. This is to prevent deterioration and to ensure that the color of the light emitting element is clearly visible.

Although not shown, the front right side of the front door 12 is provided with a right frame board attachment part to which the right frame lamp board 27a is attached, and a right frame cover attachment part to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is attached. .
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed into a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right frame lamp board 27a in the lateral direction is approximately the same as the width of the right frame board mounting portion in the lateral direction. has been done. Thereby, the right frame lamp board 27a covers the right frame board mounting portion.

The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, and by covering the right frame board mounting portion with such a right frame lamp board 27a, the entire mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a can function as a reflector, thereby making the color of the light-emitting element appear beautiful.

Similarly, the front left side of the front door 12 is provided with a left frame board attachment part to which the left frame lamp board 28a is attached, and a left frame cover attachment part to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is attached.
Further, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left frame lamp board 28a in the width direction is approximately the same as the width of the left frame board mounting portion in the width direction. has been done. Thereby, the left frame lamp board 28a covers the left frame board mounting portion. The entire surface of the left frame lamp board 28a on which the light emitting elements are mounted functions as a reflector, so that the color of the light emitting elements can be clearly seen.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a positioning boss is inserted into the right frame lamp board 27a when positioning the right frame lamp board 27a at a predetermined position of the right frame board attachment part. and a fixing hole used when fixing (screwing) the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting portion are provided adjacent to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. This prevents the positioning hole from being mistaken for the fixing hole, allowing the assembly work to proceed smoothly.

Further, the positioning boss has a protrusion that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss projects to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a protrusion. This protrusion is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protrusion formed in a convex curved shape, so that the right frame lamp part 27 appears to shine beautifully.

In addition, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, when fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part, from the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part. Fix it by screwing it on. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the right frame lamp board 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.
Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the screw head, so that the right frame lamp part 27 appears to shine beautifully.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided in the right frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right frame lamp board 27a. The lens portion is constructed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b is reduced, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is made to appear clearly.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp board, and the shape of the lens portion is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 includes the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected by a harness, and information (commands) necessary for outputting the effects can be sent in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. There is.

Further, the sub-control board 80, the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by a harness.
Then, the sub control board 80 determines the contents of the effect based on the commands transmitted from the main control board 50, and performs control to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the winning combination lottery means 61 acquires a random number value, and draws a winning number based on the acquired random value, and the reel control means 65 All the motors 32 are driven and controlled so that all the reels 31 are rotated.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. , the rotation of the reel 31 associated with the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. At this time, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line, that winning combination becomes a prize, and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Further, when a lottery is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting lights mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Controls the light emission of the element.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special winning combination is won by the winning lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (special winning command) to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the special winning command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. Make it emit light.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special prize, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that he has won the special winning combination.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, by making the light emitting element emit light in rainbow colors when a special prize is won, the colors of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
In addition, when a special winning combination is won, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may emit light in a pattern corresponding to a special winning combination, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may be emitted in a pattern corresponding to a special winning combination. It may also emit light.

In addition, when a special prize is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a are made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special prize, and the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are activated. The light-emitting elements may be made to emit white light.
Note that by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can be caused to emit white light.

As described above, a door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor turns on and the signal is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is on, it transmits a command to that effect (door open command) to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light, thereby notifying the hall staff that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is open.
Note that when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the front door 12 is opened.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, one game is started, all reels 31 are stopped, and processes such as medal payout are performed. One game may end at a certain time.
Furthermore, when the winning combination selection means 61 results in a non-winning, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (non-winning command) to the sub control board 80.

Further, upon receiving the non-winning command, the sub-control board 80 executes a non-winning presentation pattern lottery (a lottery for selecting presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2).
Then, the sub control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a manner according to the result of the performance pattern lottery, and displays The red LED mounted on the board of the decoration around the window is controlled to emit light.

132(a) and (b) show performance patterns when the prize is not won by the role lottery means 61, and (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when the prize is not won. (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 in the case of non-winning.
In FIGS. 132(a) and (b), "LED1" indicates an LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a, and "LED2" indicates an LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a.
In addition, in FIGS. 132(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration around the display window, and "LED4" indicates one red LED included in the decoration around the display window. Another red LED mounted on the board is shown. The mounting surface of the red LED on the substrate included in the decoration around the display window is made of green.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), "reel rotation start" indicates the time when the reel 31 starts rotating. "First stop operation" indicates when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). "Second stop operation" indicates when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). "Third stop operation" indicates when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). “Payout” indicates processing time such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in a game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the performance pattern 1 is determined in the performance pattern lottery, the LED1 (LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) ) is turned on (turned on) when the reel 31 starts rotating, and turned off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed.
In addition, in production pattern 1, LED2 (LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is lit after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation. do. Moreover, LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the first stop operation. .
Furthermore, in production pattern 1, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. Therefore, the light goes out before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time. Furthermore, at the same time as the LED 2 is turned on, the LED 4 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), in a game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the performance pattern 2 is determined in the performance pattern lottery, the LED1 (LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) ) is lit (turned on) when the reels 31 start rotating, and turned off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed, similarly to when the performance pattern 1 is determined.
Furthermore, in the effect pattern 2, the LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in production pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation. . Moreover, LED1 and LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, in production pattern 2, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) is turned on after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, similarly to when production pattern 1 is determined. The light is turned on after the first stop operation and is turned off before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time.

In this way, in a game in which the winning combination is not achieved by the role selection means 61, either presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2 is determined by presentation pattern selection, and the light emission of LED1 to LED4 is controlled according to the determined presentation pattern.
In both presentation pattern 1 and presentation pattern 2, LED 1 is turned on when the reel 31 starts to rotate and is turned off when the second stop operation is performed.
In addition, in performance pattern 1, LED 2 lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off when the second stop operation is performed, but in performance pattern 2, it does not light up.

Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the LED 3 lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the first stop operation, and in production pattern 2, The light is turned on after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation.
Furthermore, in both performance pattern 1 and performance pattern 2, the LED 4 lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. The light goes out before the second stop operation.

From the above, the average time for which LED1 is turned on in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61 is set to be longer than the average time for which LED2 to LED4 are turned on in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61.
Furthermore, since the entire LED mounting surface on the right frame lamp board 27a is composed of white, and the right frame lamp cover 27b is formed of colorless, translucent resin, the light emitted by LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) can be made to look beautiful, and therefore a beautiful presentation using LED1 can be shown even in a game that is not won by the role selection means 61.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a etc. By emitting white light, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the setting is being changed or confirmed.
In the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off (power off state) and the power is turned on in this state, the slot machine 10 shifts to a setting change state (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 .
Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is updated ("+1") each time the setting change switch is operated (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state ("Yes" in step S242 of FIG. 38), the setting value is confirmed, and when the setting key switch is turned off ("Yes" in step S243 of FIG. 38), the setting change state ends.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the slot machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state.
Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. This allows you to check the current setting values.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when the state changes to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating that the state changes to the setting change state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting change start command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change end command) indicating the end of the setting change state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state continues (while the setting change process in FIG. 39 is being executed), and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Further, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the state has shifted to the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation end command) indicating the end of the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by emitting white light from the light emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to indicate that the hall is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can notify the store staff.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Note that when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, when controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light emitting element is made to blink when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on the state or the setting confirmation state.

In addition, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the gaming machine returns from a power outage, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a etc. are turned white. By emitting light, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the system is recovering from a power outage.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (power off), the main control board 50 executes the power off processing shown in FIG. 54.

Further, when the power is turned on (recovering from a power-off), the main control board 50 executes the power recovery process shown in FIG. 40.
Furthermore, when starting the power restoration process, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (power restoration start command) to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, upon receiving the power recovery start command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

In addition, when the main control board 50 ends the power recovery process, it sends a command indicating this (power recovery end command) to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power recovery end command, it ends the control of causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is completed, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Furthermore, by causing the light emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a to emit white light while the power restoration process is being executed, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the power restoration process is being executed. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, making it easier for the hall staff to notice that the power restoration process is being executed.
Note that while the power restoration process is being executed, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

During the execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting element may be caused to blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, when the light-emitting element is made to blink when the front door 12 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and while the power restoration process is being executed, the blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different when the front door 12 is open, when it is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and while the power restoration process is being executed.

(12) In the twenty-third embodiment, the pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, and in the modification (11), the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention is not limited to these.
For example, in Parrot gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), and casino machines, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board included in the decorative lamp section is configured in white, and the decorative lamp section includes By forming the lamp cover from a colorless or white transparent resin, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
Note that "Parrot" is a slot machine that uses game balls as game media.

(13) The first to twenty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<24th embodiment>
The meanings of technical terms in the twenty-fourth embodiment are as follows.
(1) Regarding light diffusivity There is no definition of "light diffusivity" stipulated by "ISO 80000-1" (JIS Z 8000-1) or the like. However, the light diffusion level is commonly expressed as "Haze." Therefore, the "light diffusivity" in the present invention is equivalent (synonymous) to haze.

"Haze" is defined, for example, by "JIS K 7136.""JIS K 7136" defines the haze of transmitted light as "the percentage of transmitted light that deviates from the incident light by 0.044 rad (2.5°) or more due to forward scattering among the transmitted light that passes through a test piece."
Therefore, the "light diffusion rate" in the present invention can be defined as the proportion of transmitted light that deviates from the incident light axis by "0.044 rad (2.5°)" or more out of the total transmitted light emitted from the light-emitting element and transmitted through the light diffusion section (such as light diffusion section 615e and light diffusion section 670a described below).

The transmittance (total light transmittance) of all transmitted light passing through the test piece is defined as "Tt", and the transmittance (diffuse transmittance) of transmitted light that deviates from the incident optical axis by "0.044 rad (2.5°)" or more is defined as "Td", then haze can be expressed by the following formula.
Haze = (Td/Tt) x 100
The higher the haze value, the higher the light diffusion rate. The higher the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion, the more hazy the opposite side appears when viewed through the light diffusion portion.

In addition, the intensity of the transmitted light in the range of "-90°" to "+90°" is measured, and the intensity of the transmitted light is half of that of the transmitted light at "0°". It is also known to measure angles (half-value angles). It is said that the larger the half-value angle, the higher the light diffusion performance (in other words, the light diffusion rate). Therefore, the "light diffusivity" is not limited to the above-mentioned haze, but can also be determined by the size of the half-value angle of transmitted light.

(2) About brightness As a measure of brightness, "brightness", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance" can be cited.
"Brightness" is an index indicating the intensity of light emitted from a light source toward an observer, and "cd (candela)/m ² " is used as the unit.
Moreover, "luminous intensity" is an index indicating the solid angular density of a luminous flux, and "cd" is used as a unit.
Furthermore, "illuminance" is an index indicating the amount of luminous flux incident per unit area out of the luminous flux emitted from a light source to a flat object, and the unit is "lx (lux)" or "lm (lumen)". /m ² ” is used.

Luminous intensity is the luminous flux divided by the unit solid angle, illuminance is the luminous flux divided by the unit area irradiated, and luminance is the luminous intensity divided by the unit area irradiated.
Therefore, any of brightness, luminous intensity, and illuminance can be used to express the amount of light, brightness, or intensity of light.
Therefore, the "luminance adjustment means 546" in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), which will be described later, may be referred to as "luminance adjustment means 546" or "illuminance adjustment means 546."
Further, the "luminance adjustment means 92" in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) to be described later may be referred to as "luminance adjustment means 92" or "illuminance adjustment means 92."
Similarly, "brightness adjustment mode" can also be referred to as "luminance adjustment mode" or "illuminance adjustment mode."

The twenty-fourth embodiment relates to a title display section of a gaming machine.
The title display section will be explained below for the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (24th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (24th embodiment (B)). .

<24th embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Although the description of the 24th embodiment (A) partially overlaps with the 19th embodiment (B) and the 23rd embodiment, it will be explained anew.
FIG. 133 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the 24th embodiment (A), and FIG. 134 shows a part of the title display section 615 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the 24th embodiment (A) on the front FIG. 135 is a block diagram of a Pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

As shown in FIG. 133, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501.
Further, as shown in FIG. 133, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502, and a title display section 615 as a production lamp 541 is provided at the upper front surface of the game board 504.
Furthermore, a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504 and below the title display section 615. In this gaming area, a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 are provided.
Furthermore, a glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502 so as to cover the front surface of the game board 504. As a result, the title display section 615 and the game area provided on the front side of the game board 504 are covered with the glass door 505.

Further, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, a glass plate is located in front of the game board 504. This allows the player to view the title display section 615 and the game area provided on the front side of the game board 504 from the front side of the Pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.
Further, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, a selection switch 544, a production switch 545, etc. are provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, a right frame lamp section 620 as a production lamp 541 is provided on the front right side of the glass door 505, and a left frame lamp section 620 as a production lamp 541 is provided on the front left side of the glass door 505. A lamp section 630 is provided.
The right frame lamp section 620 is a vertically long direction lamp 541 that extends from near the top end to the bottom end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp section 630 runs from near the top end to the bottom end of the front left side of the glass door 505. This is a vertically long production lamp 541 that extends up to the top.
Also, the peripheral portion of the game board 504 on the front surface of the glass door 505, the peripheral portion of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 on the front surface of the glass door 505, and the peripheral portion of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 on the front surface of the glass door 505. Each part has a different color.

Further, the title display section 615 is a production lamp 541 that emits light in the shape of characters, symbols, or the like. Specifically, the title display section 615 emits light in the shape of, for example, characters or symbols indicating the model name of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, or the like.
Furthermore, the title display section 615 is located between the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 (left side of the right frame lamp section 620 and right side of the left frame lamp section 630), and is located at a height of the pachinko gaming machine 500. It is provided above the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, when the player views the Pachinko gaming machine 500 from the front, the title display section 615 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622.
The right frame lamp board 621 is mounted with a light emitting element (also referred to as "light emitting means") for causing the right frame lamp section 620 to emit light, and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected. This is a lamp board, and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front right side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.
Full-color LEDs are equipped with three LEDs: one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light. By adjusting the output of these three LEDs, full color can be expressed. be.
In other words, it is equipped with three light-emitting elements: a light-emitting element that emits red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full color LED.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621 and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505.
The right frame lamp cover 622 is formed in a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and is made of a translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 covers the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621. Therefore, light emitted from the light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 622. As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

Further, a lens portion 670 is provided in the right frame lamp cover 622 at a position facing the right frame lamp board 621. Furthermore, a textured portion 670b is provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 (the surface on the right frame lamp board 621 side). Further, the textured portion 670b is formed by providing a pattern of fine irregularities on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 during injection molding of the lens portion 670. Further, as the uneven pattern forming the textured portion 670b, for example, a pattern with many triangular pyramid-shaped projections, a pattern with many quadrangular pyramid-shaped projections, a pattern with many hemispherical projections, or a pattern with many hemispherical projections, for example. For example, a pattern with a large number of shaped protrusions may be used.

The textured portion 670b provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 functions as a light diffusion portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element.
In this way, by providing the textured portion 670b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 and making the textured portion 670b function as the light diffusing portion 670a, it is possible to make the LED inconspicuous, and also to make the entire lens portion 670 can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.

Note that the light diffusing portion 670a is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 670b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670.
For example, the light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by providing a textured portion 670b on the outer surface of the lens portion 670 (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp board 621). Further, for example, the light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by providing a textured portion 670b on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens portion 670.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by incorporating a light diffusing agent that diffuses light into the resin that constitutes the lens portion 670. Furthermore, examples of the light diffusing agent include silicon fine particles, acrylic fine particles, titanium oxide fine particles, and calcium carbonate fine particles. Furthermore, for example, by varying the content of the light diffusing agent, the light diffusivity can be varied. That is, the light diffusing rate can be increased by increasing the content of the light diffusing agent, or conversely, the light diffusing rate can be decreased by decreasing the content of the light diffusing agent.
Furthermore, for example, the light diffusion section 670a may be formed by disposing a light diffusion sheet (also referred to as a "light diffusion film") that diffuses light between the light emitting element and the lens section 670. Examples of the light diffusion sheet include a resin sheet into which the above-mentioned light diffusion agent is kneaded, a resin sheet with fine irregularities on the surface, and the like.

Note that the light diffusion portion 670a may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 670b and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 670b and a light diffusion sheet. It may be formed by a combination of a diffusing agent and a light diffusing sheet, or furthermore, it may be formed by a combination of a textured portion 670b, a light diffusing agent, and a light diffusing sheet.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the left frame lamp section 630 includes a left frame lamp board 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 631, and the left frame lamp cover 632 is provided with a lens section 670 that guides the light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp board 631 to the front side. The inner surface of the portion 670 is provided with a textured portion 670b that functions as a light diffusion portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the LED. The left frame lamp section 630 is formed symmetrically with the right frame lamp section 620.
Also in the left frame lamp section 630, by providing a textured section 670b that functions as a light diffusion section 670a on the inner surface of the lens section 670, the LED is made inconspicuous and the entire lens section 670 is illuminated uniformly. Furthermore, it is made so that the player does not feel dazzled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the title display section 615 includes a title display base 615c, a title display board 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens section 615d, and a title display cover 615b.
The title display base 615c is a member that serves as the base of the title display section 615. A title display board 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens section 615d, and a title display cover 615b are attached to the front side of the title display base 615c, thereby forming a title display section 615.

The title display board 615a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the title display section 615 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted.
FIG. 134 shows a part of the title display board 615a, and also shows LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the front surface thereof. In this way, LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements are mounted on the front surface of the title display board 615a. Further, all of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

Further, the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display board 615a is made of white ("substantially white" or "similar color" to white).
Thereby, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the title display section 615 from becoming poor. Further, since the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j can be efficiently reflected toward the title display cover 615b, the title display cover 615b can be made to appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 641a to 641j can be clearly seen.

As described in the twenty-third embodiment, the term "substantially white" is a concept that includes "white." In addition, the term "substantially white" is a concept that includes a color that is not completely white but appears to be white.
Furthermore, the term "similar colors" refers to a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors close to the target color. Therefore, the term "similar colors" to white refers to a concept that does not include white, but includes colors close to white.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in Figure 129 of the 23rd embodiment, the range from 0.3 to 0.4 on the x-axis and from 0.3 to 0.4 on the y-axis is the range that an average player would recognize as white, and therefore can be considered the range of "similar colors" to white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the title display board 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with screws 683a to 683b.
Furthermore, when the title display board 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with the screws 683a to 683b, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are exposed on the side where the LEDs 641a to 641j are mounted on the title display board 615a. . In this state, based on the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display board 615a, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are set larger (higher) than the heights of the LEDs 641a to 641j.
That is, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b from the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display board 615a are set larger (higher) than the LEDs 641a to 641j.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j.
Specifically, the LEDs 641a to 641j are plated with silver as a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin-cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are set to be larger than the heights of the LEDs 641a to 641j, based on the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j. Further, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are formed into convex curved shapes. Further, the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are subjected to a surface treatment to reflect light. Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j can be reflected by the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b can be made to appear to shine as if they were light emitting elements, so the title display section 615 can be made to appear to shine brighter.

The light diffusion sheet 615g is for diffusing the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display board 615a. That is, the light diffusion sheet 615g functions as a light diffusion section 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display board 615a. Furthermore, the light diffusing sheet 615g is made of a resin sheet kneaded with a light diffusing agent, a resin sheet with fine irregularities on the surface, or the like.

The lens portion 615d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display board 615a to the title display cover 615b, and is made of a resin having translucency. As shown in FIG. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display board 615a, and a lens portion 615d is arranged in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, a textured portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. The textured portion 615f, together with the light diffusion sheet 615g, functions as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements. The textured portion 615f is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the front surface of the lens portion 615d during injection molding of the lens portion 615d. Further, as the uneven pattern constituting the textured portion 615f, as shown in the enlarged view of part B in FIG. 134, a pattern in which a large number of linear protrusions are provided is formed.
Note that the uneven pattern forming the textured portion 615f is not limited to a pattern with a large number of linear protrusions, but may also include, for example, a pattern with a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern with a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions, etc. , a pattern with a large number of hemispherical protrusions, etc. may be used.

The title display cover 615b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 615a. As shown in FIG. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is disposed in front of the title display board 615a, a lens portion 615d is further disposed in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g, and the title display board 615a, the light diffusion sheet 615g, A title display cover 615b is attached to cover the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, the title display cover 615b has letters, symbols, etc. attached thereto, and these letters, symbols, etc. emit light. Specifically, portions of the title display cover 615b, such as letters and symbols, are made of a resin that is translucent, and portions other than the letters and symbols are made of a resin that is not translucent. . This causes the title display cover 615b to emit light in the shape of characters, symbols, and the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, the light diffusion sheet 615g is disposed between the title display board 615a and the lens portion 615d, and the textured portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. The light diffusion sheet 615g and the textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d function as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j.
As a result, the LEDs 641a to 641j can be made inconspicuous, and the characters and symbols attached to the title display cover 615b can be made to shine uniformly. You can try not to feel that way.

Note that the light diffusing portion 615e may be formed by kneading the above-mentioned light diffusing agent into the resin constituting the lens portion 615d.
Further, the light diffusing portion 615e may be formed by the light diffusing sheet 615g, the textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d, and a light diffusing agent kneaded into the resin constituting the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, without providing the light diffusing sheet 615g, the light diffusing portion 615e may be formed by a textured portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d and a light diffusing agent kneaded into the resin constituting the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, the light diffusing part 615e may be formed by a light diffusing agent kneaded into the light diffusing sheet 615g and the resin constituting the lens part 615d, without providing the textured part 615f on the front surface of the lens part 615d.

Further, in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, a textured section 670b is provided on the inner surface of the lens section 670, and this textured section 670b functions as a light diffusion section 670a.
Furthermore, in the title display section 615, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged between the title display substrate 615a and the lens section 615d, and a textured section 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens section 615d. The textured portion 615f on the front surface of 615d functions as a light diffusing portion 615e.

The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting elements is scattered more easily in the title display section 615 than in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
As a result, the LEDs in the title display section 615 can be made less noticeable than in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, and can be made to appear to shine uniformly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel dazzled.

Further, as described above, the title display section 615 is provided between the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and above the center of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the height direction. When a player looks at the pachinko gaming machine 500 from the front, the title display section 615 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight. Therefore, the light emitted from the title display section 615 is more easily seen by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp section 620 or the left frame lamp section 630.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. This makes it difficult for players to feel dazzled.

In addition, characters, symbols, etc. are displayed on the title display section 615, but if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is low, the LEDs may stand out or the characters, symbols, etc. may not be displayed uniformly. The light may be too bright to see, or the player may feel dazzled. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize characters, symbols, and the like.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. The LEDs are made inconspicuous, the characters and symbols are made to shine evenly, and the players do not feel dazzled, making it easier for the players to recognize the characters and symbols. .

Further, the distance from the title display board 615a and the LEDs 641a to 641j to the lens part 615d in the title display part 615 is set shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and the LEDs to the lens part 670 in the right frame lamp part 620. .
As described above, the title display section 615 is provided at the upper front of the game board 504, and the glass door 505 is attached to cover the title display section 615. That is, the title display section 615 is provided on the back side of the glass door 505, and the player visually recognizes the title display section 615 through the glass door 505.

Therefore, in the title display section 615, since the glass door 505 is arranged in front thereof, it is not possible to increase the distance from the title display board 615a and the LEDs 641a to 641j to the lens section 615d.
Therefore, in the title display section 615, the light diffusion section 615e is configured by the light diffusion sheet 615g and the textured section 615f, thereby making the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e relatively high and making the LED less noticeable. In addition, the characters, symbols, etc. are made to appear uniformly illuminated, and furthermore, the player is less likely to feel dazzled.

On the other hand, the right frame lamp section 620 is provided on the front right side of the glass door 505, and no other structure is provided in front of the right frame lamp section 620 (on the player's side).
Therefore, in the right frame lamp section 620, the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and the LED to the lens section 670 can be relatively long.
Specifically, in the title display section 615, the maximum distance from the title display board 615a to the lens section 615d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j is defined as the distance "M1".
Further, in the right frame lamp section 620, the maximum distance from the right frame lamp board 621 to the lens section 670 in the direction perpendicular to the LED mounting surface is defined as a distance "M2".
The distance "M1" is set shorter than the distance "M2". That is, the distance "M2" is set longer than the distance "M1".

In this way, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 and LED in the right frame lamp part 620 to the lens part 670 to be longer than the distance from the title display board 615a and LED to the lens part 615d in the title display part 615. Even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.
For the left frame lamp part 630, similarly to the right frame lamp part 620, the distance from the left frame lamp board 631 and the LED to the lens part 670 is set to be longer than the distance from the title display board 615a and the LED to the lens part 615d. ing.

In the title display section 615, the title display substrate 615a is formed into a flat plate shape, but the lens section 615d has a curved portion, an inclined portion, etc. The distance to the portion 615d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp part 620, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a flat plate shape, but since the lens part 670 has a curved part, an inclined part, etc., the right frame lamp board 621 The distance from the substrate 615a to the lens section 670 is not constant.
Therefore, the distances are compared between the part where the distance from the title display board 615a to the lens part 615d is the maximum and the part where the distance from the right frame lamp board 621 to the lens part 670 is the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 135, the pachinko game machine 500 includes a power supply board 510, a payout control board 520, a main control board 530, and a sub control board 540.
The power supply board 510 is a board that controls the supply of power based on turning on the power switch 511, and the payout control board 520 is a board that controls the operation of the payout device 524.
Further, the main control board 530 is a board that controls the progress of the game, and the sub control board 540 is a board that controls the output of effects. These control boards are all connected to each other by a harness.

Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like.
Further, a starting port switch 533 and a special symbol display device 531 are electrically connected to the main control board 530.
The main control board 530 also includes a lottery means 555, a symbol control means 556, and a reservation means 557.

The gaming area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports, and a starting port switch 533 for detecting a winning in the starting port 532.
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the lottery result based on a random number obtained by winning a prize in the starting hole 532 by displaying a variable symbol and a static display. .

Furthermore, the lottery unit 555 is a unit that performs a lottery based on a random number obtained when a prize is won in the starting slot 532.
Further, the symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling the variable display and stop display of symbols on the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result by the lottery means 555.
Further, the holding means 556 is a means for holding the random number value obtained in response to the winning in the starting hole 532 until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number value is started.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the starting hole switch 533 is turned on (the winning into the starting hole 532 is detected), the main control board 530 acquires a random number value. Based on the acquired random number value, the lottery means 555 performs a jackpot lottery (a lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a lottery to select a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 531 (stopped symbol)), and a variation lottery. A pattern lottery (a lottery of the time (variable time) for displaying symbols in a variable manner on the special symbol display device 531) is executed. Based on this lottery result, the symbol control means 557 controls the variable display and stop display of the symbols on the special symbol display device 531.

The sub control board 540 is electrically connected to the main control board 530, and is used to determine the contents of the effect based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and to control the output of the determined effect. It is a board.
As shown in FIG. 135, the sub control board 540 includes a selection switch 544, a production switch 545, a production lamp 541 (title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, left frame lamp section 630), a speaker 542, and an image display. A device 543 is electrically connected.
Further, the sub-control board 540 includes a brightness adjustment means 546 and a light emission control means 547.

The selection switch 544 and the effect switch 545 are switches used for effects, etc., and are operated by the player when displaying predetermined information or when making various settings.
Further, the selection switch 544 includes an upward switch 544a, a downward switch 544b, a rightward switch 544c, and a leftward switch 544d.

The title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 as the production lamp 541 are lamps used for production, etc., and light up or blink in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. It is something.
Further, the speaker 542 is used for production, etc., and outputs a predetermined sound effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
Furthermore, the image display device 543 is used for performances and the like, and displays the lottery results etc. by the lottery means 555 as an image.

Further, the brightness adjustment means 546 is for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630, and the light emission control means 547 is for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630. It controls the light emission of the light emitting elements of the lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
The sub control board 540, the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are connected by a harness. The brightness adjustment means 546 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards, and the light emission control means 547 controls the light emission of the LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When the lottery means 555 executes the lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the lottery result to the sub-control board 540. Then, when the sub control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it determines the performance content based on the command, and depending on the determined performance content, the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, the left frame lamp section 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 receives a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a jackpot command indicating that the jackpot has been won to the sub control board 540.
Then, when the sub control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot.
Further, as a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that they have won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery. In particular, since the title display section 615 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the player can easily notice that he or she has won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, it determines the presentation content corresponding to the jackpot, and controls the title display unit 615, right frame lamp unit 620, left frame lamp unit 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543 according to the determined presentation content.
In this case, when the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 are caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the light-emitting control means 547 controls the time for which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615 are lit to be shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are lit.

For example, when causing the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, the light emission control means 547 controls the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section. The light emitting element 630 is controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting element of title display section 615 is controlled to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display section 615 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 easily enters the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 are made to emit light for a long time, the player tends to feel dazzled.

In particular, when performing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 are flashily emitted, so the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 are emitted for a long time. If the light is emitted for a certain period of time, the player will feel dazzled.
Therefore, when performing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, the time period during which the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 are made to emit light is made shorter than the time period during which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are made to emit light. This makes it possible for the player to feel less dazzled.

Note that the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 is made shorter than the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements for the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 only when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot. do not have.
For example, even when executing a performance corresponding to a high probability state (probability variable state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot lottery is higher than that of a normal game, the time period for which the light emitting element of the title display section 615 is made to emit light is set to the right frame lamp section. 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 can be made to emit light.

Further, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot and the sub-control board 540 receives a jackpot command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 to win the jackpot. It may also be blinked in a corresponding pattern. At this time, the light emission control means 547 controls the time for blinking the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to be shorter than the time for blinking the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
For example, the light emission control means 547 controls the right frame lamp part 620 and the left frame lamp part when blinking the light emitting elements of the title display part 615, the right frame lamp part 620, and the left frame lamp part 630 in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot. The light emitting element 630 is controlled to blink for 10 seconds, and the light emitting element of the title display section 615 is controlled to blink for 7 seconds.

Moreover, "blinking" means repeating the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting element.
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 1 second and then turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 1 second and then turned off for 2 seconds. Examples include a pattern in which the light is turned off for 2 seconds, a pattern in which the light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second, and the like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, for example, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and turning on of the starting hole switch 533 is detected, one game starts, and the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 ends. However, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, one game can be ended. Furthermore, in the Pachinko gaming machine 500, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the last game ends without the next game being started, the sub-control board 540 enters the game standby state. It can be controlled to shift to

Further, when transitioning to the game standby state, the sub control means 540 displays a demonstration screen on the image display device 543.
In the game standby state, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light for a longer time than the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. Control.

Thereby, the Pachinko gaming machine 500 can be made more conspicuous, and players can be guided to play the game with the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
Furthermore, it is possible for players and hall clerks to see that the pachinko gaming machine 500 is in a waiting state for playing, even from a distance, and that the pachinko gaming machine 500 is powered on. Store staff can instantly check the information.
Furthermore, the power consumption of the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is set to be larger than that of the title display section 615. Therefore, in the game standby state, the power saving effect is enhanced by making the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 shorter than the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements of the title display section 615. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135, a door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. The door opening switch 522 is a switch that detects opening of the glass door 505, and the frame opening switch 523 is a switch that detects opening of the front frame 502.
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, resulting in a door open error. Further, a door open signal indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, it transmits a door open command indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540.
When the sub control board 540 receives the door open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to turn off.

Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 turns on, resulting in a frame opening error. Furthermore, a frame opening signal indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on is input to the dispensing control board 520 and is further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is on, it transmits a frame opening command indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is on to the sub-control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a frame open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting element of the title display section 615 to be turned off, in the same manner as when a door open command is received.

The title display section 615 is located between the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and is located above the center of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the height direction, so it is easily noticeable. By turning off the light emitting element of the section 615, it is possible to make the players and the hall staff aware that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (not in a normal state).
Note that turning off the light emitting element of the title display section 615 is not limited to when a door opening error occurs or when a frame opening error occurs. For example, the light emitting element of the title display section 615 can be turned off even when the payout device 524 has a payout error that is not normal or when the set value has a set value error that is not normal.

Further, after the last game ends, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without starting the next game, and then the selection switches 544 (up direction switch 544a, down direction switch 544b, When either the right direction switch 544c or the left direction switch 544d) is operated, the sub control board 540 displays a menu screen shown in FIG. 136(1) on the image display device 543.
Similarly, when transitioning to the game standby state and displaying the demo screen on the image display device 543, the selection switch 544 (up direction switch 544a, down direction switch 544b, right direction switch 544c, or left direction switch 544d) 136) is operated, the sub-control board 540 displays the menu screen shown in FIG. 136(1) on the image display device 543.

Furthermore, when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 543, "volume adjustment mode" or "brightness adjustment mode" etc. can be selected by operating the upper switch 544a or the lower switch 544b of the selection switch 544. Become.
Then, when the production switch 545 is operated with the "brightness adjustment mode" selected, the sub-control board 540 shifts to the brightness adjustment mode, and displays the brightness adjustment shown in FIG. 136(2) on the image display device 543. Display the mode screen.

In the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 can be adjusted.
As shown in FIG. 136(2), in this embodiment, in the brightness adjustment mode, the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board The brightness of the LED mounted in 631 can be adjusted.

When the brightness adjustment mode screen is displayed on the image display device 543, select one of the levels from "Level 1" to "Level 5" by operating the right switch 544c or left switch 544d of the selection switch 544. Selectable.
Then, when the effect switch 545 is operated with any level selected, the sub control board 540 fixes the brightness at that level. At this time, the brightness adjustment means 546 controls the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to a brightness corresponding to the determined level.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level of "Level 1" to "Level 5" and the brightness of each LED in the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630.
In FIG. 137, the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 when set to "level 5" is set to "100", and this is used as the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 137 indicates a value relative to the reference value "100" and does not indicate a candela per square meter (cd/m ² ).

As shown in FIG. 137, the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is "100" at the maximum and "20" at the minimum. On the other hand, the maximum brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is "80" and the minimum brightness is "16".
Furthermore, at any level from "Level 1" to "Level 5", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is "20%" lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. is set to .

Furthermore, when changing from "level 5" to "level 4", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "80", which is a decrease of "20%". Similarly, when changing from "level 5" to "level 4", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "64", which is a decrease of "20%".

Furthermore, when changing from "level 5" to "level 3", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "60", which is a decrease of "40%". Similarly, when changing from "level 5" to "level 3", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "48", which is a decrease of "40%".
Further, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "80" to "40", which is a decrease of "50%". Similarly, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "64" to "32", which is a decrease of "50%".

In this way, the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is set lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
Further, the brightness adjustment means 546 is configured to change the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 at the same rate of change.
Note that the brightness of each LED of the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 at each level from "Level 1" to "Level 5" is not limited to the values shown in FIG. 137. . Furthermore, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five levels of "level 1" to "level 5".

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness adjustment means 546 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and the brightness of the LEDs in the title display section 615 at the same rate of change. However, it is not limited to this.
FIG. 138 shows each level of “Level 1” to “Level 5” and each LED of the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship with brightness.

In FIG. 138, similarly to FIG. 137, the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and left frame lamp section 630 when set to "level 5" is set to "100", and this is used as the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 138 also indicates a value relative to the reference value "100", and does not indicate a value indicating candela per square meter (cd/m ² ).

As shown in FIG. 138, the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is "100" at the maximum and "20" at the minimum. On the other hand, the maximum brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is "80" and the minimum brightness is "12".
At "level 5", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is set to a value that is "20%" lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
At "level 4", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is set to a value that is "25%" lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
At "level 3", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is set to a value approximately "27%" lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.

At “Level 2,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “30%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
At “Level 1,” the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a value “40%” lower than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
In this way, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 is set to a lower value than the brightness of the LED of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, and further, it is set so that the rate of decrease in brightness increases as the level becomes lower.

Further, when changing from "level 5" to "level 4", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "80", which is a decrease of "20%".
On the other hand, when changing from "level 5" to "level 4", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "60", which is a decrease of "25%".
Further, when changing from "level 5" to "level 3", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "60", which is a decrease of "40%".
On the other hand, when the luminance of the LED in the title display section 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 3", it changes from "80" to "44", which is a decrease of "45%".

Further, when changing from "level 5" to "level 2", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "40", which is a decrease of "60%".
On the other hand, when changing from "level 5" to "level 2", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "28", which is a decrease of "65%".
Further, when changing from "level 5" to "level 1", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "20", which is a decrease of "80%".
On the other hand, when changing from "level 5" to "level 1", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "12", which is a decrease of "85%".

Further, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "80" to "40", which is a decrease of "50%".
On the other hand, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "60" to "28", which is a decrease of about "53%".
Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 4" to "level 1", it changes from "80" to "20", which is a decrease of "75%".
On the other hand, when changing from "level 4" to "level 1", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "60" to "12", which is a decrease of "80%".

In this way, the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 is set lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630.
Further, when changing the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630, the brightness adjustment means 546 adjusts the rate of change of the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 to the right side. The rate of change in brightness of the LEDs of the frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is configured to be greater than that of the LEDs.
Note that the brightness of each LED of the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 at each level from "Level 1" to "Level 5" is not limited to the values shown in FIG. 138. Further, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five levels of "level 1" to "level 5".

For example, in FIG. 138, the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 at "level 1" is set to "1", and the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 at "level 1" is set to "2". Good too. That is, when changing to "level 1", the brightness of each LED in the title display section 615, right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 may be significantly reduced. In this case, when changing from "level 5" to "level 1", the brightness of the LED in the title display section 615 changes from "80" to "1", which is a decrease of about "99%". Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 1", it changes from "100" to "2", and decreases by "98%".

(2) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the title display section 615 is provided at the upper front of the game board 504 and further back than the glass door 505, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
FIG. 139 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 500A in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
As shown in FIG. 139, for example, a title display section 615 as a production lamp section 541 may be provided on the upper front surface of the glass door 505. That is, the title display section 615 may be formed in a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, for example.
In this case, the player will visually recognize the title display section 615 on the near side of the glass door 505 and above the gaming area of the gaming board 504.

Note that a pachinko gaming machine 500A as a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG. 139 is the same as the twenty-fourth embodiment shown in FIG. This is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 in (A).
Even when the title display section 615 is provided at the upper front surface of the glass door 505, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is determined by the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630. Setting the light diffusion rate higher than that of 670a is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG. 133.

(3) FIG. 140 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 500B in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
As shown in FIG. 140, an upper frame lamp section 610 as a production lamp section 541 is provided at the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and a title display section 615 that emits light in the shape of letters or the like is provided on this upper frame lamp section 610. A peripheral decoration part 616, which is a part other than the title display part 615, may be provided.
In this case, an upper frame lamp section 610 is provided on the near side of the glass door 505 and above the game area of the game board 504, and a title display section 615 is provided in this upper frame lamp section 610. That will happen. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the title display section 615 on the near side of the glass door 505 and above the gaming area of the gaming board 504.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 500B, a modified example of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 140, is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133, except that an upper frame lamp section 610 is provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, and a title display section 615 and a surrounding decorative section 616 are provided within this upper frame lamp section 610.
Furthermore, even when an upper frame lamp section 610 is provided on the upper front part of the glass door 505, and a title display section 615 and a surrounding decorative section 616 are provided within this upper frame lamp section 610, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630, which is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the 24th embodiment (A) shown in Figure 133.

Further, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the peripheral decoration section 616, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 547 is configured to cause the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 616 to emit light in the same pattern and in different patterns. There is.
Further, the light emission control means 547 controls the time during which the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 616 emit light in different patterns. The light is controlled to be emitted for a longer period of time in the same pattern.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 receives a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a jackpot command indicating that the jackpot has been won to the sub control board 540.
In addition, upon receiving the jackpot command, the sub control board 540 determines the production content corresponding to the jackpot, and depending on the determined production content, the upper frame lamp part 610 (title display part 615, peripheral decoration part 616), right The frame lamp unit 620, left frame lamp unit 630, speaker 542, and image display device 543 are controlled.

At this time, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (title display section 615, peripheral decoration section 616), right frame lamp section 620, and left frame lamp section 630 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Execute the performance.
In addition, when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, the light emission control means 547 controls the time during which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (title display section 615, peripheral decoration section 616) emit light. Control is performed so that the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements of the left frame lamp section 630 is shorter than that for emitting light. For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (title display section 615, peripheral decoration section 616) are controlled to emit light for 7 seconds. .

Furthermore, in the case of executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, when causing the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (title display section 615, peripheral decoration section 616) to emit light for 7 seconds, the light emission control means 547 controls, for example, the title The light emitting elements of the display section 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 616 are caused to emit light in the same pattern for 3 seconds and in different patterns for 4 seconds. In this way, the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 616 are caused to emit light in different patterns, while the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 616 are caused to emit light in the same pattern. longer than the time it takes to emit light.

Further, when executing an effect corresponding to a jackpot, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a jackpot. As a pattern corresponding to a jackpot, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that they have won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery. In particular, since the title display section 615 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the player can easily notice that he or she has won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

(3) The right frame lamp section 620, the left frame lamp section 630, and the title display section 615 are not limited to being each composed of one lamp section, but may be composed of a plurality of lamp sections.
Specifically, the right frame lamp section 620 can be configured from three lamp sections: a first right frame lamp section, a second right frame lamp section, and a third right frame lamp section.
Similarly to the right frame lamp section 620, the left frame lamp section 630 is also composed of three lamp sections: a first left frame lamp section, a second left frame lamp section, and a third left frame lamp section. can do.

Furthermore, the title display section 615 can be composed of two lamp sections, a first title display section and a second title display section, for example.
Then, when comparing the first right frame lamp part, the first left frame lamp part, and the first title display part, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part in the first title display part is compared with that of the first right frame lamp part and the first title display part. The light diffusion rate may be set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first left frame lamp section.

(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 can be adjusted by the brightness adjustment means 546.
Regarding this point, as described above, "luminance", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance" can be cited as a measure of brightness, and "luminance adjustment means 546" can be referred to as "luminance adjustment means 546" or "illuminance". adjustment means 546.
The luminous intensity of the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 may be adjustable by the luminous intensity adjusting means 546.
Further, the illuminance adjusting means 546 may be able to adjust the illuminance of the surface irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630.

<24th embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 141 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in the 24th embodiment (B), and FIG. 142 is a front view of the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 in the 24th embodiment (B) as seen from the front side (player side). FIG.
Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the right frame lamp portion 27 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), viewed from the front side (player side).

Furthermore, FIG. 144(1) is a diagram showing the textured part 29f formed on the surface of the lens part 29d included in the title display part 29, and FIG. 144(2) is a diagram showing the lens part 29f included in the right frame lamp part 27. It is a figure which shows the textured part 27f formed on the surface of part 27d.
Further, FIG. 145(1) is a plan cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), and FIG. 146 is a block diagram of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).

As shown in FIG. 141, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front side, and a front door 12 attached to the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening can be opened and closed.
Furthermore, a door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a symbol display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged in parallel is arranged inside the cabinet 13. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged at a position corresponding to above the device 14.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, a transparent display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window 18 is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window 18 from the front side of the slot machine 10.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window 18, there are a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 43. , a selection switch 88, an effect switch 89, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, an image display device 23 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and above the display window 18.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a sub-control board housed in a sub-board case 87 is located at the upper part of the back side of the front door 12 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. 80 are arranged.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a title display section 29 as a presentation lamp 21 is provided on the upper front surface of the front door 12, and a title display section 29 as a presentation lamp 21 is provided on the front right side of the front door 12. A frame lamp part 27 is provided, and a left frame lamp part 28 as a production lamp 21 is provided on the front left side of the front door 12.
The title display section 29 is a horizontally elongated display lamp 21 extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.
Further, the right frame lamp portion 27 is a vertically elongated display lamp 21 extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a vertically elongated display lamp 21 extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12.

Further, the title display section 29 is a production lamp 21 that emits light in the shape of characters, symbols, or the like. Specifically, the title display section 29 emits light in the shape of, for example, characters or symbols indicating the model name of the slot machine 10 or the like.
Furthermore, the title display section 29 is located between the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 (left side of the right frame lamp section 27 and right side of the left frame lamp section 28), and is located at a height of the slot machine 10. It is provided above the center of the direction. As a result, when the player views the slot machine 10 from the front, the title display section 29 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight.
Furthermore, the peripheral portion of the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12, the peripheral portion of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 on the front surface of the front door 12, and the peripheral portion of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 on the front surface of the front door 12. Each part has a different color.

Further, the title display section 29 includes a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
The title display board 29a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the title display section 29 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted on the title display board 29a as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.

The title display cover 29b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 29a, and is attached to the upper front side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the title display cover 29b has letters, symbols, etc. attached thereto, and these letters, symbols, etc. emit light.
Specifically, a lens portion 29d is provided on the title display cover 29b at a position facing the title display board 29a. This lens portion 29d is formed in the shape of a character, symbol, or the like, and is made of a transparent resin. Further, the portions of the title display cover 29b other than the lens portion 29d are made of resin that does not have translucency.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the title display board 29a is irradiated toward the inside of the title display cover 29b, and is transmitted through the lens portion 29d formed in the shape of characters, symbols, etc. , to the outside of the title display cover 29b. Thereby, the title display cover 29b appears to emit light in the shape of characters, symbols, etc.

Furthermore, a textured portion 29f is provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d (the surface on the title display board 29a side). This textured portion 29f functions as a light diffusion portion 29e that diffuses light emitted from an LED as a light emitting element, and a pattern of fine irregularities is formed on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d during injection molding of the lens portion 29d. It is formed by providing. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144(1), the uneven pattern constituting the textured portion 29d is a pattern in which a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions are provided.

In this manner, by providing the textured portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d and allowing the textured portion 29f to function as the light diffusion portion 29e, it is possible to make the LED less noticeable. Moreover, the entire lens portion 29d can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and by extension, characters, symbols, etc. can be made to appear to shine evenly. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled when looking at the characters, symbols, etc. attached to the title display section 29.

Note that the pattern of unevenness constituting the textured portion 29f is not limited to a pattern in which many square pyramid-shaped projections are provided, but also a pattern in which many triangular pyramid-shaped projections are provided, for example, a pattern in which many hemispherical projections are provided. , or a pattern with a large number of striped protrusions.
Further, the light diffusing portion 29e is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d.
For example, the light diffusing portion 29e may be formed by providing a textured portion 29f on the outer surface of the lens portion 29d (the surface opposite to the title display substrate 29a). Further, for example, the light diffusing portion 29e may be formed by providing a textured portion 29f on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens portion 29d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusing part 29e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent that diffuses light into the resin constituting the lens part 29d.
Furthermore, for example, a light diffusing sheet for diffusing light may be arranged between the title display board 29a and the lens part 29d, that is, between the light emitting element and the lens part 29d, to form the light diffusing part 29e. It's okay.

Further, the light diffusing portion 29e may be formed by, for example, a combination of the textured portion 29f and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 29f and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 29f and a light diffusion sheet. , it may be formed by a combination of a light diffusing agent and a light diffusing sheet, or it may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 29f, a light diffusing agent, and a light diffusing sheet.

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, the right frame lamp section 27 includes a right frame lamp base 27c, a right frame lamp board 27a, and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp base 27c is a member that becomes the base of the right frame lamp section 27. A right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b are attached to the front side of this right frame lamp base 27c, thereby forming a right frame lamp section 27.

The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which are mounted light-emitting elements for illuminating the right frame lamp section 27 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting elements is connected, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12 with the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements facing the front side (player side).
143, four LEDs 160a to 160d are mounted as light-emitting elements on the front surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

Furthermore, the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160d on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white ("substantially white" or "similar color" to white).
Thereby, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the right frame lamp portion 27 from becoming bad. Further, since the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, the right frame lamp cover 27b can be made to appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 160a to 160d can be clearly seen.
Note that "substantially white" and "similar color" of white are as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame lamp base 27c with screws 683a to 683c.
Furthermore, when the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right frame lamp base 27c with the screws 683a to 683c, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are on the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c on the right frame lamp base 27a. be exposed to. In this state, based on the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c on the right frame lamp board 27a, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are set larger (higher) than the heights of the LEDs 160a to 160c. .
That is, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c from the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c on the right frame lamp board 27a are set larger (higher) than the LEDs 160a to 160c.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are provided with light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c. The surface is treated to reflect light.
Specifically, silver plating is applied as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the heights of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are set to be larger than the heights of the LEDs 160a to 160c, based on the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c. Further, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are formed into convex curved surfaces. Further, the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are subjected to a surface treatment to reflect light. Thereby, the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c can be reflected by the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c can be made to appear to shine as if they were light emitting elements, so the right frame lamp portion 27 can be made to appear to shine brighter.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
Further, the right frame lamp cover 27b includes a lens portion 27d, an auxiliary lens portion 27g, a decorative portion 27i, and a side wall portion 27h.
The lens portion 27d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a to the front side (player side), and is made of a translucent resin. Further, the lens portion 27d is provided in the right frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right frame lamp board 27a.

The inner surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 27a side) is provided with a textured portion 27f. This textured portion 27f functions as a light diffusion portion 29e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d as light-emitting elements, and is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d during injection molding of the lens portion 27d. In addition, as the uneven pattern that constitutes the textured portion 27d, a pattern with many quadrangular pyramidal protrusions is formed as shown in FIG. 144 (2).

Further, the auxiliary lens section 27g, like the lens section 27d, guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a to the front side (player side), and has transparency. It is made of resin that has The inner surface of the auxiliary lens section 27g is provided with a textured section 27f that functions as a light diffusing section 29e, similar to the lens section 27d.
Furthermore, the decorative portion 27i is provided around the lens portion 27d, and is made of resin that does not have translucency. The surface of the decorative portion 27i is plated with silver.

Further, the side wall portion 27h is a portion that supports the lens portion 27d and the decorative portion 27i, and is formed to protrude forward from a portion corresponding to the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 27a. Further, like the decorative portion 27i, the side wall portion 27h is made of resin that does not have translucency, and the surface of the side wall portion 27h is plated with silver.
Also in the right frame lamp section 27, a textured section 27f is provided on the inner surface of the lens section 27d and the auxiliary lens section 27g, and this textured section 27f functions as a light diffusion section 27e, so that the LED is not noticeable. In addition, the entire lens portion 27d and auxiliary lens portion 27g can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.

Note that the uneven pattern forming the textured portion 27f is not limited to a pattern in which many square pyramid-shaped projections are provided, but also a pattern in which many triangular pyramid-shaped projections are provided, and a pattern in which many hemispherical projections are provided, for example. , or a pattern with a large number of striped protrusions.
Further, the light diffusing portion 27e is not limited to being formed by providing the textured portion 27f on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d.
For example, the light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by providing a textured portion 29f on the outer surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp board 27a). Further, for example, the light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by providing a textured portion 27f on both the inner and outer surfaces of the lens portion 27d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusing part 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent that diffuses light into the resin constituting the lens part 27d.
Further, for example, a light diffusing sheet for diffusing light is arranged between the right frame lamp board 27a and the lens part 27d, that is, between the light emitting element and the lens part 27d, thereby forming the light diffusing part 27e. You may.
Further, the light diffusing portion 27e may be formed, for example, by a combination of the textured portion 27f and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 27f and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 27f and a light diffusion sheet. , it may be formed by a combination of a light diffusing agent and a light diffusing sheet, or it may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 27f, a light diffusing agent, and a light diffusing sheet.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a, and the left frame lamp cover 28b is provided with a lens portion 28d that guides the light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp board 28a to the front side. The inner surface of the portion 28d is provided with a textured portion 28f that functions as a light diffusion portion 28e that diffuses the light emitted from the LED. The left frame lamp section 28 is formed in a shape that is laterally symmetrical to the right frame lamp section 27.
Also in the left frame lamp section 28, by providing a textured section 28f that functions as a light diffusion section 28e on the inner surface of the lens section 28d, the LED is made inconspicuous and the entire lens section 28d is illuminated uniformly. Furthermore, it is made so that the player does not feel dazzled.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 144(1) and (2), the textured portion 29f as the light diffusion portion 29e formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 is the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. The uneven pattern is set more finely than the textured part 27f as the light diffusing part 27e formed on the surface.
Furthermore, the textured portion 28f as the light diffusion portion 28e formed on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 is similar to the textured portion 28f as the light diffusion portion 27e formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. This is similar to the processed portion 27f.

As a result, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28. has been done. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting elements is more easily scattered in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28.
Therefore, in the title display part 29, the LEDs can be made less noticeable than in the right frame lamp part 27 and the left frame lamp part 28, and the LEDs can be made to appear uniformly lit. This can make it difficult for people to feel dazzled.

Further, as described above, the title display section 29 is provided between the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, above the center of the slot machine 10 in the height direction, and is arranged above the center of the slot machine 10 in the height direction. When the player looks at the slot machine 10 from the front, the title display section 29 is located slightly above the player's line of sight. Therefore, the light emitted from the title display section 29 is more easily seen by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp section 27 or the left frame lamp section 28.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 29e in the title display part 29 is changed to the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 27e in the right frame lamp part 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 28e in the left frame lamp part 28. The brightness is set higher than the brightness rate to make it difficult for players to feel dazzled.

Furthermore, although characters, symbols, etc. are displayed on the title display section 29, if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is low, the LEDs may stand out, or the characters, symbols, etc. may not be displayed uniformly. The light may be too bright to see, or the player may feel dazzled. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize characters, symbols, and the like.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 29e in the title display part 29 is changed to the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 27e in the right frame lamp part 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part 28e in the left frame lamp part 28. It is set higher than the rate. As a result, the characters, symbols, etc. appear to shine uniformly, making it easier for the player to recognize the characters, symbols, etc.

Further, the distance from the title display board 29a and the LED to the lens part 29d in the title display part 29 is set shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a and LED to the lens part 27d in the right frame lamp part 27.
Specifically, in the title display section 29, the maximum distance from the title display board 29a to the lens section 29d in the direction perpendicular to the LED mounting surface is defined as the distance "M3".
Further, in the right frame lamp section 27, the maximum distance from the right frame lamp board 27a to the lens section 27d in the direction perpendicular to the LED mounting surface is defined as a distance "M4".
The distance "M3" is set shorter than the distance "M4". That is, the distance "M4" is set longer than the distance "M3".

In this way, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a and LED to the lens section 27d in the right frame lamp section 27 longer than the distance from the title display board 29a and LED to the lens section 29d in the title display section 29, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29.
As with the right frame lamp unit 27, the distance from the left frame lamp board 28a and LEDs to the lens unit 28d of the left frame lamp unit 28 is set to be longer than the distance from the title display board 29a and LEDs to the lens unit 29d.

In the title display section 29, the title display substrate 29a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens section 29d has a curved portion, an inclined portion, etc. The distance to the portion 29d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp part 27, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens part 27d has a curved part, an inclined part, etc. The distance from the substrate 27a to the lens portion 27d is not constant.
Therefore, the distances are compared between the part where the distance from the title display board 29a to the lens part 29d is the maximum and the part where the distance from the right frame lamp board 27a to the lens part 27d is the maximum.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in FIG. 145(1), the left frame lamp part 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a on which the LED 160 is mounted, and a left frame lamp part 28 that covers the mounting surface of the LED 160 on the left frame lamp board 28a. A frame lamp cover 28b is provided.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 28b includes a lens portion 28d and a side wall portion 28h.
The lens portion 28d guides the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a to the front side (player side), and is made of a resin having translucent properties. Further, the lens portion 28d is provided in the left frame lamp cover 28b at a position facing the left frame lamp board 28a.

The side wall portion 28h is a portion that supports the lens portion 28d, and is formed to protrude forward from a portion corresponding to the outer peripheral edge of the left frame lamp board 28a. Further, the side wall portion 28h is made of resin that does not have translucency.
Since the side wall portion 28h is made of a resin that does not have a light-transmitting property, and the lens portion 28d is made of a resin that has a light-transmitting property, the light is emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a. The light is not transmitted to the outside of the left frame lamp cover 28b from the side wall portion 28h close to the left frame lamp board 28a, but is transmitted to the outside of the left frame lamp cover 28b from the lens portion 28d far from the left frame lamp board 28a.

Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented from traveling in the direction of the display window 18 provided at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, so that the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented from proceeding in the direction of the display window 18 provided at the center of the front surface of the front door 12. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the display window 18 from being reflected by the display window 18 and making the display window 18 difficult to see.

Note that, as shown in Modification 1 of section A in FIG. 145(2), the side wall portion 28h may be provided only on the right side (display window 18 side). Even in this case, the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented from traveling toward the display window 18, and the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from becoming difficult to see due to the reflected light on the display window 18.

In addition, as shown in Modification 2 of part A in FIG. 145(3), for example, the shape of the lens portion 28d in the plan cross-sectional view is made triangular, and the surface on the right side (display window 18 side) of the lens portion 28d and the display The angle formed by the window 18 may be set to be an obtuse angle. Even in this case, the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented. The display window 18 can be prevented from becoming difficult to see due to the emitted light.

Furthermore, although not shown, the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 may be provided at a position further back than the display window 18 (on the opposite side from the player). That is, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp part 27 and the left frame lamp part 28 may be shifted (offset) to the back side from the position of the display window 18. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from becoming difficult to see due to the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a.

Furthermore, although not shown, the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 may be provided at a position closer to the front side (on the player side) than the display window 18, contrary to the case described above. That is, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp part 27 and the left frame lamp part 28 may be shifted (offset) to the front side from the position of the display window 18. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a from traveling in the direction of the display window 18. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from becoming difficult to see due to the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a.

As shown in FIG. 146, the slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. In addition, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, symbol display device 14, sub control board 80, etc. via the input port 51 or the output port 52. It is connected. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning combination lottery means 61, a reel control means 65, a winning determination means 66, a payout means 67, and the like.

When the bet switch 40 is operated, the credited medals are bet. Furthermore, when medals are inserted through the medal slot 47, the inserted medals are bet. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, the main control board 50 performs a lottery with the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 with the reel control means 65. Then, all the reels 31 are rotated.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and controls the motor 32 to correspond to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. The reel 31 is stopped.
Then, the game result is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line, the winning determination means 66 determines that the winning combination has been won, and the payout means 67 disburses medals corresponding to the won winning combination. conduct.

The sub control board 80 controls the output of the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the selection switch 88, the production switch 89, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. has been done. Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes a performance output control means 91, a brightness adjustment means 92, a light emission control means 93, and the like.

The selection switch 88 and the effect switch 89 are switches used for effects and the like, and are operated when the player wants to display specific information or when making various settings.
Furthermore, the selection switch 88 includes an up switch 88a, a down switch 88b, a right switch 88c, and a left switch 88d.

The brightness adjustment means 92 is for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28, and the light emission control means 93 is for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 27 and the light emitting elements of the left frame lamp section 28.
The sub control board 80, the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by a harness. The brightness adjustment means 92 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards, and the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When the winning lottery means 61 performs a lottery, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the effect output control means 91 determines an effect pattern based on the received command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the title display board 29a according to the determination. , controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special winning combination is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a special winning combination command indicating that fact to the sub control board 80.
Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the special winning command, the production output control means 91 determines the production pattern corresponding to the special winning combination based on the special winning command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the title according to the determination. The light emitting elements of the display substrate 29a are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the special winning combination.

In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special prize, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that he has won the special winning combination. In particular, since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the player can easily notice that he or she has won the special winning combination.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special winning command, the production output control means 91 determines a production pattern corresponding to the special winning combination based on the special winning command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the title according to the determination. The light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a is controlled. At this time, the light emission control means 93 makes the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a shorter than the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. control.

For example, when causing the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a production pattern corresponding to a special winning combination, the light emission control means 93 controls the right frame lamp board The light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting element mounted on the title display board 29a is controlled to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 easily enters the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are made to emit light for a long time, the player tends to feel dazzled.

In particular, when performing a performance corresponding to a special role, the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit flashy light, so the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are If the light is emitted for a long time, the player will feel dazzled.
Therefore, when performing the performance corresponding to the special winning combination, the time period for which the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are made to emit light is made shorter than the time period during which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit light. This makes it possible for the player to feel less dazzled.

Note that the reason why the time period for which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 emit light is made shorter than the time period during which the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit light is when executing the production corresponding to the special winning combination. Not exclusively.
For example, even if you win a lottery to determine whether or not to execute AT and decide to execute AT, the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 will be made to emit light in rainbow colors, and the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 will be made to emit light in rainbow colors. The time for emitting light can be made shorter than the time for emitting light from the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28.

Further, when the winning number corresponding to the special winning combination is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the sub control board 80 receives the special winning command, the light emission control means 93 controls the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and The light emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a (the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28) may be made to blink in a pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. At this time, the light emission control means 93 makes the time for blinking the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a shorter than the time for blinking the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. control.

For example, when the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are caused to flash in a performance pattern corresponding to a special role, the light emitting control means 93 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a to flash for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a to flash for 7 seconds.

Moreover, "blinking" means repeating the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting element, as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 1 second and then turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern in which a light emitting element is turned on for 1 second and then turned off for 2 seconds. Examples include a pattern in which the light is turned off for 2 seconds, a pattern in which the light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second, and the like.

Further, in the slot machine 10, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, one game is started, all reels 31 are stopped, and the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not there is a winning. When this determination is made and the payout means 67 performs the medal payout process, one game can be concluded.
Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any medals being bet after the last game was completed, the sub-control board 80 causes the sub-control board 80 to shift to a game standby state. It can be controlled as follows.

Specifically, when the game ends, the main control board 50 sends a game end command to the sub control board 80 to indicate the end of the game. Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the game end command, the sub control board 80 shifts to a game standby state and switches the display on the image display device 23 from the game screen to the demo screen. .
In the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 changes the light emission pattern of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, right frame lamp section 27, and left frame lamp section 28 from the light emission pattern of the game state to the light emission pattern of the game standby state. Move to pattern. Specifically, in the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 to emit light for a longer time than the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 to emit light. control to do so. Thereby, the slot machine 10 can be made more conspicuous, and players can be guided to play games on the slot machine 10.

Note that when medals are inserted from the medal slot 47 and a bet is made, or when the bet switch 40 is operated and credited medals are bet, the main control board 50 sub-submits a bet command indicating that. It is transmitted to the control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives a bet command in the game standby state, it ends the game standby state and switches the display on the image display device 23 from the demo screen to the game screen. Further, the light emission control means 93 switches the light emission pattern of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 from the light emission pattern in the game standby state to the light emission pattern in the game state.

Further, errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include, for example, a medal jamming (retention) error in the hopper 35, an empty medal error in the hopper 35, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35, a medal retention error in the medal selector, and a medal retention error in the medal selector. , an error in the passage sensor 46 located inside the medal selector, an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located inside the medal selector, an abnormal medal insertion error, a full sub-tank, an opening of the front door 12, etc. Can be mentioned.

When the main control board 50 detects the occurrence of an error, it sends an error command to the sub-control board 80 to indicate the error. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 to turn off.
The title display section 29 is located between the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and is located above the center of the slot machine 10 in the height direction, making it easily noticeable. By turning off the light emitting element 29, it is possible to make the players and the hall staff aware that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 (that it is not in a normal state).

In addition, in the slot machine 10, after the end of the last game, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without medals being bet, and then the selection switches 88 (upward switch 88a, downward switch 88b, right When either the direction switch 88c or the left direction switch 88d) is operated, the sub-control board 80 displays a menu screen on the image display device 23 similar to the example of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. 136(1). Display.
Furthermore, when the selection switch 88 (either the upward switch 88a, the downward switch 88b, the right switch 88c, or the left switch 88d) is operated in the game standby state, the sub-control board 80 controls the image A menu screen similar to the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. 136(1) is displayed on the display device 23.

When the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 23, by operating the upper switch 88a or the lower switch 88b of the selection switch 88, "volume adjustment mode", "brightness adjustment mode", etc. can be selected.
Then, when the production switch 89 is operated with the "brightness adjustment mode" selected, the sub-control board 80 shifts to the brightness adjustment mode and displays the pachinko game shown in FIG. 136(2) on the image display device 543. A brightness adjustment mode screen similar to the example in machine 500 is displayed.

In the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a can be adjusted.
In this embodiment, similar to the example of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. 136(2), the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left The brightness of the LED mounted on the frame lamp board 28a can be adjusted.

When the brightness adjustment mode screen is displayed on the image display device 23, select one of the levels from "Level 1" to "Level 5" by operating the right direction switch 88c or left direction switch 88d of the selection switch 88. Selectable.
When the production switch 89 is operated with any level selected, the sub-control board 80 fixes the brightness at that level. At this time, the brightness adjustment means 92 controls the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to a brightness corresponding to the determined level.

In this embodiment, as in the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. 137, the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 is "100" at the maximum and "20" at the minimum. It is. On the other hand, the maximum brightness of the LED of the title display section 29 is "80" and the minimum brightness is "16".
The brightness of the LED in the title display section 29 is set lower than the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, as in the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. be.
Further, the brightness adjustment means 92 is configured to change the brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and the brightness of the LEDs in the title display section 29 at the same rate of change. This is also the same as the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness adjustment means 92 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and the brightness of the LEDs of the title display section 29 at the same rate of change. However, it is not limited to this.
Similar to the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. The rate of change in brightness may be made greater than the rate of change in brightness of the LEDs in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28.

(2) FIG. 147 is a front view of the slot machine 10A in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).
As shown in FIG. 147, an upper frame lamp section 26 as a production lamp section 21 is provided at the upper front surface of the front door 12, and a title display section 29 that emits light in the shape of letters or the like is provided on this upper frame lamp section 26. A peripheral decoration part 26d, which is a part other than the title display part 29, may be provided.
Note that a slot machine 10A according to a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. The slot machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 141 is the same as the slot machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 141 except that the slot machine 10 is provided with a peripheral decoration part 26d.

Also in the slot machine 10A of the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. The diffusion rate and the setting higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28 are similar to the slot machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 141.

Further, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the peripheral decoration section 26d, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 93 is configured to cause the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d to emit light in the same pattern and in different patterns. There is.
Further, the light emission control means 93 controls the time during which the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d emit light in different patterns. The light is controlled to be emitted for a longer period of time in the same pattern.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special winning combination is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a special winning combination command indicating that fact to the sub control board 80.
Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the special winning command, the production output control means 91 determines the production pattern corresponding to the special winning combination based on the special winning command, and the light emission control means 93 controls the performance pattern according to the determination. Light emission of the light emitting elements of the frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d), right frame lamp section 27, and left frame lamp section 28 is controlled.

At this time, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d), right frame lamp section 27, and left frame lamp section 28 in a pattern corresponding to the special prize. Execute a light-emitting effect.
In addition, when executing the performance corresponding to the special role, the light emission control means 93 controls the time period during which the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) emit light. And the time period for which the light emitting elements of the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit light is controlled to be shorter than that for emitting light. For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) are controlled to emit light for 7 seconds. .

Furthermore, when executing a performance corresponding to a special role, when the light-emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (title display section 29, peripheral decoration section 26d) are illuminated for 7 seconds, the light-emitting control means 93, for example, causes the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d to illuminate in the same pattern for 3 seconds and then in a different pattern for 4 seconds. In this way, the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d are illuminated in different patterns is made longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display section 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration section 26d are illuminated in the same pattern.

Further, when executing a performance corresponding to a special winning combination, the light emission control means 93 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. As a pattern corresponding to the special winning combination, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that he has won the special winning combination. In particular, since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the player's line of sight, the player can easily notice that he or she has won the special winning combination.

(3) The right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29 are not limited to being each composed of one lamp section, but may be composed of a plurality of lamp sections.
Specifically, the right frame lamp section 27 can be configured from three lamp sections: a first right frame lamp section, a second right frame lamp section, and a third right frame lamp section.
Similarly to the right frame lamp part 27, the left frame lamp part 28 is also composed of three lamp parts, for example, a first left frame lamp part, a second left frame lamp part, and a third left frame lamp part. can do.

Furthermore, the title display section 29 can be composed of two lamp sections, a first title display section and a second title display section, for example.
Then, when comparing the first right frame lamp part, the first left frame lamp part, and the first title display part, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part in the first title display part is compared with that of the first right frame lamp part and the first title display part. The light diffusion rate may be set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first left frame lamp section.

(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the textured portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 is more uneven than the textured portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. Although the pattern has been set in detail, it is not limited to this.
FIG. 148(1) shows a textured portion 29f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 and a textured portion 27f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the spreading|diffusion part 27e).

In FIG. 148(1), the protrusion on the right side is one of the many protrusions forming the textured part 29f formed on the lens part 29d of the title display part 29, and the protrusion on the left side is the protrusion on the right frame lamp part 27. One of the many protrusions forming the textured portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d is shown.
In the example of FIG. 148(1), the protrusions forming the textured part 29f of the title display section 29 and the protrusions forming the textured part 27f of the right frame lamp part 27 are both formed in a dome shape. .
In the example of FIG. 148(1), the area of the bottom of the dome-shaped protrusion forming the textured part 29f of the title display section 29 and the area of the dome-shaped protrusion forming the textured part 27f of the right frame lamp part 27 are The area of the bottom of is set to be the same.

In the example of FIG. 148(1), the height of the dome-shaped protrusion forming the textured part 29f of the title display section 29 is the same as that of the dome-shaped protrusion forming the textured part 27f of the right frame lamp part 27. It is set higher than the height.
As a result, the radius of the curved surface on which the light emitted from the LED is incident can be made smaller in the title display part 29 than in the right frame lamp part 27, so that the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part can be increased. can.

FIG. 148(2) shows a textured portion 29f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 and a textured portion 27f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of a spreading|diffusion part 27e).
In FIG. 148(2), the protrusion on the right side is one of the many protrusions forming the textured part 29f formed on the lens part 29d of the title display part 29, and the protrusion on the left side is the protrusion on the right frame lamp part 27. One of the many protrusions forming the textured portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d is shown.

In the example of FIG. 148(2), the protrusions forming the textured portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the protrusions forming the textured portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are both formed in the shape of a square pyramid. There is.
In the example of FIG. 148(2), the area of the bottom of the square pyramidal protrusion forming the textured part 29f of the title display section 29, and the area of the bottom of the square pyramidal protrusion forming the textured part 27f of the right frame lamp part 27 are The areas of the bottoms of the protrusions are set to be the same.

In the example of FIG. 148(2), the height of the square pyramid-shaped protrusion forming the textured part 29f of the title display section 29 is the same as that of the square pyramid-shaped projection forming the textured part 27f of the right frame lamp part 27. It is set higher than the height of the protrusion.
As a result, the angle between the light emitted from the LED and the incident surface of the light can be made smaller in the title display part 29 than in the right frame lamp part 27, so that the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part can be reduced. It can be made higher.
In this way, by setting the bottom areas of the protrusions constituting the textured portions to be the same in the title display portion 29 and the right frame lamp portion 27, the heights of the protrusions constituting the textured portions are made different. , the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section can be made different.

(5) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 can be adjusted by the brightness adjustment means 92.
Regarding this point, as described above, "luminance", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance" can be cited as measures representing brightness, and "luminance adjustment means 92" can be referred to as "luminance adjustment means 92" or "illuminance". "adjusting means 92".
The luminous intensity of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 may be adjustable by the luminous intensity adjusting means 92.
Further, the illuminance adjusting means 92 may be able to adjust the illuminance of the surface irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28.

(6) As described in the 24th embodiment (B), the right frame lamp section 27 includes the right frame lamp board 27a and the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp section 28 includes the left frame lamp board 27a. 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display section 29 includes a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
Similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements (LEDs) on the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a are painted white ("substantially white" or "similar color" to white). ).

Thereby, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the right frame lamp section 27, left frame lamp section 28, and title display section 29 from becoming poor. Further, since the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, the left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display cover 29b, The frame lamp cover 28b and the title display cover 29b can be made to appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, the color of the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
Note that "substantially white" and "similar color" of white are as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

Also, for example, the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 can be set larger than the title display section 29, and the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a can be set larger (wider) than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the title display board 29a.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a can each be fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683).
Furthermore, the number of fixing members for fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to a predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the left frame lamp board 28a to a predetermined mounting position can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the title display board 29a to a predetermined mounting position.

Furthermore, when the right frame lamp board 27a is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface of the light emitting element of the right frame lamp board 27a. In this state, the height of the head of the fixing member is set to be larger (higher) than the height of the light emitting element, based on the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a. That is, the height of the head of the fixing member from the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is set larger (higher) than the light emitting element.

Furthermore, the head of the fixing member is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element. . Specifically, silver plating is applied as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting element. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

Similarly to the right frame lamp board 29a, when the left frame lamp board 28a and the title display board 29a are fixed at predetermined mounting positions with the fixing members, the heads of the fixing members are exposed on the side where the light emitting elements are mounted. do it like this. Furthermore, the height of the head of the fixing member is set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with respect to the mounting surface of the light emitting element. Furthermore, the head of the fixing member is formed into a convex curved surface, and the surface of the head of the fixing member is subjected to a surface treatment to reflect light.

In this way, the height of the head of the fixing member is set to be larger than the height of the light emitting element, with the mounting surface of the light emitting element as a reference, and the head of the fixing member is formed into a convex curved shape. By applying a light-reflecting surface treatment to the surface, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reflected at the head of the fixing member. As a result, the head of the fixing member can be made to appear to shine as if it were a light emitting element, so that the right frame lamp section 27, left frame lamp section 28, and title display section 29 can be made to appear to shine brighter. It can be done.

Further, the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a is set to be larger than that of the title display board 29a. Furthermore, the number of fixing members for fixing the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a at predetermined mounting positions is set to be larger than that of the title display board 29a.
That is, for the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a whose total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements is larger than the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing them at predetermined mounting positions is determined from the title display board 29a. Set many.

As a result, although the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a is larger than that of the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing them at predetermined mounting positions is smaller than that of the title display board. 29a, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected.

Furthermore, as explained in the 24th embodiment (B), the embossed portion 29f (light diffusing portion 29e) formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 has a finer uneven pattern than the embossed portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27.
Furthermore, a textured portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) similar to the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 is formed on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28.

As a result, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 29e in the title display section 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 27e in the right frame lamp section 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 28e in the left frame lamp section 28. has been done.
Therefore, light emitted from the light emitting elements is more likely to be scattered in the title display part 29 than in the right frame lamp part 27 and the left frame lamp part 28, so that the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a and the title The head of the fixing member for fixing the display board 29a can be made less noticeable, and the entire lens part 29d can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and furthermore, the player can avoid being dazzled. It can be made less noticeable.

In addition, as described in the 24th embodiment (B), the light emission control means 93 controls when the special prize is won (the sub control board 80 receives the special prize command) or when the AT lottery is won (the AT is selected). When it is decided to execute the game) or when the game enters the standby state, the right frame lamp part 27 (the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) and the left frame lamp part 28 (the left frame lamp board 28a) The mounted light emitting element) and the title display section 29 (the light emitting element mounted on the title display board 29a) emit light or blink in different patterns.
Thereby, the patterns of effects using the right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29 can be diversified.

Further, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be formed of substantially the same resin.
"Substantially the same" is a concept that includes things that are approximately the same but not completely the same due to manufacturing errors, and things that are not completely the same but appear to be the same visually. Moreover, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same".
In this way, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 are formed of substantially the same resin. Since the resin raw materials used for the process can be shared, the effort of managing the resin raw materials can be reduced.

Further, the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be formed of a resin that is colored (for example, red or blue) and has translucency.
Furthermore, a part of the lens part 27d of the right frame lamp part 27 and the lens part 28d of the left frame lamp part 28 are formed of transparent resin, and the other part is formed with the lens part 29d of the title display part 29. They can be formed from resins having substantially the same color and translucency.

Specifically, a part of the lens part 27d of the right-frame lamp part 27 and the lens part 28d of the left-frame lamp part 28 is made of transparent resin, and the other parts are made of a transparent resin, for example, in blue. It can be formed from a resin that has
The light emitting control means 93 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a, so that the light emitting elements disposed at positions corresponding to the parts formed of transparent resin also emit blue light. The light emitting elements arranged at positions corresponding to the resin parts can also be controlled so that they all emit light or blink in the same color.

At this time, the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a all emit light or blink in the same color, but are arranged at positions corresponding to the parts formed of transparent resin. The light emitting element and the light emitting element disposed at the position corresponding to the part formed of blue resin can appear to emit light or blink in different colors.
Thereby, it is possible to diversify the patterns of effects using the right frame lamp section 27, the left frame lamp section 28, and the title display section 29.

Moreover, contrary to the above-mentioned case, the lens part 27d of the right frame lamp part 27 and the lens part 28d of the left frame lamp part 28 are formed of a colored and translucent resin, and the lens part of the title display part 29 Regarding 29d, a part is made of transparent resin, and the other part is made of a transparent resin with substantially the same color as the lens part 27d of the right frame lamp part 27 and the lens part 28d of the left frame lamp part 28. It may be formed by
Furthermore, a part of the lens part 27d of the right frame lamp part 27, the lens part 28d of the left frame lamp part 28, and the lens part 29d of the title display part 29 are all made of transparent resin, and the other parts are made of transparent resin. , it may be formed from a colored resin having translucency.

Further, for example, regarding the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 27d may be formed to cover the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a.
Furthermore, for example, it is possible to provide a textured portion 27f on the entire inner surface (surface on the right frame lamp board 27a side) of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, and to make the textured portion 27f function as the light diffusion portion 27e. can. The light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent into the resin constituting the lens portion 27d.

Also, regarding the left frame lamp part 28, similarly to the right frame lamp part 27, a lens part 28d is formed so as to cover the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 28a, and the inner surface of this lens part 28d is A textured portion 28f can be provided on the entire surface to form a light diffusing portion 28e.
Furthermore, regarding the title display section 29, similarly to the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, a lens section 29d is formed so as to cover the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the title display board 29a. A textured portion 29f can be provided on the entire inner surface of the portion 29d to form a light diffusing portion 29e.

In this way, regarding the right frame lamp part 27, by covering the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a with the lens part 27d and providing the light diffusion part 27e on the entire surface of the lens part 27d, the right frame lamp In order to fix the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the right frame lamp board 27a, both when the part 27 is viewed from the front (right frame lamp board 27a through the lens part 27d) and when viewed from the side. Since the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member (screw 683) and the like can be made inconspicuous, it is possible to prevent the design from being impaired.
Furthermore, the same effect as described above for the right frame lamp section 27 can be obtained for the left frame lamp section 28 and the title display section 29 as well.

Further, the right frame lamp section 27 can be configured from three lamp sections, for example, a first right frame lamp section, a second right frame lamp section, and a third right frame lamp section.
Furthermore, similarly to the right frame lamp part 27, the left frame lamp part 28 also includes three lamp parts, for example, a first left frame lamp part, a second left frame lamp part, and a third left frame lamp part. Can be configured.
Furthermore, regarding the title display section 29, similarly to the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28, for example, three lamp sections, a first title display section, a second title display section, and a third title display section, are arranged. It can be constructed from.

The first right frame lamp section includes a first right frame lamp board on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted, and the first left frame lamp section includes a first left frame lamp board on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted. The first title display section includes a first title display substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted.
The mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the first right-frame lamp board, the first left-frame lamp board, and the first title display board can be made of white ("substantially white" or "similar color" to white).

In addition, the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first right frame lamp board and the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first left frame lamp board are the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first title display board. Can be set larger.
Furthermore, the first right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, and the first title display board are each fixed at predetermined mounting positions with fixing members (screws 683), and the first right frame lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position. The number of fixing members for fixing to a predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp board to a predetermined mounting position are determined by fixing the first title display board to a predetermined mounting position. The number of fixing members can be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for

Furthermore, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member (screw head 689) is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board, and at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set greater than the height of the light-emitting element based on the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the first right frame lamp board.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

Similarly to the first right frame lamp board, when the first left frame lamp board and the first title display board are fixed at the predetermined mounting position with the fixing member, the head of the fixing member is on the side where the light emitting element is mounted. At this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element. Further, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved surface, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment to reflect light.

As described above, regarding the first right frame lamp section forming the right frame lamp section 27, the first left frame lamp section forming the left frame lamp section 28, and the first title display section forming the title display section 29, The total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the first right-frame lamp board and the first left-frame lamp board can be set to be larger than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements of the first title display board.
The number of fixing members for fixing the first right frame lamp board and the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp board are the number of fixing members for fixing the first title display board. More can be set.
As a result, although the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements of the first right-frame lamp board and the first left-frame lamp board is larger than that of the first title display board, the number of fixing members for fixing them at predetermined mounting positions is reduced. Since the number is larger than that of the first title display substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting elements can be efficiently reflected.

That is, there is a first lamp board on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted, and a second lamp board on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted and the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements is set larger than that of the first lamp board. and a lamp board.
Furthermore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the first lamp board and the second lamp board can be configured in white ("substantially white" or "similar color" to white).
Further, each of the first lamp board and the second lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, and the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board at a predetermined mounting position is larger than the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board at a predetermined mounting position. , the number of fixing members for fixing the second lamp board at a predetermined mounting position can be set to be larger.

Further, when the first lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with the fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed to the side on which the light emitting element is mounted on the first lamp board, and at this time, The height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the first lamp board.
Similarly to the first lamp board, when the second lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is on the side where the light emitting element is mounted on the second lamp board. At this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the second lamp board.

Furthermore, for both the first lamp substrate and the second lamp substrate, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light emitted from the light-emitting element.
This makes it possible to make the head of the fixing member appear to glow like a light-emitting element, so that the first lamp section having the first lamp substrate and the second lamp section having the second lamp substrate appear to glow more brightly.
In addition, since the second lamp board has a greater number of fixing members for fixing it to a predetermined mounting position than the first lamp board, the light emitted from the light-emitting element can be reflected more efficiently.

Further, contrary to the above case, the second lamp substrate includes a first lamp substrate and a second lamp substrate whose total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements is set larger than that of the first lamp substrate. The number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp board at a predetermined mounting position may be set to be greater than the number of fixing members for fixing the board at a predetermined mounting position.
Since the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first lamp board is set smaller than that of the second lamp board, it is difficult to mount more light emitting elements on the first lamp board than on the second lamp board. Since the number of fixing members for fixing the light emitting element in the position is larger than that of the second lamp board, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reflected by the heads of many of the fixing members. The light reflected from the head of the fixing member can compensate for the small number of fixing members.

Further, the right frame lamp board 27a can be configured from three substrates, for example, a first right frame lamp board, a second right frame lamp board, and a third right frame lamp board.
Similarly, the left frame lamp board 28a can be configured from three substrates, for example, a first left frame lamp board, a second left frame lamp board, and a third left frame lamp board.
Further, the title display board 29a can be configured from two boards, a first title display board and a second title display board, for example.

That is, the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a are not limited to being composed of a single lamp board, but may be composed of a plurality of lamp boards.
The mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements on the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, the third right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, the third left frame lamp board, the first title display board, and the second title display board can be configured in white ("approximately white" or a "color similar to" white).

In addition, the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the first right frame lamp board, the second right frame lamp board, and the third right frame lamp board, and the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, and the third right frame lamp board The total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the third left frame lamp board can be set larger than the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first title display board and the second title display board.
Furthermore, a first right frame lamp board, a second right frame lamp board, a third right frame lamp board, a first left frame lamp board, a second left frame lamp board, a third left frame lamp board, a first title display board, and the second title display board are respectively fixed at predetermined mounting positions with fixing members (screws 683).
The total number of fixing members for fixing the first right lamp board, the second right lamp board, and the third right lamp board at predetermined mounting positions, and the number of fixing members for fixing the first right lamp board, the second right lamp board, and the second left lamp board. The total number of fixing members for fixing the frame lamp board and the third left frame lamp board at predetermined mounting positions is the same as the total number of fixing members for fixing the first title display board and the second title display board at predetermined mounting positions. The number can be set to be greater than the total number of fixing members.

Furthermore, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with the fixing member, the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member is exposed on the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the first right frame lamp board. In this case, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the first right frame lamp board.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convexly curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

Regarding the second right frame lamp board, the third right frame lamp board, the first left frame lamp board, the second left frame lamp board, the third left frame lamp board, the first title display board, and the second title display board, Similar to the first right frame lamp board, when the fixing member is fixed at a predetermined mounting position, the head of the fixing member is exposed to the mounting surface of the light emitting element, and at this time, the mounting surface of the light emitting element is As a reference, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element. Further, the head of the fixing member can be formed into a convex curved surface, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to a surface treatment to reflect light.

As a result, the first right-frame lamp board, the second right-frame lamp board, the third right-frame lamp board, the first left-frame lamp board, the second left-frame lamp board, and the third left-frame lamp board emit light. Although the total area of the mounting surface of the element is larger than that of the first title display board and the second title display board, the total number of fixing members for fixing them at predetermined mounting positions is larger than that of the first title display board and the second title display board. Since there are more layers than the substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected.

Note that in the above description, the screw 683 was used as the fixing member, but the fixing member is not limited to the screw 683. As the fixing member, for example, a locking pin that is press-fitted into a locking hole and fixed may be used. In this case, when the lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with the locking pin, the head of the locking pin is exposed on the surface of the lamp board where the light emitting element is mounted. Furthermore, when the lamp board is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a locking pin, the height of the head of the locking pin is set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element, with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board. . Further, the head of the locking pin is formed into a convex curved surface, and the surface of the head of the locking pin is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light emitted from the light emitting element. Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reflected by the head of the locking pin, so that the head of the locking pin can be made to appear to shine as if it were a light emitting element.

<25th embodiment>
The twenty-fifth embodiment relates to lighting control of the special symbol display device 531 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
FIG. 149 is a front view of the Pachinko game machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 150 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko game machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment as seen from the front side (player side).
As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501.
Further, a game board 504 is provided in the center of the front frame 502, and a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504.

Furthermore, the gaming area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting hole 532, which is one of the winning holes, and a starting hole switch 533 for detecting a winning in the starting hole 532, and a special symbol display. A device 531 and an image display device 543 are provided (see FIG. 135 of the 24th embodiment (A)).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is a device that displays a lottery result based on a random number value obtained by winning a prize in the starting hole 532 by a fluctuating symbol display and a static display.

Furthermore, the Pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board 530 that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 540 that controls the output of the performance (see FIG. 135 of the 24th embodiment (A)). Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like. Furthermore, main control board 530 and sub-control board 540 are electrically connected.
A starting port switch 533 and a special symbol display device 531 are electrically connected to the main control board 530.
The main control board 530 also includes a lottery means 555, a symbol control means 556, and a reservation means 557.

The lottery means 555 is a means for performing a lottery (jackpot lottery, special symbol lottery, variable pattern lottery) based on a random number value obtained by winning a prize in the starting hole 532.
Further, the symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling the variable display and stop display of symbols on the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result by the lottery means 555. That is, the special symbol display device 531 is controlled by symbol control means 557 included in the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the holding means 556 is a means for holding the random number value obtained in response to winning in the starting hole 532 until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number value is started.

When a game ball enters the starting slot 532 and the starting slot switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number, and based on this random number, the lottery means 555 selects a jackpot lottery, special symbol lottery, and execute a fluctuating pattern lottery. In addition, the jackpot lottery is a lottery that determines whether it is a jackpot or a miss, the special symbol lottery is a lottery that determines a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 531, and the variable pattern lottery is a lottery that determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. This is a lottery that determines the time (variation time) for which symbols are displayed in a varying manner on the symbol display device 531. Based on these lottery results, the symbol control means 557 controls the variable display and stop display of the symbols on the special symbol display device 531.

Furthermore, before the fluctuating display of symbols based on the previously acquired random value is finished, the game ball enters the starting hole 532, the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, and the main control board 530 acquires the random value. do. In this case, the holding means 556 holds the random number and the lottery result based on the random number until the variable display of symbols based on the random number starts.
The holding means 556 is capable of holding up to four random numbers and the lottery results based on the random numbers. That is, the upper limit of the number of reservations is set to "4".

Further, when the number of reservations is between "0" and "2", the lottery means 555 determines a variable pattern of "10 seconds" in the fluctuation pattern lottery, and when the number of reservations is "3", the lottery means 555 determines a variable pattern of "10 seconds" in the fluctuation pattern lottery. A fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds" is determined, and when the number of reservations is "4", a fluctuation pattern of "1 second" is determined by a fluctuation pattern lottery. As a result, when the number of reservations is "0" to "2", the fluctuation time of the special symbol will be "10 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "3", the fluctuation time of the special symbol will be "5 seconds". , when the number of reservations is "4", the variation time of the special symbol is "1 second". Note that the shortening of the variation time of the special symbol is referred to as "time saving".

Furthermore, when a jackpot is achieved in the jackpot lottery, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the special game, a grand prize opening (not shown) provided in the game area of the game board 504 is opened. Further, after the special game ends, the game shifts to a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher than that in the normal game. Then, when the game is played a predetermined number of times in the variable probability state (the number of variations of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number), the variable probability state is ended and the game returns to the normal game.

FIG. 151(1) is a diagram showing eight LEDs 531a to 531h included in the special symbol display device 531.
In addition, FIG. 151 (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the jackpot lottery results in a loss, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern when a symbol is stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, FIGS. 152(1) to 152(8) are diagrams showing lighting patterns during variable display of special symbols.

In FIGS. 151(1) to (3) and FIGS. 152(1) to (8), the eight LEDs 531a to 531h are labeled with "a" to "h".
In addition, in Figures 151 (2) to (3) and Figures 152 (1) to (8), lit LEDs are indicated by "●" (black circles), and off LEDs are indicated by "○" (white circles). It is shown in

As shown in FIG. 151(1), the special symbol display device 531 includes eight LEDs 531a to 531h. The eight LEDs 531a to 531h included in the special symbol display device 531 are controlled to turn on or off by the symbol control means 557 included in the main control board 530.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 151 (2), the lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the jackpot lottery is lost is to turn on only one LED 531a and turn off the seven LEDs 531b to 531h. It is something. That is, a display mode in which only one LED 531a is turned on and seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off corresponds to the stop symbol of the special symbol when the game misses. With this display mode, it is displayed that the lottery result (game result) is a loss.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151 (3), the lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery is to light up four LEDs 531a, 531b, 531e, and 531f, and 531c and 531d. , LED 531g, and LED 531h are turned off. That is, in FIG. 151 (3), the display mode in which the LED indicated by "●" (black circle) is turned on and the LED indicated by "○" (white circle) is turned off corresponds to the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of a jackpot. With this display mode, it is displayed that the lottery result (game result) is a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 152(1) to (8), the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol is to sequentially light up eight LEDs, LED 531a to LED 531h, one by one. Then, when the display mode is such that only one LED 531h is turned on and seven LEDs 531a to 531g are turned off as shown in FIG. 152 (8), next, only one LED 531a shown in FIG. 152 (1) is turned on. , the display returns to the display mode in which the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off. That is, during the variable display of the special symbols, the display modes shown in FIGS. 152 (1) to (8) are repeated.
In addition, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the jackpot lottery is lost as shown in FIG. 151 (2), and the initial display mode during the variable display of the special symbol shown in FIG. 152 (1) are as follows. The display format is the same.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during variable display and static display of special symbols when the number of reservations is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost.
In FIG. 153, the variable display of special symbols starts at timing "A". As a result, the game result (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is hidden.

Also, in Figure 153, at the timing of "A", the initial display mode during the variable display of the special pattern shown in Figure 152 (1) is achieved, that is, the display mode in which only one LED 531a is lit and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off.
Furthermore, in FIG. 153, the special symbol is displayed between "A" and "B". Between "A" and "B", the eight LEDs from LED531a to LED531h are turned on one by one in sequence. Also, as described above, when the reserved number is "0", the special symbol is displayed for a period of "10 seconds".

Then, at the timing "B" in FIG. 153, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display starts. As a result, the game results will be displayed.
In addition, at the timing "B" in FIG. 153, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of failure shown in FIG. The display will turn off.
Furthermore, in FIG. 153, between "B" and "C", the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the jackpot lottery has been lost continues.

Then, at timing "C" in FIG. 153, the stop display of the special symbol ends, and the variable display starts again. As a result, the game results are hidden again.
Furthermore, the LED 531a continues to light up between "B" and "D" in FIG. 153. In FIG. 153, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of a miss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This corresponds to the first display mode during the variable display of special symbols.

As described above, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of a miss (FIG. 151 (2)) and the initial display mode during the fluctuating display of the special symbol (FIG. 152 (1)) are the same display. It is a mode. For this reason, even if the special symbol at the time of a miss transitions from the stop symbol to the first symbol in the fluctuating display, the lighting pattern of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 remains visually the same. It is.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of a miss, only one LED 531a lights up, and seven LEDs 531b to 531h go out (FIG. 151(2)). After that, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532, the game starts. At this time, the lottery means 555 executes the jackpot lottery, special symbol lottery, and variable pattern lottery, and the symbol control means 557 starts variable display of the special symbol. Thereafter, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner over a variable time determined by the variable pattern lottery, and when the variable time determined by the variable pattern lottery has elapsed, the special symbols determined by the special symbol lottery are stopped and displayed. As a result, the game result (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed, and the game ends.

Then, from the start to the end of one game, all of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 are turned on and off at least once, and after that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Game results will be displayed.
In FIG. 153, the pending number is "0", a variation pattern of "10 seconds" is determined in the variation pattern lottery, and the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner for 10 seconds, but during that time (from the start to the end of one game) During this period), the three LEDs 531a to 531c turn on and off four times, and the five LEDs 531d to 531h turn on and off three times.

In addition, in either a low probability state (normal game) where the probability of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery is a predetermined probability, or a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery is higher than the predetermined probability, the figure As shown at 153, from the start to the end of one game, the three LEDs 531a to 531c turn on and off four times, and the five LEDs 531d to 531h turn on and off three times.
As a result, it is possible to check whether all the LEDs (LEDs 531a to 531h) on the special symbol display device 531 light up between the start and end of one game, so the special symbol display device 531 It is possible to check whether or not there is a failure in all of the LEDs above.

Figure 154 is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing each LED during the changing display and stationary display of the special pattern when the reserved number is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost.
As mentioned above, when the reserved number is "4", the variation pattern of "1 second" is determined by the variation pattern lottery. In other words, when the reserved number is "4", the variation time of the special pattern is 1 second. In FIG. 154, the period between "A" and "B" is the period during which the variation of the special pattern is displayed.

In FIG. 154, the variable display of the special symbol starts at timing "A". As a result, the game result (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is hidden. In addition, at the timing "A" in FIG. 154, the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbol shown in FIG. The display mode turns off. This point is similar to FIG. 153.

Furthermore, in FIG. 154, between "A" and "B", eight LEDs, ie, LEDs 531a to 531h, are sequentially lit one by one. In FIG. 154, between "A" and "B", three LEDs 531a to 531c are turned on and off twice, and five LEDs 531d to 531h are turned on and turned off once. In this way, in FIG. 154, the time between "A" and "B" is 1 second, which is shorter than in FIG. less.
Then, at the timing "B" in FIG. 154, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display starts. As a result, the game results will be displayed.

In addition, at the timing "B" in FIG. 154, the display mode when the special symbol is stopped at the time of failure shown in FIG. The display will turn off. Furthermore, in FIG. 154, between "B" and "C", the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the jackpot lottery has been lost continues. Then, at timing "C" in FIG. 154, the stop display of the special symbol ends, and the variable display starts again. As a result, the game results are hidden again. This point is similar to FIG. 153.

Also, in FIG. 154, similarly to FIG. 153, the LED 531a continues to light up between "B" and "D". In FIG. 154, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of a miss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" corresponds to the display mode when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This corresponds to the first display mode during the variable display of special symbols.
Further, in FIG. 154, the manner in which each LED is turned on or off between "C" and "F" is the same as the manner in which each LED is turned on or off between "A" and "C".

Even if the number of reservations becomes "4" and the variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter than that shown in FIG. Each of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 is turned on and off at least once. In FIG. 154, from the start to the end of one game, three LEDs 531a to 531c are turned on and off twice, and five LEDs 531d to 531h are turned on and turned off once. Thereafter, the game result is displayed by stopping and displaying the special symbols.

In addition, in either the normal game or the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 154, from the start to the end of one game, the three LEDs 531a to 531c turn on and off twice, and the five LEDs 531d to 531h turn on and off twice. The light turns on and off once.
As a result, even if the special symbol fluctuation time is short, it is possible to check whether all the LEDs (LED 531a to LED 531h) on the special symbol display device 531 light up from the start to the end of one game. Therefore, it is possible to check whether or not all the LEDs on the special symbol display device 531 are out of order.

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the special symbol display device 531 includes eight LEDs, but the number of LEDs that the special symbol display device 531 includes is not limited to eight.
The number of LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 may be more than 8, such as 9 or 10, or may be less than 8, such as 5 or 6.

(2) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 are arranged in two rows of four LEDs as shown in FIG. 151(1), but the LEDs are not limited to this.
The LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 may be arranged in a ring, for example.
Further, for example, the special symbol display device 531 may be configured using a 7-segment LED.

(3) In the 25th embodiment, when the number of reservations is "0" to "2", the variation time of the special symbol is "10 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "3", the variation time of the special symbol is set as "5 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "4", the variation time of the special symbol is set as "1 second", but this is not limited to this.
The variation time of the special symbol for each number of reservations can be set as appropriate.

(4) In the 25th embodiment, when the number of reservations is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost, each LED is turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 153, and when the number of reservations is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost. In this case, each LED was turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 154, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that each LED on the special symbol display device 531 lights up and goes out at least once from the start to the end of one game, and each LED on the special symbol display device 531 from the start to the end of one game. The lighting or extinguishing pattern can be set as appropriate.

(5) FIG. 155 shows how to turn on or off each LED during variable display and stop display of special symbols when the number of reservations is "4" and you lose in the jackpot lottery in a modified example of the 25th embodiment. It is a time chart showing timing.
The modified example shown in FIG. 155 differs from FIG. 154 in that the LED 531a is temporarily turned off at timings "C" and "F", and is otherwise the same as FIG. 154.

In the modification shown in FIG. 155, each LED included in the special symbol display device 531 is provided with out-of-line display data for turning on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 151(2), and for turning on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 152(1). and first variable display data for turning off the light. Similarly, the special symbol display device 531 includes second to eighth variable display data for lighting or extinguishing each LED in each pattern shown in FIGS. 152 (2) to (8).

Furthermore, the deviation display data and the first to eighth variation display data are stored in a ROM included in the sub control board 540.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 540 turns on or off each LED included in the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in FIG. Remember. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 is turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 151(2).
Similarly, when the sub-control board 540 turns on or off each LED included in the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in FIG. Store variable display data. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 is turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 152(1).

In FIG. 155, between "B" and "C", the sub-control board 540 stores the deviation display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 is turned on or off in a pattern (FIG. 151 (2)) corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of miss.
Furthermore, between “C” and “D” in FIG. 155, the sub control board 540 stores the first variable display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. As a result, each LED of the special symbol display device 531 is turned on or off in the first pattern (FIG. 152(1)) during the variable display of the special symbol.

In the modification shown in FIG. 155, at the timing "C", the sub-control board 540 clears the missed display data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM, and then clears the missing display data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM. Store first variable display data. In this way, the data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is rewritten from the deviation display data to the first fluctuation display data. Therefore, in the modification shown in FIG. 155, the LED 531a appears to be turned off once at timing "C".
In FIG. 155, the same process as the timing "C" is performed at the timing "F", so the LED 531a appears to be turned off once.

In addition, by temporarily turning off the LED 531a at timings "C" and "F" in FIG. 155, the player and the hall staff can see the special symbol display device 531, and when a game is over, You can check when the next game will start. In other words, it is possible to grasp the end of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 500, when the special symbol display device 531 finishes changing the special symbol display (for example, when storing the losing display data), it outputs an external signal indicating that one game has been played.
Further, a game information display device (also referred to as a “data display device”) is provided above the pachinko game machine 500, and external signals output from the pachinko game machine 500 are input to the game information display device. Ru.

Further, the game information display device adds 1 to the numerical value indicating the number of games played each time an external signal indicating that one game has been played is input. By looking at this numerical value, the player can know the total number of games played on the pachinko gaming machine 500 on the current day and in the past several days.
Even if the player or the hall clerk cannot confirm the switching between the variable display and the stopped display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 because of the high speed, the numerical value indicating the number of games played on the game information display device is updated. (addition), it is possible to confirm the timing at which one game ends and the next game starts. In other words, it is possible to grasp the end of the game.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to lighting control of LEDs provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing each LED provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main control board 50 includes a loading detection LED 59a, a left stop operation detection LED 59b, a middle stop operation detection LED 59c, a right stop operation detection LED 59d, a start operation detection LED 59e, a left index detection LED 59f, and a middle index detection LED. An LED 59g and a right index detection LED 59h are provided.
In FIG. 156, the eight LEDs are labeled "a" to "h". All of these LEDs are controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board 50.

The insertion detection LED 59a is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 and the insertion sensor 44 detects the inserted medal.
When the input sensor 44 is turned on (detects a medal), the main control board 50 lights up the input detection LED 59a, and when the input sensor 44 is turned off (no longer detects a medal), the main control board 50 The input detection LED 59a is turned off.

The left stop operation detection LED 59b is an LED that lights up when the left stop switch 42 is operated.
When the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights up the left stop operation detection LED 59b, and when the left stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The left stop operation detection LED 59b is turned off.

The middle stop operation detection LED 59c is an LED that lights up when the middle stop switch 42 is operated.
When the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights up the middle stop operation detection LED 59c, and when the middle stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The middle stop operation detection LED 59c is turned off.

The right stop operation detection LED 59d is an LED that lights up when the right stop switch 42 is operated.
When the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights up the right stop operation detection LED 59d, and when the right stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The right stop operation detection LED 59d is turned off.

The start operation detection LED 59e is an LED that lights up when the start switch 41 is operated.
When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights up the start operation detection LED 59e, and when the start switch 41 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 detects the start operation. Turn off the LED 59e.

The left index detection LED 59f is an LED that lights up when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31.
When the left reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 lights up the left index detection LED 59f, and the left reel sensor 33 is turned off (detects the index of the left reel 31). (no longer exists), the main control board 50 turns off the left index detection LED 59f.

The middle index detection LED 59g is an LED that lights up when the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index of the middle reel 31.
When the middle reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the middle index detection LED 59g, and turns off the middle reel sensor 33 (detects the index of the middle reel 31). (no longer exists), the main control board 50 turns off the middle index detection LED 59g.

The right index detection LED 59h is an LED that lights up when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31.
When the right reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 lights up the right index detection LED 59h, and the right reel sensor 33 is turned off (detects the index of the right reel 31). (no longer exists), the main control board 50 turns off the right index detection LED 59h.

As shown in FIG. 146 of the 24th embodiment (B), the symbol display device includes three (left, center, right) reels 31 and three (left, center, right) reels 31 for driving each reel 31, respectively. , right) motor 32 and three (left, middle, right) reel sensors 33 for detecting the position of each reel 31, respectively.
Each reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, respectively. Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index. Further, each index is configured to be detectable by a corresponding reel sensor 33.

Further, the position of each reel 31 at the moment when each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index is set as a reference position.
When each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index, a signal (index signal) indicating this is input to the main control board 50. Thereby, the main control board 50 can determine that each reel 31 has passed the reference position each time each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 counts the number of pulses of the drive signal output to each (stepping) motor 32 from the moment each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index, so that each reel 31 is at the reference position. You can judge how far the position has been rotated.

FIG. 157(1) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31. Further, FIG. 157(2) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index of the middle reel 31. Furthermore, FIG. 157(3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31.
In FIGS. 157(1) to (3), eight LEDs are labeled with "a" to "h". Further, in FIGS. 157(1) to (3), lit LEDs are indicated by "●" (black circles), and off LEDs are indicated by "○" (white circles).

As shown in FIG. 157(1), when the left reel sensor 33 turns on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the left index detection LED 59f. Note that in FIG. 157(1), the input sensor 44, left stop switch 42, center stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, start switch 41, center reel sensor 33, and right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(2), when the middle reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 lights up the middle index detection LED 59g. Note that in FIG. 157(2), the input sensor 44, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, the start switch 41, the left reel sensor 33, and the right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157(3), when the right reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 lights up the right index detection LED 59h. In FIG. 157(3), the input sensor 44, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, the start switch 41, the left reel sensor 33, and the middle reel sensor 33 are all off.

Figure 158 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended with the left reel sensor 33 detecting the index of the left reel 31 and a current game starts under this circumstance.
As described above, the left index detection LED 59f is turned on when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31. Then, when the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f remains turned on even after the game ends.

In FIG. 158, at timing “A”, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) with a specified number of medals bet, the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 rotate. starts. As a result, a game on the slot machine 10 is started. Further, when the left reel 31 starts rotating, the left reel sensor 33 no longer detects the index of the left reel 31. As a result, the left index detection LED 59f turns off.

In FIG. 158, the period between "A" and "B" is a section in which the reel 31 is accelerating. Even if the index is detected by the reel sensor 33 between "A" and "B", this is before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, so this index detection is for validating the stop operation. not treated as such.
In FIG. 158, all reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B". Then, after all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state and the indexes of all the reels 31 are detected by the reel sensor 33, the operation of each stop switch 42 can be accepted. That is, each reel 31 can be stopped.

In FIG. 158, after all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state, the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 at timing "C". The index will be detected. As a result, each reel 31 can be stopped at timing "C".
Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, game results are displayed based on symbol combinations when all reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, being able to stop each reel 31 means that the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed. In FIG. 158, the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed at timing "C".
Furthermore, in FIG. 158, the period between “A” and “C” is a period in which the reel 31 is rotating but the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted. In other words, this is a section in which the reel 31 cannot be stopped.

In FIG. 158, when the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at the timing "D", the left reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the left reel 31 is stopped at the timing "E". Further, between "C" and "D", the left reel 31 can be stopped, and between "D" and "E", the left reel 31 is decelerating.
In FIG. 158, when the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at timing "F", stop control of the middle reel 31 is performed, and at timing "G", the middle reel 31 is stopped. Further, between "C" and "F", the middle reel 31 can be stopped, and between "F" and "G", the middle reel 31 is decelerating.

In FIG. 158, when the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at the timing "H", the right reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the right reel 31 is stopped at the timing "I". Further, between "C" and "H", the right reel 31 can be stopped, and between "H" and "I", the right reel 31 is decelerating.
Then, at timing "I" in FIG. 158, all the reels 31 stop and the game results (symbol combinations) are displayed. As a result, the game on the slot machine 10 ends.

In this way, when the game ends with the left reel sensor 33 detecting the index but the middle reel sensor 33 and right reel sensor 33 not detecting the index, the left index detection LED 59f lights up and the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index. The detection LED 59g and the right index detection LED 59h are turned off. In this state, when a prescribed number of medals are bet and the start switch 41 is turned on, the game starts. At this time, the three reels 31 start rotating. Thereafter, when all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state and the indexes of all the reels 31 are detected by the reel sensor 33, each reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it becomes possible to display game results. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the game result (symbol combination) is displayed and the game ends.

Then, between the start of the game and the time when each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed), the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index on the main control board 50 are activated. Each of the detection LEDs 59h is turned on and off at least once. After that, each reel 31 can be stopped.
As a result, it is confirmed whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 light up from the start of the game until each reel 31 can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended with all the reel sensors 33 not detecting the index, and the current game started under this situation.
When all the reel sensors 33 are not detecting the index, the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h are all turned off. When the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h all remain off even after the game ends.

At timing "A" in FIG. 159, when the start switch 41 is turned on with a specified number of medals bet, the three reels 31 start rotating. As a result, a game on the slot machine 10 is started.
In FIG. 159, all reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B". Furthermore, in FIG. 159, the period between "A" and "B" is a section in which the reel 31 is accelerating. Furthermore, in FIG. 159, between "A" and "B", the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 and the left index detection LED 59f lights up, but the left reel 31 reaches a constant speed state. detection of this index is not treated as enabling the stop operation.

In FIG. 159, after all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state, the index of the left reel 31 is detected by the left reel sensor 33 at timing "C", so that the index of the left reel 31 is detected for all the reels 31. The index will be detected. As a result, each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed) at the timing of "C".
Furthermore, in FIG. 159, the period between "A" and "C" is a section in which the reel 31 is rotating but the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (the reel 31 cannot be stopped).
Furthermore, the operation after the timing "D" in FIG. 159 is the same as that in FIG. 158.
Then, at the timing "I" in FIG. 159, all the reels 31 stop and the game results (symbol combinations) are displayed. As a result, the game on the slot machine 10 ends.

In this way, even if the previous game ended with all the reel sensors 33 not detecting the index, it is possible to stop each reel 31 from the start of the current game (game results (symbol combinations) can be displayed) Until this happens, all of the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are turned on and off at least once.
This makes it possible to check whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are lit before the stop operation of each reel 31 becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

FIG. 160 is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the previous game ended in a state in which none of the reel sensors 33 had detected the index, and a current game is started under this circumstance.
In Figure 160, as in Figure 159, the previous game ends in a state where none of the reel sensors 33 detects an index, and therefore the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h are all off.

Also in FIG. 160, similarly to FIG. 159, at timing "A", the start switch 41 is turned on with a specified number of medals bet, and the game is started. At this time, the three reels 31 start rotating.
Furthermore, in FIG. 160, all the reels 31 reach the constant speed state at timing "B", similarly to FIG. 159. In FIG. 160, the period between "A" and "B" is a section where the reel 31 is accelerating.

In FIG. 160, the index is not detected by the reel sensor 33 between "A" and "B", and after all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state at the timing "B", When the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31 at timing "C", the reel sensor 33 detects the index of all the reels 31. As a result, each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed) at the timing of "C".

Furthermore, in FIG. 160, although the reel 31 is rotating, the period between "A" and "C" is a section in which the stop switch 42 cannot be operated (the reel 31 cannot be stopped). 158 and 159.
Furthermore, the operations after the timing "D" in FIG. 160 are the same as those in FIGS. 158 and 159.
Then, at timing "I" in FIG. 160, all the reels 31 stop and the game results (symbol combinations) are displayed. As a result, the game on the slot machine 10 ends.

In this way, in FIG. 160, the left index detection LED 59f on the main control board 50, the center Both the index detection LED 59g and the right index detection LED 59h are turned on and off at least once.
This makes it possible to check whether the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are lit before the stop operation of each reel 31 becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h.

As described above in the twenty-fifth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment, in both pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the main A plurality of LEDs controlled by the control board turn on and off at least once.
In particular, in a situation where one of the multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board is lit and the other LEDs are turned off, even if the game start conditions are met, it will take a long time until the game results can be displayed. During that time, a plurality of LEDs controlled by the main control board turn on and off at least once.
As a result, in both pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, after the game start conditions are met until the game results can be displayed, multiple LEDs controlled by the main control board are checked for failures. can be confirmed.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to the thickness of the lead wire (also called the "signal wire"), and corresponds to a modification of the twenty-first embodiment.
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wires related to startup were connected directly to the main control board 530, but in the 27th embodiment, the lead wires related to startup are not directly connected to the main control board 50, but are connected to the main control board 50 via the relay board 300.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing various lead wires, a relay board 300, and a main control board 50 in the twenty-seventh embodiment.
Note that in other embodiments including the first embodiment, it is referred to as a "start switch 41," but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, it is referred to as a "start switch unit 41."
The start switch unit 41 detects the movement of a start lever 41a (operating body) operated by a player using a light emitting element and a light receiving element provided inside, and outputs the signal to the outside.
A connector 41b for outputting a signal is attached to the rear end of the start switch unit 41.

The harness J is composed of three lead wires j1, j2, and j3, and harness J connector terminals are attached to both ends thereof. In other words, the three lead wires j1, j2, and j3 are combined into one connector terminal as a harness J. The harness J connector terminal at one end of the harness J is connected to the connector 41b of the start switch unit 41, and the harness J connector terminal at the other end is connected to the connector 300a mounted on the relay board 300.

The lead wire j1 is a lead wire for outputting a signal from the light emitting element of the start switch unit 41, and the lead wire j2 is a lead wire for outputting a signal from the light receiving element of the start switch unit 41. Further, the lead wire j3 is a GND wire.
From the above, the "lead wires related to starting" in the twenty-seventh embodiment correspond to the lead wires j1 and j2. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the "lead wires related to starting" may include the GND wire of the lead wires related to starting. In this case, "lead wires related to starting" correspond to lead wires j1, j2, and j3.

By connecting these lead wires j1 to j3 to the relay board 300, it is possible to input the light emitting element signal and the light receiving element signal (both of these are collectively referred to as a start signal) of the start switch unit 41 to the relay board 300. becomes.
For example, if the configuration is such that the signal of the lead wire j1 (light emitting element) is on and the signal of the lead wire j2 (light receiving element) is off when the start lever 41a is not operated, the lead wire j1 The operation of the start lever 41a is detected based on the fact that the signal of the (light emitting element) is turned on and the signal of the lead wire j2 (light receiving element) is turned on.

Each of the lead wires j1 to j3 is formed to have a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, but also includes a substantially circular cross section). Further, the thicknesses (diameters of cross sections) of the lead wires j1 to j3 are all set to "α" (same). Note that since the lead wires have manufacturing errors to some extent, they do not have exactly the same thickness. Therefore, "the same thickness" includes the range of "±ε" when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε". In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".
Further, the lead wires j1 to j3 are not limited to having a circular cross section, but may have a non-circular cross section. In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wire refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in the cross-sectional shape.

Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the three lead wires j1 to j3 have the same thickness "α", but it is sufficient that the lead wires j1 and j2 have the same thickness "α", and the lead wires that are the GND wire The wire j3 is not limited to the same thickness as the lead wires j1 and j2, and may be thinner than the lead wires j1 and j2, or may be thicker than the lead wires j1 and j2. In the following description, it is assumed that the three lead wires j1 to j3 have the same thickness "α".

As shown in FIG. 141, for example, the start switch unit 41 is attached to the front door 12 so that a start lever 41a can be operated by the player. On the other hand, the main control board 50 is attached to the back plate 13b of the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 22, for example.
On the other hand, the relay board 300 is attached to the back side of the front door 12, for example. The structure is such that signals from various switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, payment switch 43, etc.) attached to the front of the front door 12 are input to the relay board 300, and furthermore, the relay The signal is configured to be input from the board 300 to the main control board 50 via a harness L.

As shown in FIG. 161, a connector 300b is mounted on the relay board 300. Although FIG. 161 shows connectors 300a to 300c as connectors on the relay board 300, this does not mean that the connectors are limited to these.
On the other hand, a set of the lead wire k1 of the bet switch 40, the lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42, and the lead wire k3 of the settlement switch 43 is referred to as a harness K, and are combined into one harness K connector terminal. Although FIG. 161 shows one lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42, in reality, each of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 has a lead wire. That is, the lead wire k2 is composed of three lead wires k2-L (left stop switch 42), k2-C (middle stop switch 42), and k2-R (right stop switch 42). In the following description, the term "lead wire k2" refers to one of the three lead wires k2.
Then, the harness K connector terminal is connected to the connector 300b on the relay board 300. As a result, the bet switch signal, each stop switch signal, and the settlement switch signal are also input to the relay board 300.

The lead wires k1, k2, and k3 are all formed to have a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, but also includes a substantially circular cross section). Here, when the thicknesses (cross-sectional diameters) of the lead wires k1, k2, and k3 are respectively β1, β2, and β3, the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 may be the same or different. . In other words, it may be "β1=β2=β3" or "β1≠β2, β1≠β3, β2≠β3".
Furthermore, like the lead wires j1 to j3, the lead wires k1 to k3 are not limited to having circular cross sections, but may have non-circular cross sections. In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wires k1 to k3 refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in the cross-sectional shape.
Furthermore, similarly to the lead wires j1 to j3, for the lead wires k1 to k3, when the range of manufacturing error (variation) is "ε", the thickness within the range of "±ε" is assumed to be the same thickness.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the minimum thickness among the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 of the lead lines k1 to k3 is “βmin”, the relationship with the thickness “α” of the lead lines j1 to j3 is “ It is configured so that α<βmin.
In other words,
α<β1 and α<β2 and α<β3
It is.
In this way, by making the starting lead wires j1 and j2 (sometimes including j3) thin lead wires (especially thinner than the lead wires for other operation switch signals), the starting lead wires can be made thinner. It can be made as inconspicuous as possible. In addition, by using thin lead wires for starting, the wires are more likely to break in the event of fraudulent activity (modification, etc.), making fraudulent activity difficult and preventing abnormalities in the event of fraudulent activity. become easily discoverable. In other words, thicker lead wires are less likely to break than thin lead wires even in the event of fraudulent activity, and if a bundle of thick lead wires is bundled, even if a part breaks, it will be difficult to detect. This is because it is difficult.

As shown in FIG. 161, a connector 300c is mounted on the relay board 300, and a connector 50b is mounted on the main control board 50. Then, the harness L connector terminal at one end of the harness L is connected to the connector 300c of the relay board 300, and the harness L connector terminal at the other end of the harness L is connected to the connector 50b of the main control board 50.
Then, a start signal, a bet signal, a stop signal, and a settlement signal are input from the relay board 300 to the main control board 50 by the harness L.

In the example of FIG. 161, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 are combined into one connector terminal, and the lead wires k1 to k3 of the bet signal, stop signal, and settlement signal are combined into one connector terminal. In other words, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 for bet signals and the like are separate connector terminals.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 for bet signals etc. may all be combined into one connector terminal and connected to the connector on the relay board 300. good. In this case as well, the thinnest lead wires among the lead wires within the one connector terminal become lead wires j1 and j2 (including j3 in some cases) related to starting.

The 27th embodiment has been described above, but the first to 27th embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to 27th embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<28th embodiment>
The twenty-eighth embodiment relates to sealing a board case that houses a control board.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a board case 550 that houses a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 28th embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but is a control board equipped with a payout control board 520, a sub-control board 540, and other CPUs, and is designed to provide security. It can be applied to a case that houses a necessary control board.

Further, the board case 550 of the 28th embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but is also a control board equipped with the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and other CPUs of the slot machine 10, and has security features. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require
Note that the second embodiment, the twentieth embodiment, and the twenty-eighth embodiment all relate to the board case, but each of them may be implemented alone or may be implemented in an appropriate combination. .

Hereinafter, a case where the main control board 530 is fixed to the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and a sealing seal 581 is pasted on the right side of the board case 550 (28th embodiment (A)) and a case where the main control board 530 is fixed to the board When the case 550 is fixed to the rear cover 570 and the sealing sticker 581 is pasted on the right side of the board case 550 (28th embodiment (B)), and when the sealing sticker 581 is pasted on the front of the board case 550 (Twenty-eighth Embodiment (C)) will be described respectively.

<28th embodiment (A)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), a main control board 530 is fixed to a front cover 560 of a board case 550, and a seal 581 is attached to the right side of the board case 550.
Although the description of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) partially overlaps with the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment, it will be explained anew.
FIG. 162(1) is a front view of the board case 550 in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), and FIG. 162(2) is a right side view of the board case 550 in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A). Further, FIG. 163 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 162(1). Furthermore, FIG. 164 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the board case 550 showing a state in which a false seal 582 is pasted on a regular seal 581. Further, FIG. 165(1) is an explanatory diagram of a mold parting line 568c formed on the surface of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, and FIG. It is an explanatory view of a mold parting line 576c formed on the surface.

Here, the "front (front) side" refers to the mounting surface side (component side) of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the mounting surface side (component side) of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530. Refers to the side opposite to the mounting surface (solder side) of 530b.
Further, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the upper side when the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530 is viewed from the front. Point to the bottom when Furthermore, the "right side" refers to the right side when the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and the "left side" refers to the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530 when viewed from the front. Point to the left side when

In addition, in Figure 162 (1), the "front (front) side" refers to the front side of Figure 162 (1), and the "rear (back) side" refers to the back side of Figure 162 (1). . Furthermore, "upper side" refers to the upper side of FIG. 162(1), "lower side" refers to the lower side of FIG. 162(1), and "right side" refers to the right side of FIG. 162(1). The "left side" refers to the left side of FIG. 162(1).

The board case 550 includes a front cover 560 that covers the mounting surface side (component side) of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530, and covers the side (solder surface side) opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530. A rear cover 570 is provided. When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined, it becomes a board case 550 in which the main control board 530 can be housed.
Note that the front cover 560 is also referred to as a "first cover 560," and the rear cover 570 is also referred to as a "second cover 570."

Further, both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin. Thereby, the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550 is visible from the outside of the board case 550.
In the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570 combined), the side where the main control board 530 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 560 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long, substantially rectangular parallelepiped box with an open rear surface. Further, the front cover 560 has a front portion 566 that faces substantially parallel to the mounting surface (component surface) of the electronic component 530b on the main control board 530. The front portion 566 is formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular plate shape. Furthermore, the front cover 560 includes an upper wall 565a extending rearward from the upper edge of the front section 566, a lower wall 565b extending rearward from the lower edge of the front section 556, and a right side of the front section 556. It has a right side wall 565c extending rearward from the edge of the front part 556, and a left side wall 565d extending rearward from the left edge of the front part 556.

The upper side wall 565a, the lower side wall 565b, the right side wall 565c, and the left side wall 565d are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Further, the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right wall 565c, and the left wall 565d are all perpendicular to the front portion 566. Furthermore, the upper wall 565a is perpendicular to the right side wall 565c and the left side wall 565d, and faces the lower side wall 565b substantially in parallel. Further, the right side wall 565c faces the left side wall 565d substantially in parallel.

The rear cover 570 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front. Further, the rear cover 570 has a rear surface portion 573 that faces substantially parallel to a surface (solder surface) of the main control board 530 opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic component 530b. This rear surface portion 573 is formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular plate shape. Furthermore, the rear cover 570 includes an upper wall 571a extending forward from the upper edge of the rear surface section 573, a lower wall 571b extending forward from the lower edge of the rear surface section 573, and a right side of the rear surface section 573. It has a right side wall 571c extending forward from the edge of the rear surface portion 573, and a left side wall 571d extending forward from the left edge of the rear surface portion 573.

The upper side wall 571a, the lower side wall 571b, the right side wall 571c, and the left side wall 571d are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Furthermore, the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right wall 571c, and the left wall 571d are all perpendicular to the rear surface portion 573. Furthermore, the upper wall 571a is perpendicular to the right side wall 571c and the left side wall 571d, and faces the lower side wall 571b substantially in parallel. Further, the right side wall 571c faces the left side wall 571d substantially in parallel.

When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined, the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560 faces the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 substantially in parallel. Further, the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560 is continuous with the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570 and forms substantially the same plane, and the lower wall 565b of the front cover 560 is continuous with the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570 and forms substantially the same plane. Construct the same plane. Similarly, the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560 is continuous with the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570 and forms substantially the same plane, and the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 is continuous with the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570. They form approximately the same plane.

Furthermore, a large number of electronic components 530b, such as a main CPU, RWM, and ROM, are mounted on the component side of the main control board 530. Furthermore, a connector for connecting to another control board or electronic device via a harness is mounted on the main control board 530. Furthermore, screw holes 530a that penetrate from the component side to the solder side are provided at the four corners of the main control board 530. These screw holes 530a are used when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the front cover 560.
Meanwhile, bosses 564 are provided at the four corners of the inner surface of a front portion 566 of the front cover 560. These bosses 564 are used when mounting (fixing) the main control board 530.

When the inner surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the component surface of the main control board 530 face each other, the four bosses 564 of the front cover 560 and the four screw holes 530a of the main control board 530 overlap, respectively. . In this state, insert the screws 530f into the respective screw holes 530a from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screw them into the respective bosses 564 to attach (fix) the main control board 530 to the front cover 560. be able to.
Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the board case 550 is of a sliding opening/closing type, with the inner surface of the front cover 560 and the inner surface of the rear cover 570 facing each other, and the rear cover 570 being placed against the front cover 560. When slid, the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed to fit together.

In addition, the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the solder surface of the main control board 530 is set to be smaller than the distance from the inner surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
That is, with respect to the inner surface of front surface portion 566 of front cover 560 as a reference, the height of the solder surface of main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570. As a result, the solder surface of main control board 530 is located closer to front surface portion 566 of front cover 560 than the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570.

Further, the distance from the inner surface of the front section 566 of the front cover 560 to the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is the distance from the inner surface of the front section 566 of the front cover 560 to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570. The distance is set smaller than the distance.
That is, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570, with the inner surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 as a reference. There is. As a result, the screw heads of the screws 530f that fix the main control board 530 are located closer to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, an electronic component 530b is mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530, and legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530.
The distance from the inner surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 to the tip of the leg 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding to the solder surface of the main control board 530 is the distance from the inner surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 to the rear of the front cover 560. The distance is set smaller than the distance to the seam with the cover 570.

That is, the height of the tip of the leg 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 is equal to the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570, with the inner surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 as a reference. It is set lower than the height. As a result, the tips of the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 are located closer to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.
Therefore, when the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560, the rear cover 570 and the main control board 530 do not come into contact with each other, and the screws 530f that fix the rear cover 570 and the main control board 530 are fixed. Furthermore, the rear cover 570 and the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 do not come into contact with each other.

Further, on the right side surface of the board case 550, a seal pasting section (a first seal pasting section 567 and a second seal pasting section 574) to which a seal 581 is pasted is provided.
Specifically, a first sticker pasting portion 567 is provided on the right side of the front cover 560, and a second sticker pasting portion 567 is provided on the right side of the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the first sticker pasting portion 567. A portion 574 is provided. Then, when the inner surface of the front cover 560 and the inner surface of the rear cover 570 face each other, and the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560 to fit the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570, the first seal The pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574 are formed to be continuous.

Further, the first seal pasting section 567 has a forward facing surface 567a that is substantially parallel to the front surface section 566, and a rightward facing surface 567b that is substantially parallel to the right side wall 565c. The forward facing surface 567a and the right facing surface 567b are orthogonal and continuous, and the boundary between the forward facing surface 567a and the right facing surface 567b is a bent portion.
Furthermore, the second seal pasting section 574 has a rearward facing surface 574a that is substantially parallel to the rear surface section 573, and a rightward facing surface 574b that is substantially parallel to the right side wall 571c. The rear facing surface 574a and the right facing surface 574b are orthogonal and continuous, and the boundary between the rear facing surface 574a and the right facing surface 574b is a bent portion.

As described above, when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, the first seal attachment section 567 and the second seal attachment section 574 are continuous. At this time, the right-facing surface 567b of the first sticker pasting section 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second sticker pasting section 574 continuously form substantially the same plane. Further, the forward facing surface 567a of the first sticker applying section 567 and the backward facing surface 574a of the second sticker applying section 574 face each other in substantially parallel.

Furthermore, a sealing boss 574c is provided on the inner surface of the rearward facing surface 574a of the second seal pasting section 574. Furthermore, a sealing recess 567c is provided at a position corresponding to the sealing boss 574c on the front face 567a of the first seal pasting portion 567, and a sealing recess 567c is provided at the center of the sealing recess 567c. A screw hole is provided.

When the inner surface of the front cover 560 and the inner surface of the rear cover 570 face each other, and the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560 to fit the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570, the sealing boss 574c and the sealing screw hole overlap. In this state, when the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole and screwed into the sealing boss 574c, the rear cover 570 is fixed to the front cover 560, and the board case 550 is opened. I won't be able to do that. Further, when the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole and screwed to the sealing boss 574c, the screw head of the sealing screw 574d fits inside the sealing recess 567c.

Then, the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, and the sealing screw 574d is inserted into the sealing screw hole and screwed to the sealing boss 574c. The sealing sticker 581 is pasted so as to span the two seal pasting portions 574. At this time, the seal 581 is applied from the front face 567a of the first seal pasting part 567 to the right facing face 567b of the first seal pasting part 567 and the right facing face 574b of the second seal pasting part 574, and then to the second seal pasting part 574. It is pasted so as to reach the rear facing surface 574a. That is, the seal 581 is bent into a substantially U-shape and pasted. As a result, the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal-applying part 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal-applying part 574 is closed with the sealing seal 581. Furthermore, the sealing recess 567c is also closed with a seal 581.

Furthermore, a generally U-shaped seal cover 583 is attached to cover the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 to which the seal sticker 581 is affixed. This seal cover 583 has a front cover portion 583a that covers the forward surface 567a of the first seal affixing portion 567, a side cover portion 583b that covers the right surface 567b of the first seal affixing portion 567 and the right surface 574b of the second seal affixing portion 574, and a rear cover portion 583c that covers the rear surface 574a of the second seal affixing portion 574. In this way, the seal cover 583 covers the entire seal sticker 581, thereby preventing the seal sticker 581 from being peeled off, damaged, or soiled.

Further, the seal cover 583 is formed by injection molding using transparent resin. Thereby, even when the seal cover 583 is attached, the seal 581 can be visually recognized through the seal cover 583 from the outside of the seal cover 583.
Although not shown, the board case 550 is provided with a caulking portion similar to that of the 20th embodiment. The caulking portion is used to caulk (seal) the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 in a state where they are fitted together. After caulking (sealing), the fitting between front cover 560 and rear cover 570 cannot be released unless at least a portion of the caulked portion is destroyed. In this embodiment, description of the caulking portion will be omitted.

When opening the board case 550, first remove the seal cover 583, then peel off the seal 581, and then remove the sealing screw 574d. Then, the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560 in the opposite direction to when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together. Thereby, the board case 550 can be opened, and the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550 can be taken out.

Here, the seal 581 is configured to leave a trace when it is peeled off. Specifically, when the seal 581 is peeled off, a part of the adhesive layer of the seal 581 is peeled off from the seal base material in the shape of an opened character, and the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 are separated. The words ``opened'' appear on the surface. Furthermore, a fragile sheet with many cuts is used as the seal base material of the seal 581, and if the seal 581 is peeled off, the seal base material will be damaged or broken. In this way, when the seal 581 is peeled off, traces thereof remain on the seal 581.

Further, the sealing seal 581 may not be peeled off, a hole may be made in the sealing seal 581 at a position corresponding to the sealing recess 567c, and the sealing screw 574d may be removed. In this case, since a hole is made in the seal 581, a trace of the hole will remain on the seal 581.
Furthermore, the seal 581 is not peeled off, and the seal 581 is cut with a blade such as a cutter along the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal-applying part 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal-applying part 574. The board case 550 may be opened. In this case, since the seal 581 is cut with a knife, traces thereof will remain on the seal 581.

Further, the board case 550 may be opened while the seal 581 is still attached so as to span the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574. In this case, the seal 581 is damaged or broken at the seam between the right-facing surface 567b of the first seal-applying part 567 and the right-facing surface 574b of the second seal-applying part 574, so that traces of the damage will remain on the seal 581. Become. In this case, the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574 becomes a rupture portion that ruptures the seal 581.
In this way, when the board case 550 is opened, traces thereof will remain on the seal 581. In other words, the circuit board case 550 cannot be opened without leaving any traces of opening on the seal 581. Therefore, by visually checking the state of the seal 581, it is possible to check whether the board case 550 has been opened.

Here, a false seal 582 is pasted on top of the official seal 581 that leaves traces of opening, and a seal cover 583 is then attached to cover this false seal 582, thereby concealing the traces of opening. may be performed.
As shown in FIG. 164, it is assumed that a false seal 582 is pasted on a regular seal 581, and a seal cover 583 is attached to cover this false seal 582. In this case, even if there are traces of opening left on the genuine seal 581, simply looking at the false seal 582 through the seal cover 583 from the outside of the seal cover 583 will not reveal any traces of opening left on the genuine seal 581. It cannot be confirmed visually.

In particular, if the seal 581 is not peeled off and a hole is drilled in the seal 581 at a position corresponding to the sealing recess 567c and the sealing screw 574d is removed, the traces shown in A in FIG. As shown in the enlarged view, a broken portion 581a remains.
Then, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in FIG. 164, a false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581 in which the broken part 581a remains, and a seal cover is placed to cover this false seal 582. 583 is attached, the broken portion 581a left in the regular seal 581 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the seal cover 583.

Therefore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are connected to the main control board in the board case 550. It is formed so that it can be visually recognized from the surface opposite to the solder surface of 530.
That is, the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the seal seal 581 pasted thereon are formed so that they can be seen through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. ing.
Specifically, when viewed from the rear surface portion 573 side of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D5 in FIG. Sealing stickers 581 affixed to these can be visually confirmed.

Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are connected to the main control board in the board case 550. It is formed so as to be visible from the surface opposite to the component surface of 530.
That is, the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are formed so that they can be seen through the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560. ing.
Note that when viewed in the direction of the line of sight D6 in FIG. 163, the line of sight is blocked by the main control board 530 and the backward facing surface 574a of the second seal pasting section 574 cannot be seen; If the viewpoint is moved to the right side from the viewpoint position of D6, from the front part 566 side of the front cover 560, the first sticker pasting part 567, the second sticker pasting part 574, the seam thereof, and the pasting to these can be seen. The sealed seal 581 becomes visible.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon It is formed so as to be visible from the side opposite to the sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker pasting portion 574.
That is, through the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, the first seal affixing part 567, the second seal affixing part 574, the seam thereof, and the seal 581 affixed thereto are formed so as to be visible. ing.
Specifically, when viewed from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D3 or line of sight D4 in FIG. The eyes and the seal 581 affixed to these can be visually confirmed.
In particular, when viewed from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D4 in FIG. and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, and can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are attached to the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570. It is formed so as to be visible from the lower side wall 571b as well.
As described above, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, their seams, and the sealing sticker 581 pasted thereon are located behind the rear cover 570. It is formed so as to be visible from the surface portion 573, the front portion 566 of the front cover 560, the left side wall 571d, the upper wall 571a, and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570.

Therefore, the regular seal 581 affixed to the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 can be visually observed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. It can be confirmed.
As a result, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581, the genuine seal 581 will not be peeled off, or the joint between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 will be Along the line, traces of the regular seal 581 being cut with a knife or damaged or broken due to the joint between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 can be visually confirmed. can do.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the sealing recess 567c provided on the front surface 567a of the first seal pasting section 567 is visible from the surface of the board case 550 that faces the solder surface of the main control board 530. It is formed so that
That is, the sealing recess 567c provided on the front face 567a of the first seal attachment part 567 is formed so as to be visible through the rear face 573 of the rear cover 570.
Specifically, when viewed from the rear surface portion 573 side of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D7 in FIG. You can check with.

Thereby, the part of the regular sealing seal 581 that closes the sealing recess 567c can be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the front face 567a of the first seal pasting part 567.
Therefore, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581, it is possible to visually confirm the trace of a hole made in the part of the regular seal 581 that closes the sealing recess 567c. be able to.

That is, if a hole is made in the part of the regular seal 581 that closes the sealing recess 567c, a trace of the hole will remain as a broken part 581a, as shown in the enlarged view of part A in FIG. 164. Even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581 with the broken part 581a left, it should not be viewed from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D7 in FIG. 164. This allows the broken portion 581a left in the regular seal 581 to be visually confirmed.

In addition, the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the tip of the foot 530 of the electronic component 530b is set to be smaller than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
In other words, based on the component side of the main control board 530, the height of the tip of the foot 530d of the electronic component 530b that protrudes from the solder side of the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.

FIG. 163 shows an example in which three legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530. Furthermore, among the three legs 530d, the two legs 530d on the left side are bent slightly to the left for temporary fixing during soldering, and the one leg 530d on the right side is bent slightly. It extends straight without being curved.
Then, with respect to the component surface of the main control board 530 as a reference, the height of the tip of all the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 is the same as that of the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker. The height is set lower than the height of the joint with the pasting part 574. That is, with respect to the component surface of the main control board 530, both the height of the tip of the leg 530d that is bent and the height of the tip of the leg 530d that extends straight without being bent are the same as those of the first sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker. The height is set lower than the height of the joint with the pasting part 574.

Furthermore, the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574. The distance is set smaller than the distance to the seam.
That is, with the component surface of the main control board 530 as a reference, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is higher than the height of the joint between the first sticker attachment part 567 and the second sticker attachment part 574. It is set low.

As a result, the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 are connected to each other from the side surface (left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570) opposite to the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 in the board case 550. When looking at the seam, it is possible to prevent the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the main control board 530 and the screw heads of the screws 530f that fix the main control board 530 from blocking the line of sight. .
Specifically, when looking from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in the direction of line of sight D3 in FIG. 163, the main control board The legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protruding from the solder surface of the electronic component 530 and the screw heads of the screws 530f for fixing the main control board 530 can be prevented from blocking the line of sight.

Furthermore, a test terminal 530e is provided on the component surface of the main control board 530 at a position close to the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574. This test terminal 530e is a terminal to which a test electronic component is attached during a sight firing test.
Here, the test electronic component is an electronic component that is mounted on the main control board 530 only during the sight test, and is not mounted on the gaming machine installed in the hall (store). Further, the test electronic component is surface mounted on the test terminal 530e. That is, the test terminal 530e is a terminal formed to surface-mount the test electronic component.

Therefore, a socket into which a test electronic component is mounted is not provided at the position of the test terminal 530e on the component surface of the main control board 530. Since test electronic components are not mounted in gaming machines installed in halls (stores), test electronic components are surface mounted at the test terminals 530e on the component surface of the main control board 530. Only the wiring pattern for the circuit is provided.

In the gaming machine installed in a hall (store), the first sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker It is formed so that the line of sight passes through the space between the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e when looking at the pasting part 574, the seam thereof, and the seal 581 pasted thereon. has been done. This prevents the line of sight from being obstructed by the electronic components mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530.
In addition, from the upper wall 565a side of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D1 in FIG. When looking at the seal 581, the line of sight passes through the space between the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e, so the line of sight D1 is blocked by the electronic components mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. You can prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, from the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D2 in FIG. When looking at the seal 581, the line of sight passes through the space between the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e, so the line of sight D2 is blocked by the electronic components mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. It can be made unobstructed.

Here, the parting line of the mold will be explained.
A mold used for injection molding is usually composed of a core (male mold, movable side) and a cavity (female mold, fixed side). Furthermore, a striped convex portion is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the molded product at a position corresponding to the dividing plane between the core and the cavity. This striped convex portion is called a parting line.
For example, when injection molding a molded product that has a protrusion or undercut on the outer circumferential surface, the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core that moves perpendicular to the direction of movement of the core. be done. In this case, striped convex portions are also formed on the outer circumferential surface of the molded product at positions corresponding to the dividing plane between the slide core and the cavity and positions corresponding to the dividing plane between the slide core and the core. This linear convex portion is also called a parting line.

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), as shown in FIG. 165(1), two flanges 568a to 568b protruding outward are provided on the outer surface (outside surface) of the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560. It is being These flanges 568a to 568b extend from the end on the upper wall 565a side of the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 to the end on the lower side wall 565b side, and are formed parallel to the front side 566 of the front cover 560. When injection molding the front cover 560 having such a shape, the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core. A parting line 568c is formed at the corresponding position. Similarly, parting lines are also formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, lower wall 565b, and right side wall 565c of the front cover 560, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 165(2), two flanges 576a to 576b protruding outward are provided on the outer surface (outside surface) of the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570. These flanges 576a to 576b extend from the end on the upper wall 571a side of the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 to the end on the lower wall 571b side, and are formed parallel to the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. When the rear cover 570 having such a shape is injection molded, since the mold is composed of a core, a cavity, and a slide core, the dividing surface between the slide core and the cavity on the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 is A parting line 576c is formed at the corresponding position. Similarly, parting lines are formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570, respectively.

In the 28th embodiment (A), from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the upper wall 571a, lower wall 571b, right side wall 571c, and left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570. The distance is set to be larger than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the joint between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574. That is, the height of the parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right wall 571c, and the left wall 571d of the rear cover 570 with respect to the component surface of the main control board 530 is equal to the height of the first seal. The height is set higher than the height of the seam between the pasting part 567 and the second sticker pasting part 574.

When looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, the upper wall 571a, the lower wall of the rear cover 570 If the parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the left side wall 571b and the left side wall 571d appears to overlap with the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574, the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 overlap. It becomes difficult to visually check the joint with the seal pasting portion 574, and in turn, it becomes difficult to visually check the state of the seal 581.

Therefore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), parting lines are formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, the right wall 571c, and the left wall 571d of the rear cover 570, with the component surface of the main control board 530 as a reference. The height of 576c is set higher than the height of the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574.
As a result, when looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the upper wall 571a, the lower wall 571b, or the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570 The parting line 576c formed on the outer surface of the lower side wall 571b and the left side wall 571d and the seam between the first seal attaching part 567 and the second seal attaching part 574 are made so that they do not overlap and become visible. This makes it easy to visually check the joint between the pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 and the condition of the seal 581.

Further, as shown in FIG. 97 of the nineteenth embodiment (B), a board case 550 housing a main control board 530 is attached to the back surface of the game board 504 of the Pachinko game machine 500. At this time, the board case 550 rotates the game board 500 of the pachinko game machine 500 around a rotation axis provided near its left side (near the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570). It is rotatably attached to the back surface of the

Here, in this embodiment, the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574 to which the sealing seal 581 is pasted are provided on the right side surface of the board case 550. In other words, the board case 550 is rotatably attached around a rotation axis provided near the side surface opposite to the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574.
Therefore, when the board case 550 is rotated with respect to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the right side of the board case 550 is pulled out to the front, the The first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 can be made easier to see.

Furthermore, when the board case 550 is rotated with respect to the back surface of the game board 504 and the right side of the board case 550 is pulled out toward the front, the seam between the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker pasting part 574 is , the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570, the front surface 566 of the front cover 560, the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570, and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570. Then, the seal 581 affixed across the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 is applied from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. It can be easily confirmed visually.

Although the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 28th embodiment (A), the seal pasting section (first seal pasting section 567 and second seal pasting section 574) to which the sealing sticker 581 is pasted is connected to the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570). ), but is not limited to this.
The seal pasting section (the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574) may be provided on the left side, the top side, or the bottom side of the board case 550, for example.
Further, the sticker pasting portions (the first sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker pasting portion 574) are attached to, for example, the front face portion 566 of the front cover 560, the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560, and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570. It may also be formed into a planar shape that is inclined.

(2) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the sticker pasting section (the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574) was provided only at one location on the right side surface of the board case 550; It is not limited to one location, but may be provided at multiple locations.
The seal pasting parts (the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker pasting part 574) may be provided at two places, for example, the right side and the left side of the board case 550, and the top side and the right side of the board case 550. It may also be provided at three locations on the left side.

(3) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the seal 581 is bent into a substantially U-shape and attached, but the present invention is not limited to this.
If the sealing sticker 581 is pasted so as to span at least the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570), it can be bent into an L shape and pasted. Alternatively, it may be attached only on the same plane without bending.
However, when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are sealed with the sealing screw 574d, even when the sealing sticker 581 is bent into an L shape and pasted, the sealing sticker 581 is not bent and is placed on the same plane. Even when pasting only the sealing screw 574d, it is preferable to close the sealing recess 567c in which the screw head of the sealing screw 574d is accommodated with the sealing seal 581.

(4) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), a breaking member for breaking the seal 581 is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a breaking member for breaking the seal 581 is provided inside the first seal sticking part 567 and the second seal sticking part 574 (between the first seal sticking part 567 and the second seal sticking part 574). . Then, when the substantially U-shaped seal cover 583 attached to cover the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the outside is removed, the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 are removed. The breaking member is configured to protrude (pop out) from the seam to the outside of the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574. At this time, the breaking member may be configured to break the seal 581.

Moreover, the breaking member may be formed of transparent resin, or may be formed of semitransparent or opaque resin.
Furthermore, the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) and the breaking member may be formed of resin of the same color or may be formed of resin of different colors.
When a breaking member for breaking the seal 581 is provided inside the first seal sticking part 567 and the second seal sticking part 574, the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) It is preferable to form the breaking member so that it can be visually confirmed from the left side, upper side, or lower side. Furthermore, it is preferable to form the breaking member so that it can be visually confirmed from the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 and the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570.

(5) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), an example was shown in which the board case 550 housing the main control board 530 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but this is not limited to this.
22 of the seventh embodiment, a board case 550 housing a main control board 530 may be attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10. In this case, the board case 550 may be attached directly to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, or may be attached via another member.
Furthermore, the substrate case 550 is not limited to being attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13 b of the cabinet 13 , but may be attached to the inner surfaces of the left and right side plates of the cabinet 13 , for example.

Furthermore, the board case 550 may be fixed to a bracket, and this bracket may be attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13. In this case, after the board case 550 and the bracket are provided with a caulking part, the board case 550 is fixed to the bracket, and the caulking part is used to perform caulking (sealing), at least a part of the caulking part is destroyed. Otherwise, the configuration may be such that the board case 550 cannot be removed from the bracket.

Furthermore, a seal may be attached so as to span the board case 550 and the bracket, so that when the board case 550 is removed from the bracket, a trace of the seal remains.
Further, the bracket is preferably formed by injection molding using a transparent resin. As a result, even when the board case 550 is fixed to the bracket, the board case 550 can be visually recognized through the bracket from the outside of the bracket. , the seal 581 affixed there can be made visible.

Further, the bracket rotates around the rotation axis provided on the left side (the side opposite to the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 of the board case 550) on the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13. It may be attached rotatably to the inner surface of the.
As a result, when the bracket and board case 550 are rotated relative to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the right side of the bracket and board case 550 is pulled out to the front, the It is possible to make it easier to see the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574.

Furthermore, when the bracket and board case 550 are rotated with respect to the inner surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the right side of the bracket and board case 550 is pulled out to the front, the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker pasting part 567 are attached. The seam with the section 574 can be easily recognized from the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570, the front surface 566 of the front cover 560, the upper wall 571a of the rear cover 570, and the lower wall 571b of the rear cover 570. . Then, the seal 581 affixed across the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 is applied from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. It can be easily confirmed visually.

(6) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), a seal pasting section (first seal pasting section 567 and second seal pasting section 574) is provided on the right side of the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570), Furthermore, although the sealing sticker 581 is bent and pasted in a U-shape on the outer surfaces of the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 can be provided flat on substantially the same plane as the front section 566 of the front cover 560 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530).

In this case, the sealing sticker 581 is pasted flat without bending so as to straddle the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574, which are provided on substantially the same plane as the front part 566 of the front cover 560. Make it.
Furthermore, if the seal 581 is not peeled off or cut with a knife along the seam between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, the circuit board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 574) ) so that it cannot be opened, so that when the seal 581 is peeled off or cut with a knife, traces thereof remain on the seal 581.

Furthermore, when the substrate case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) is opened while the sealing seal 581 is attached so as to straddle the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, the sealing seal 581 breaks at the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, leaving a trace on the sealing seal 581.
The seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574 is formed so as to be visible (visually confirmable) from a rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570 (the surface facing the solder surface of the main control board 530).

Thereby, the sealing sticker 581 affixed to the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 can be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. You can do it like this.
Therefore, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581, the genuine seal 581 may be peeled off, or if the false seal 582 is pasted along the seam between the first seal pasting portion 567 and the second seal pasting portion 574. It is possible to visually check the traces of the regular seal 581 being cut with a knife or being damaged or broken due to the seam between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574. be able to.

Further, for example, a breakage protrusion for damaging the seal 581 may be provided on the rear cover 570 at a position corresponding to the first seal attachment portion 567 or the second seal attachment portion 574. Then, when the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570) is opened (the rear cover 570 is slid relative to the front cover 560), the damage protrusion damages the seal 581, causing the board case 550 to Traces of opening may be left on the seal 581.
In this case, in addition to the joint between the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, a breakage protrusion is provided from the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 (the surface facing the solder surface of the main control board 530). Formed so that it can be visually recognized (confirmed visually).

Thereby, the sealing sticker 581 affixed to the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 can be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. This makes it possible to visually confirm the traces of damage to the seal 581 caused by the damage projections (the traces of the board case 550 being opened).

(7) In the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), an example was shown in which the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The electronic component 530b may be surface-mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. In this case, the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b do not protrude from the solder surface of the main control board 530. This prevents the line of sight from being obstructed by the legs 530d of the electronic component 530b when looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570. Can be done.

The various modifications shown in the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (A) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations. be.

<28th embodiment (B)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), a main control board 530 is fixed to a rear cover 570 of a board case 550A, and a seal 581 is affixed to the right side of the board case 550A.
The twenty-eighth embodiment (B) differs from the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) in that the main control board 530 is fixed to the rear cover 570 of the board case 550A, but the first seal pasting portion 567 and the second seal pasting portion The portion 574 is the same as that in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
The twenty-eighth embodiment (B) will be described below, focusing on the differences from the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).

FIG. 166 is a sectional view of a board case 550A in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), and corresponds to FIG. 163 in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
In the 28th embodiment (B), similarly to the 28th embodiment (A), the board case 550A includes a front cover 560 that covers the component side of the main control board 530, and a rear cover 560 that covers the solder side of the main control board 530. A cover 570 is provided.
Further, as in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

Furthermore, the front cover 560 may be formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular box shape and include a front portion 566, an upper wall 565a, a lower wall 565b, a right side wall 565c, and a left side wall 565d. , similar to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
Further, the rear cover 570 is formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular box shape, and includes a rear surface portion 573, an upper wall 571a, an upper wall 571b, a right side wall 571c, and a left side wall 571d. This is the same as the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).

Further, a large number of electronic components 530b to 530c are mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530, and screw holes 530a are provided at the four corners of the main control board 530, passing through from the component surface to the solder surface. This is also the same as in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), unlike the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), bosses 575 used when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 are provided at the four corners of the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. It is provided.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), when the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 and the solder surface of the main control board 530 face each other, the four bosses 575 of the rear cover 570 and the solder surface of the main control board 530 The four screw holes 530a overlap each other. In this state, insert the screws 530f into each screw hole 530a from the component side of the main control board 530, and screw them into each boss 575 to attach (fix) the main control board 530 to the rear cover 570. be able to.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), unlike the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the board case 550A is of a rotational opening/closing type. In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), a rotation axis is provided near the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570, and the rear cover 570 is rotated around this rotation axis. By rotating the front cover 560, the board case 550A is opened and closed.

Also, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), a first seal pasting portion 567 is provided on the right side of the front cover 560, and a first seal pasting portion 567 is provided on the right side of the rear cover 570. A second sticker affixing section 574 is provided at a position corresponding to the first sticker affixing section 567.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), when the front cover 560 is rotated with respect to the rear cover 570 and the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together, the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 567 are attached. The portion 574 is formed to be continuous.

Furthermore, the structures of the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 are the same as those in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).
Furthermore, the sealing sticker 581 is bent into a U-shape so as to span the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, and the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574 are The seam is closed with the seal 581, the sealing recess 567c is also closed with the seal 581, and the seal cover is placed so as to cover the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 to which the seal 581 is affixed. 583 is also attached in the same manner as in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), when opening the board case 550A, first remove the seal cover 583, then peel off the seal 581, and then remove the sealing screw 574d. Then, the front cover 560 is rotated relative to the rear cover 570 in the opposite direction to when the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together. Thereby, the board case 550A can be opened, and the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550A can be taken out.

Also, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, their seams, and the The seal 581 is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550A that faces the component surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first seal pasting section 567 and the second seal pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are formed so that they can be seen through the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560. ing.
Specifically, when viewed from the front side 566 of the front cover 560 in the direction of line of sight D8 in FIG. Sealing stickers 581 affixed to these can be visually confirmed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), as in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, the joints thereof, and the parts pasted thereon are A sealing seal 581 is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the board case 550A that faces the solder surface of the main control board 530.
That is, the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574, their seams, and the sealing sticker 581 pasted thereon are formed so that they can be seen through the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. ing.

When viewed in the direction of line of sight D10 in FIG. 166, the line of sight is blocked by the main control board 530, and the forward surface 567a of the first seal affixing portion 567 cannot be seen. However, if the viewpoint is moved to the right from the viewpoint of line of sight D10 in FIG. 166, the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574, their seams, and the seal sticker 581 affixed thereto can be seen from the rear surface 573 side of the rear cover 570.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereto are the first seal in the board case 550A. It is formed so as to be visible from the side opposite to the pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574.
That is, the first seal pasting section 567, the second seal pasting section 574, the seam thereof, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are formed so as to be visible through the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560. ing.

Note that when viewed in the direction of the line of sight D9 in FIG. 166, the line of sight is blocked by the electronic component 530c mounted on the main control board 530, and the right-facing surface 567b of the first sticker attachment part 567 cannot be viewed. However, if the viewpoint is moved above the viewpoint position of the line of sight D9 in FIG. The eyes and the seal 581 affixed to them become visible.
In addition, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), the first sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker pasting portion 574, their seams, and the sealing sticker 581 pasted thereon are attached to the upper wall of the front cover 560. 565a and the lower wall 565b.

In this way, the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574, their seams, and the sealing seal 581 pasted thereon are attached to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the back of the rear cover 570. By forming it so that it is visible from the surface portion 573, the left side wall 565d, the upper wall 565a, and the lower wall 565b of the rear cover 570, the regular seal affixed to the first sticker pasting portion 567 and the second sticker pasting portion 574 is visible. The sealing seal 581 can be visually confirmed from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574.

As a result, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581, the genuine seal 581 will not be peeled off, or the joint between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 will be Along the line, traces of the regular seal 581 being cut with a knife or damaged or broken due to the seam between the first seal pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 can be visually confirmed. can do.

Also, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the sealing recess 567c provided on the front surface 567a of the first seal pasting section 567 is the main controller in the board case 550A. It is formed so as to be visible from the surface facing the solder surface of the board 530. That is, the sealing recess 567c provided on the front face 567a of the first seal attachment part 567 is formed so as to be visible through the rear face 573 of the rear cover 570.

Thereby, the portion of the regular sealing seal 581 that closes the sealing recess 567c can be visually confirmed from inside (inner surface side) of the front face 567a of the first seal pasting part 567. Therefore, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the regular seal 581, it is possible to visually confirm the trace of a hole made in the part of the regular seal 581 that closes the sealing recess 567c. be able to.

Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), the distance from the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the component surface of the main control board 530 is as follows: The distance is set smaller than the distance to the seam.
That is, the height of the component surface of the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the seam between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 with respect to the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570. Therefore, the component surface of the main control board 530 is located closer to the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

As a result, the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 are separated from the side surface (left side wall 565d of the front cover 560) opposite to the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 in the board case 550A. When looking at the seam, the main control board 530 is designed not to block the line of sight.

Further, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), the distance from the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is from the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 to the front cover. The distance is set smaller than the distance to the seam between 560 and rear cover 570.
That is, the height of the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is set lower than the height of the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570, with the inner surface of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 as a reference. There is. Therefore, the screw head of the screw 530f that fixes the main control board 530 is located closer to the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 than the joint between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570.

As a result, the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 are separated from the side surface (left side wall 565d of the front cover 560) opposite to the first seal attaching section 567 and the second seal attaching section 574 in the board case 550A. When looking at the seam, the screw heads of the screws 530f that fix the main control board 530 do not obstruct the line of sight.

Furthermore, numerous electronic components 530b to 530c are mounted on the component surface of main control board 530. Furthermore, with respect to the component surface of main control board 530 as a reference, the height of electronic component 530b is set lower than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570, and the height of electronic component 530c is set higher than the height of the joint between front cover 560 and rear cover 570.
Electronic component 530b, which is shorter than the seam between front cover 560 and rear cover 570, is mounted in a position on the component side of the main control board 530 close to the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574, and electronic component 530c, which is taller than the seam between the front cover 560 and rear cover 570, is mounted in a position on the component side of the main control board 530 away from the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.

As a result, when looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the surface (front section 566 of the front cover 560) facing the component surface of the main control board 530 in the board case 550A, In addition, the line of sight is not obstructed by the electronic components 530b to 530c mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530.

Also, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), on the component surface of the main control board 530, the A test terminal 530e is provided.
As a result, in a gaming machine installed in a hall (store), the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker are It was mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530 so that when looking at the seam with the sticker pasting part 574, the line of sight could pass through the space between the front part 566 of the front cover 560 and the test terminal 530e. This ensures that the line of sight is not obstructed by electronic components.

In addition, in the 28th embodiment (B), the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the parting line 568c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c, and the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 is set to be greater than the distance from the component surface of the main control board 530 to the seam between the first seal attachment portion 567 and the second seal attachment portion 574.
In other words, based on the component surface of the main control board 530, the height of the parting line 568c formed on the outer surfaces of the upper wall 565a, the lower wall 565b, the right side wall 565c and the left side wall 565d of the front cover 560 is set higher than the height of the seam between the first seal affixing portion 567 and the second seal affixing portion 574.

As a result, when looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 from the top wall 565a, bottom wall 565b, or left side wall 565d of the front cover 560, the top wall 565a of the front cover 560 The parting line 568c formed on the outer surface of the lower side wall 565b and the left side wall 565d and the seam between the first seal attaching part 567 and the second seal attaching part 574 are made so that they do not overlap and become visible. This makes it easy to visually check the joint between the pasting part 567 and the second seal pasting part 574 and the condition of the seal 581.

Also, in the twenty-eighth embodiment (B), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment (A), the board case 550A has a ) is rotatably attached to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500 around a rotation shaft provided in the pachinko game machine 500.
That is, the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 are provided on the right side surface of the board case 550A, and the circuit board case 550A is provided on the side surface opposite to the first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574. It is rotatably attached to the back surface of the game board 504 of the pachinko game machine 500 around a rotation shaft provided nearby.
As a result, when the board case 550A is rotated with respect to the back surface of the game board 504 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 and the right side of the board case 550A is pulled out to the front, the The first sticker pasting section 567 and the second sticker pasting section 574 can be made easier to see.

Furthermore, when the board case 550A is rotated with respect to the back surface of the game board 504 and the right side of the board case 550A is pulled out to the front, the seam between the first sticker pasting part 567 and the second sticker pasting part 574 is , the front surface 566 of the front cover 560, the rear surface 573 of the rear cover 570, the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560, and the lower wall 565b of the front cover 560.
Then, the seal 581 affixed across the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574 is applied from the inside (inner surface side) of the first seal affixing part 567 and the second seal affixing part 574. This can be easily confirmed visually.

Although the twenty-eighth embodiment (B) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and modifications as shown in the modification of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) are possible. .
Further, the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (B) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<28th embodiment (C)>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), a seal 581 is attached to the front of the board case 550B.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), a board case 550B is fixed to a bracket 584, a seal 581 is pasted across the front of the board case 550B and the front of the bracket 584, and the bracket 584 is fixed to a bracket 584. It is attached to the inner surface of the back plate 13b.

FIG. 167(1) is a front view of the slot machine 10 and board case 550B in the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), and FIG. 167(2) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 167(1). . Moreover, FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a state in which the left side of the board case 550B is rotated toward the front with respect to the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, and corresponds to FIG. 167(2).
In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and (B), the board case 550B includes a front cover 560 that covers the component surface of the main control board 530, and a solder plate of the main control board 530. A rear cover 570 that covers the surface is provided.
Further, as in the twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and (B), both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

Furthermore, the front cover 560 may be formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular box shape and include a front portion 566, an upper wall 565a, a lower wall 565b, a right side wall 565c, and a left side wall 565d. , similar to the twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and (B).
Further, the rear cover 570 is formed in a horizontally long substantially rectangular box shape, and includes a rear surface portion 573, an upper wall 571a, an upper wall 571b, a right side wall 571c, and a left side wall 571d. This is the same as the twenty-eighth embodiments (A) and (B).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to the inside of either the front cover 560 or the rear cover 570 with screws. In this state, by fitting the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 and sealing them with screws, the main control board 530 can be housed inside the board case 550B.
Furthermore, the twenty-eighth embodiment (C) includes a bracket 584 that can accommodate the board case 550B. The bracket 584 is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front, and is formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

Specifically, the bracket 584 has a back plate portion 584a that faces substantially parallel to the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 of the board case 550B. This back plate portion 584a is formed into a horizontally long substantially rectangular plate shape. The bracket 584 also includes an upper edge 584b extending forward from the upper edge of the back plate 584a, a lower edge 584c extending forward from the lower edge of the back plate 584a, and a lower edge 584c extending forward from the lower edge of the back plate 584a. It has a right edge 584d extending forward from the right edge of the back plate portion 584a, and a left edge 584e extending forward from the left edge of the back plate portion 584a.

The upper edge 584b, the lower edge 584c, the right edge 584d, and the left edge 584e are all formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. Further, the upper edge 584b, the lower edge 584c, the right edge 584d, and the left edge 584e are all perpendicular to the back plate 584a. Furthermore, the upper edge 584b is perpendicular to the right edge 584d and the left edge 584e, and faces the lower edge 584c substantially in parallel. Further, the right edge 584d faces the left edge 584e substantially in parallel.

Then, the board case 550B is stored inside the bracket 584 so that the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate portion 584a of the bracket 584 and the rear surface (outer surface) of the rear surface portion 573 of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B face each other. do.
At this time, the upper edge 584b of the bracket 584 is located along the upper side wall 565a of the front cover 560 and the upper side wall 571a of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B, and the lower edge 584c of the bracket 584 is located along the upper side of the upper wall 565a of the front cover 560 and the upper side wall 571a of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B. It is located along the lower side of the lower side wall 565b of the front cover 560 and the lower side wall 571b of the rear cover 570 in 550B.

Further, the right edge 584d of the bracket 584 is located along the right side of the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560 and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B, and the left edge 584e of the bracket 584 is located along the right side of the right side wall 565c of the front cover 560 and the right side wall 571c of the rear cover 570 in the board case 550B. It is located along the left side of the upper wall 565d of the front cover 560 and the left side wall 571d of the rear cover 570 in .
The surface of the board case 550B facing the component surface of the main control board 530 (the front surface 566 of the front cover 560), the upper edge 584b, the lower edge 584c, the right edge 584d, and the left edge 584e of the bracket 584 and the front surface thereof are continuous and form substantially the same plane.

Further, although not shown, caulking portions are provided on the right side surfaces of the board case 550B and the bracket 584. This caulking portion is used for caulking (sealing) the board case 550B inside the bracket 584 in a state where the two are housed. After caulking (sealing) using this caulking part, the board case 550B must be taken out from inside the bracket 584 (remove the board case 550B from the bracket 584) unless at least a part of the caulking part is destroyed. furthermore, it is impossible to open the board case 550B (release the fitting between the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570), and therefore the main control board 530 cannot be accessed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(1), a case-side seal pasting part 569 is provided at the upper front surface of the front face part 566 of the front cover 560 in the board case 550B, and a case-side seal pasting part 569 is provided at the front surface of the upper edge part 584b of the bracket 584. A bracket-side seal affixing portion 584f is provided at a position corresponding to the case-side seal affixing portion 569. The case side seal pasting part 569 and the bracket side seal pasting part 584f are parts to which the sealing sticker 581 is pasted.
When the board case 550B is housed inside the bracket 584, the case-side seal affixing portion 569 and the bracket-side seal affixing portion 584f are continuous. At this time, the case-side seal pasting section 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting section 584f constitute substantially the same plane as the surface (the front surface portion 566 of the front cover 560) that faces the component surface of the main control board 530 in the board case 550B. Then, the seal 581 is pasted so as to straddle the case-side seal pasting section 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting section 584f. Note that the seal 581 is the same as in the twenty-eighth embodiment (A).

In the twenty-eighth embodiment (C), when opening the board case 550B, the sealing seal 581 is peeled off, the caulking part is destroyed, and the board case 550B is taken out from inside the bracket 584 (the board case 550B is removed from the bracket 584). ). Thereby, the board case 550B can be opened (the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are disengaged), and the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550B can be taken out.
Therefore, unless the seal 581 is peeled off and the caulked portion is destroyed, the board case 550B cannot be taken out from inside the bracket 584, the board case 550B cannot be opened, and the main control board 530 cannot be taken out. I can't do it either.

Furthermore, sealing sticker 581 is configured to leave a trace when it is peeled off, and the crimped portion is also configured to leave a trace when it is destroyed, so that when board case 550B is removed from bracket 584 or when board case 550B is opened, the traces will remain.
Furthermore, when the sealing seal 581 is cut with a blade along the seam between the case side seal attachment portion 569 and the bracket side seal attachment portion 584f without peeling off the sealing seal 581 (while the sealing seal 581 is still attached) and the board case 550B is removed from the bracket 584, traces of the cut with the blade will remain on the sealing seal 581.

Furthermore, when the board case 550B is forcibly removed from the bracket 584 without peeling off the sealing sticker 581 (with the sealing sticker 581 still attached), the alignment between the case side sealing part 569 and the bracket side sealing part 584f Since the seal 581 is damaged or broken by the eye, traces thereof will remain on the seal 581.
In this way, when the board case 550B is removed from the bracket 584, traces thereof will remain on the seal 581. That is, it is not possible to remove the board case 550B from the bracket 584 without leaving any traces on the seal 581. Therefore, by visually checking the state of the seal 581, it is possible to check whether the board case 550B has been removed from the bracket 584.

167(1) and (2), in the 28th embodiment (C), the bracket 584 is attached to the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10. At this time, as shown in FIG. 168, the bracket 584 is attached to be rotatable with respect to the front surface (inner surface) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 about a rotation axis provided near its left end (left edge 584e).
Furthermore, as described above, the front cover 560 and rear cover 570 of the board case 550B and the bracket 584 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin.

Then, in a state where the board case 550B is attached to the bracket 584, from the rear (outer surface) side of the back plate portion 584a of the bracket 584, the case-side seal pasting portion 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting portion 584f, the joints thereof, It is configured so that the seal 581 affixed to these can be visually recognized (confirmed visually).
Therefore, in a state where the board case 550B is attached to the bracket 584, the case-side seal pasting section 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting section 584f, as well as these The joints and the seal 581 attached to these can be visually confirmed.

In addition, from the upper surface (outer surface) side of the upper edge 584b of the bracket 584, and from the right surface (outer surface) side of the right edge 584d of the bracket 584, the case side seal attaching portion 569 and the bracket side seal attaching portion 584f can be seen. It is configured so that the joints of the parts and the seal 581 affixed thereto can be visually recognized (confirmed visually).
Therefore, from the upper wall 571a side of the rear cover 570 and the right side wall 571c side of the rear cover 570, the case-side seal pasting portion 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting portion 584f, their joints, and the The seal 581 can be visually confirmed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 168, when the bracket 584 is rotated relative to the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the right end (right edge 584d) of the bracket 584 is pulled out toward the front, the line of sight D11 in FIG. When viewed in the direction of The seal 581 can be easily visually confirmed.

Furthermore, even if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 may be peeled off, or if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the genuine seal 581, or if the false seal 582 is pasted on top of the genuine seal 581, the genuine seal 581 may be peeled off, or along the seam between the case-side seal pasting portion 569 and the bracket-side seal pasting portion 584f. It is possible to visually check the traces of the regular seal 581 being cut with a knife or being damaged or broken due to the seam between the case side seal pasting part 569 and the bracket side seal pasting part 584f. be able to.

Although the twenty-eighth embodiment (C) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and modifications as shown in the modification of the twenty-eighth embodiment (A) are possible. .
Further, the first to twenty-eighth embodiments (C) are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<29th embodiment>
The twenty-ninth embodiment relates to an air hole (also referred to as an "air hole") provided in a board case.
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, a board case 700 that houses a sub-control board 540 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 700 of the twenty-ninth embodiment can be applied to a case that houses the main control board 530 and other control boards equipped with CPUs.

Further, the board case 700 of the 29th embodiment is a case that stores not only the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500 but also the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. Can be applied.
Note that the second embodiment, the twentieth embodiment, the twenty-eighth embodiment, and the twenty-ninth embodiment all relate to the board case, but each of them may be implemented independently, or they may be combined as appropriate. May be implemented.

FIG. 169 is a perspective view of a board case 700 in the twenty-ninth embodiment.
Here, the "front (front) side" refers to the mounting surface (component side) of the electronic components on the sub-control board 540, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the sub-control board 540. Refers to the side opposite to the mounting surface (solder side).
Further, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the electronic component mounting surface of the sub-control board 540 is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the upper side when the electronic component mounting surface of the sub-control board 540 is viewed from the front. Points to the bottom of. Furthermore, the "right side" refers to the right side when the electronic component mounting surface of the sub-control board 540 is viewed from the front, and the "left side" refers to the right side when the electronic component mounting surface of the sub-control board 540 is viewed from the front. Point to the left side.

As shown in FIG. 169, the board case 700 includes a front cover 710 that covers the electronic component mounting surface (component surface) of the sub-control board 540, and a front cover 710 that covers the electronic component mounting surface (component surface) of the sub-control board 540 (solder surface). ). When the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined, a board case 700 that can house the sub-control board 540 therein is obtained.
Note that the front cover 710 is also referred to as a "first cover 710" or "upper case 710," and the rear cover 720 is also referred to as a "second cover 720" or "lower case 720."
Further, in the board case 700 (a state in which the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined), the side where the sub-control board 540 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 710 is formed into a box shape with an open rear surface. Further, the front cover 710 has a front portion 711 that faces substantially parallel to the electronic component mounting surface (component surface) of the sub-control board 540. Furthermore, the front cover 710 includes an upper wall 712 extending rearward from the upper edge of the front section 711, a lower wall 713 extending rearward from the lower edge of the front section 711, and a right side of the front section 711. It has a right side wall 714 extending rearward from the edge of the front part 711, and a left side wall 715 extending rearward from the left edge of the front part 711.

Further, electronic components such as a sub CPU 540a, RWM, ROM, etc. are mounted on the component side of the sub control board 540, and a connector 540b (board side connector 540b) is mounted.
Furthermore, a cooling fan 717 for cooling the sub CPU 540a and a fan intake hole 718 for taking in air sent by the cooling fan 717 are provided at a position corresponding to the sub CPU 540a on the front cover 710. There is.

Furthermore, a connector recess 716 for harness connection is provided in the front cover 710 at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 540b.
This connector recess 716 connects the bottom surface 716a that covers the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the bottom surface 716a and the front surface 711, and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700. It has a side surface portion 716b.

The bottom surface portion 716a is a portion for covering the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and is formed into a substantially flat plate shape. When the component surface of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, the bottom surface portion 716a is formed to cover the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540.
Furthermore, an opening 716c for exposing the board-side connector 540b is provided at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 540b on the bottom surface portion 716a. When the component surface of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, a part of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700 through the opening 716c.

The side surface portion 716 b connects the bottom surface portion 716 a and the front surface portion 711 , and also functions as a side wall that separates the inside and outside of the board case 700 .
When the component side of the sub-control board 540 is covered with the front cover 710, the side portion 716b is positioned at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board-side connector 540b, and is formed so as to extend in a direction approximately perpendicular to the component side of the sub-control board 540.

Furthermore, an air hole 716d that communicates the inside and outside of the board case 700 is provided in the side surface portion 716b.
Furthermore, the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right wall 714, and the left wall 715 are also provided with air holes 716d that communicate the inside and outside of the board case 700.
The air sent into the board case 700 by the cooling fan 717 flows through the air holes 716d provided in the side wall 716b, the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right wall 714, and the left wall 715 of the board case 700. It is formed to be discharged (blown out) to the outside.

Further, the rear cover 720 is formed into a plate shape that closes an opening on the rear surface of the front cover 710.
When the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are combined, the front part 711 of the front cover 710 and the rear cover 720 are formed to face each other substantially in parallel.
Hereinafter, the relationship between the air hole 716d provided in the side surface portion 716b, the board-side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 from the opening 716c, and the harness 730 connected to this board-side connector 540b will be described in more detail. explain.

First, based on FIG. 170(1), a case where the air hole 716d opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b will be described.
As shown in FIG. 170(1), a board-side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540 (the upward facing surface in FIG. 170(1)).
Furthermore, a connector recess 716 is provided in the front cover 710 of the board case 700A at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b. This connector recess 716 has a bottom part 716a that covers the periphery of the board-side connector 540b on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and a side surface that connects the bottom part 716a and the front part 711 and separates the inside and outside of the board case 700A. 716b.

Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700A through the opening 716c.
Furthermore, the side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery of the opening 716c and the board-side connector 540b, and extends substantially perpendicularly to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. Further, the side surface portion 716b is provided with an air hole 716d that communicates the inside and outside of the board case 700A.

Further, the harness 730 is for connecting the sub-control board 540 and other control boards, etc., and includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a wire provided at the tips of these lead wires 730a. A connector 730b (harness side connector 730b). Furthermore, the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. Further, the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b. Furthermore, when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the side of the harness-side connector 730b opposite to the board-side connector 540b.

In the example shown in FIG. 170(1), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b in the side surface portion 716b.
Specifically, in FIG. 170(1), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the . That is, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference, the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is set higher than the height of the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b.

In addition, in FIG. 170(1), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is. That is, with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height of the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b.
Further, the air hole 716d is arranged to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to a position corresponding to approximately the middle height between the top and bottom of the board-side connector 540b in FIG. 170(1). It is formed.

That is, the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to the height of the lower end of the board-side connector 540b to a height approximately midway between the upper and lower ends of the board-side connector 540b with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. It is formed so that it reaches a position corresponding to the height.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 170(1), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b in the side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the air sent into the inside of the board case 700A by the cooling fan 717 flows through the air hole 716d provided in the side surface 716b into the board case 700A, as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 170(1). It is discharged (blown out) to the outside.
The air discharged (blown out) from the air hole 716d hits the side surface of the board-side connector 540b and cools the board-side connector 540b.

Here, the lead wire 730a, the harness-side connector 730b, and the board-side connector 540b may generate heat due to the current flowing through them. In particular, the lead wire 730a for supplying power tends to generate heat because a relatively large current flows through it.
Further, when the lead wire 730a generates heat, there is a risk that the conductor and coating that constitute the lead wire 730a may deteriorate or melt.
Furthermore, when the harness-side connector 730b and the board-side connector 540b generate heat, they may deteriorate or expand or contract, causing the connectors to adhere to each other, making it difficult to separate the connectors from each other. Furthermore, there is a risk that the housings of these connectors may be deformed or that the terminals of these connectors may be welded together.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 170(1), an air hole 716d is provided at a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b in the side surface portion 716b, and as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 170(1), The air blown out from the air hole 716d hits the side surface of the board-side connector 540b, thereby cooling the board-side connector 540b.
Even if the board-side connector 540b generates heat, the board-side connector 540b may deteriorate, the housing of the board-side connector 540b may be deformed, or the terminals of the board-side connector 540b may be welded to the terminals of the harness-side connector 730b. This is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b. The distance "d" is set to be large enough to fit a human finger.
Here, for example, for maintenance (maintenance inspection) of the sub-control board 540, it may be necessary to remove (separate) the harness-side connector 730b from the board-side connector 540b. At this time, if the space between the side surface 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b is too narrow to fit your fingers, it will be difficult to remove (separate) the harness-side connector 730b from the board-side connector 540b. It ends up.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 170(1), the distance "d" is large enough to fit a human finger between the side surface 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b. There is a gap between As a result, when performing maintenance on the sub-control board 540, etc., the fingers can be inserted between the side surface 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, and from the board-side connector 540b to the harness-side This makes it easy to remove the connector 730b.

Further, as an engagement means for engaging the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, an engaging claw or a locking mechanism is provided, and the engaging claw or locking mechanism is connected to the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector. It may be arranged on the side surface of 730b opposite to the side surface portion 716b.
In such a case, by providing a distance "d" between the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b and the side surface portion 716b, the engaging claw or locking mechanism can be easily inserted. It can be made easier to operate with fingers, and maintenance of the sub-control board 540 can be made easier.

Next, based on FIG. 170(2), a case where the air hole 716d opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b will be described.
As shown in FIG. 170, a board-side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700B. This is the same as (1).

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700B is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700B are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700B through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 170(2), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b in the side surface portion 716b.

Specifically, in FIG. 170(2), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. It is set higher than the height to the lower end of the sub-control board 540 and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. That is, with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is higher than the height of the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, and the height of the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. It is set lower than that.

In addition, in FIG. 170(2), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, and The height is set lower than the height from the component surface of the control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b. That is, with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height of the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, and lower than the height of the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly higher than the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b in FIG. It is formed to reach up to
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 170(2), the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the side connector 730b.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 170(2), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the harness-side connector 730b in the side surface portion 716b.

In the example shown in FIG. 170(2), as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 170(2), the harness side is Cool connector 730b.
As a result, even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat, the harness side connector 730b may deteriorate, the housing of the harness side connector 730b may be deformed, or the terminals of the harness side connector 730b may be welded to the terminals of the board side connector 540b. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

Next, based on FIG. 171(3), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b. do.
The board side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the connector recess 716 is provided at the position corresponding to the board side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700C, as shown in FIG. 170(1). It is similar to

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700C is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700C are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700C through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 171(3), the air hole 716d is formed to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b in the side surface portion 716b. has been done.

Specifically, in FIG. 171(3), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. It is set higher than the height to the lower end of the sub-control board 540 and lower than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b.
In addition, in FIG. 171(3), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, and The height is set lower than the height from the component surface of the control board 540 to the upper end of the harness side connector 730b.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly higher than the upper and lower middle of the board-side connector 540b in FIG. It is formed so that it reaches all the way to the surface.
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 171(3), the opening range of the air hole 716d corresponds to a height slightly above the midpoint between the upper and lower ends of the board-side connector 540b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly lower than the middle between the upper end and the lower end of the harness side connector 730b.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 171(3), the air hole 716d extends from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b in the side surface portion 716b. It's open.
Note that the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the board-side connector 540b to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. What is necessary is just to form it so that it may reach the position corresponding to any height between and the lower end.

In the example shown in FIG. 171(3), as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. The connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are cooled.
Thereby, even if the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b generate heat, it is possible to prevent these from deteriorating, their housings from deforming, and their terminals from welding together.

Next, based on FIG. 171(4), a case where the air hole 716d opens only at a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a will be described.
The board side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the connector recess 716 is provided at the position corresponding to the board side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700D, as shown in FIG. 170(1). It is similar to

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700D is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700D are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700D through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b.

Specifically, in FIG. 171(4), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the .
In addition, in FIG. 171(4), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 171(4), there are no leads at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 and a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side part 716b. A line 730a is located.

In addition, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly higher than the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b in FIG. It is formed to reach up to
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to the midway height of 730a.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 171(4), the air hole 716d is opened only at a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b.

In the example shown in FIG. 171(4), as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 171(4), the lead wire is Cool down 730a.
Thereby, even if the lead wire 730a generates heat, it is possible to prevent the conductor and coating that constitute the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting.
Furthermore, by separating the plurality of lead wires 730a, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172(5), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.
Similar to Figure 170 (1), a board side connector 540b is mounted on the component side of the sub-control board 540, and a connector recess 716 is provided at a position corresponding to the board side connector 540b on the front cover 710 of the board case 700E.

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700E is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700E are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700E through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, the harness 730 has a plurality of separate lead wires 730a and a harness side connector 730b provided at the end of each of the lead wires, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power, and the harness side connector 730b is connected to the board side connector 540b, and when the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b are connected, the plurality of lead wires 730a extend from the harness side connector 730b on the side opposite the board side connector 540b, similar to FIG. 170(1).

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 172(5), the air hole 716d is opened from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a on the side surface 716b. ing.

Specifically, in FIG. 172(5), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the .
In addition, in FIG. 172(5), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 172(5), there are no leads at the position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 and at the position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side part 716b. A line 730a is located.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d extends from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the board side connector 540b to the front part 711 of the front cover 710 (the surface facing the component surface of the sub-control board 540 in the board case 700E). It is formed to reach up to
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 172(5), the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the board-side connector 540b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the line 730a.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 172(5), the air hole 716d is opened so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface 716b. are doing.
Note that the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the board-side connector 540b with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to a midway point of the lead wire 730a. What is necessary is just to form it so that it may reach the position corresponding to any height.

In the example shown in FIG. 172(5), as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. The connector 540b, harness side connector 730b, and lead wire 730a are cooled.
Thereby, even if the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b generate heat, it is possible to prevent these from deteriorating, their housings from deforming, and their terminals from welding together.

Furthermore, since the plurality of lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d. By cooling the lead wire 730a, even if the lead wire 730a generates heat, it is possible to prevent the conductor and coating forming the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting.

Next, based on FIG. 172(6), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a. .
The board-side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the connector recess 716 is provided at the position corresponding to the board-side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700F, as shown in FIG. 170(1). It is similar to

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700F is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700F are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700F through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 172(6), the air hole 716d is opened from a position corresponding to the height of the harness-side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface 716b. ing.

Specifically, in FIG. 172(6), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the .
In addition, in FIG. 172(6), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 172(6), there are no leads at the position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 and at the position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side part 716b. A line 730a is located.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly higher than the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b in FIG. It is formed to reach up to
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 172(6), the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the harness side connector 730b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the line 730a.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 172(6), the air hole 716d is opened so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b. are doing.
Note that the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference, to a position in the middle of the lead wire 730a. What is necessary is just to form it so that it may reach the position corresponding to any height.

In the example shown in Figure 172 (6), the harness side connector 730b and the lead wires 730a are cooled by air blown out from the air hole 716d in the side portion 716b to the outside of the board case 700F, as indicated by the arrow pointing to the left in Figure 172 (6).
This prevents deterioration of the harness side connector 730b, deformation of the housing of the harness side connector 730b, and welding of the terminals of the harness side connector 730b to the terminals of the board side connector 540b even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat.

Furthermore, since the plurality of lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d. By cooling the lead wire 730a, even if the lead wire 730a generates heat, it is possible to prevent the conductor and coating forming the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting.

Next, based on FIG. 173 (7), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed from a position corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a. .
The board side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the connector recess 716 is provided at the position corresponding to the board side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700G, as shown in FIG. 170(1). It is similar to

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. It is also the same as in FIG. 170(1) that the board case 700G is connected to the front part 711 and the inside and outside of the board case 700G are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700G through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Also, similar to FIG. 170 (1), there is a gap of a distance "d" between the side portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b, which is large enough for a person's finger to fit through.
In the example shown in FIG. 173(7), the air hole 716d opens from a position on the side portion 716b corresponding to the height of the board side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a.

Specifically, in FIG. 173 (7), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the .
In addition, in FIG. 173 (7), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 173(7), there are no leads at a position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front surface part 711 of the front cover 710 and a position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side surface part 716b. A line 730a is located.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the board-side connector 540b in FIG. It is formed to reach up to
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (7), the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to a height slightly below the upper end of the board-side connector 540b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the line 730a.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 173(7), the air hole 716d is opened so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the board-side connector 540b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b. are doing.
Note that the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the board-side connector 540b with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to a midway point of the lead wire 730a. What is necessary is just to form it so that it may reach the position corresponding to any height.

In addition, in FIG. 173 (7), a part of the housing of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b is cut out, and the board-side terminal 540c provided inside the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are shown. A harness side terminal 730c provided inside the is illustrated.
As shown in FIG. 173(7), the air hole 716d opens at a position corresponding to the contact point between the board-side terminal 540c of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side terminal 730c of the harness-side connector 730b.

In the example shown in FIG. 173 (7), as shown by the arrow pointing left in FIG. The connector 540b, the harness-side connector 730b, and the lead wire 730a are cooled, and furthermore, the contact point between the board-side terminal 540c and the harness-side terminal 730c is cooled.
Thereby, even if the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b generate heat, it is possible to prevent these from deteriorating or deforming their housings. In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 173(7), since the contact between the board side terminal 540c and the harness side terminal 730c is cooled, it is possible to prevent the board side terminal 540c and the harness side terminal 730c from welding. can.

Furthermore, since the plurality of lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d. By cooling the lead wire 730a, even if the lead wire 730a generates heat, it is possible to prevent the conductor and coating forming the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting.

Next, based on FIG. 173(8), a case will be described in which the air hole 716d is formed from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a. .
The board side connector 540b is mounted on the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the connector recess 716 is provided at the position corresponding to the board side connector 540b in the front cover 710 of the board case 700H, as shown in FIG. 170(1). It is similar to

The connector recess 716 has a bottom surface 716a and a side surface 716b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), the board case 700H is connected to the front part 711, and the inside and outside of the board case 700H are separated.
Furthermore, an opening 716c is provided in the bottom surface portion 716a, and a portion of the board-side connector 540b is exposed to the outside of the board case 700G through the opening 716c. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a side surface portion 716b is arranged at a position corresponding to the periphery, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Further, the harness 730 includes a plurality of separated lead wires 730a and a harness-side connector 730b provided at the tips of these leads, and the plurality of lead wires 730a include a lead wire 730a for supplying power. The harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b, and when the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b are connected, the harness-side connector 730b is connected to the board-side connector 540b on the opposite side of the board-side connector 540b. Similarly to FIG. 170(1), a plurality of lead wires 730a extend from.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170(1), a distance "d" is provided between the side surface portion 716b of the front cover 710 and the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, such that a person's finger can fit there. It is similar to
In the example shown in FIG. 173(8), the air hole 716d is opened from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b. ing.

Specifically, in FIG. 173(8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the top surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 is the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the harness-side connector 730b. The height is set higher than the height to the top of the .
In addition, in FIG. 173 (8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the side surface portion 716b is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the harness-side connector 730b. There is.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 173(8), there are no leads at the position corresponding to the height of the upper surface (outer surface) of the front part 711 of the front cover 710 and at the position corresponding to the height of the upper end of the side part 716b. A line 730a is located.

Furthermore, the air hole 716d is inserted from a position slightly higher than the upper and lower middle of the harness-side connector 730b in FIG. It is formed so that it reaches all the way to the surface.
That is, in the example shown in FIG. 173(8), the opening range of the air hole 716d corresponds to a height slightly above the midpoint between the upper end and the lower end of the harness side connector 730b with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540. The lead wire 730a is formed to reach a position corresponding to a height slightly above the lower end of the lead wire 730a.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 173(8), the air hole 716d is opened so as to extend from a position corresponding to the height of the harness side connector 730b to a position corresponding to the height of the lead wire 730a in the side surface portion 716b. are doing.
Note that the opening range of the air hole 716d is from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the harness-side connector 730b, with the component surface of the sub-control board 540 as a reference, to a position in the middle of the lead wire 730a. What is necessary is just to form it so that it may reach the position corresponding to any height.

In the example shown in FIG. 173(8), the board-side connector 540b is formed in an L-shape, and has a base 540d extending substantially parallel to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and a sub-control from one end of the base 540d. It has an upright portion 540e extending substantially perpendicular to the component surface of the board 540. The base portion 540d is a portion fixed to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, and the upright portion 540e is a portion that supports the harness-side connector 730b.

Further, the upright portion 540e supports the side surface of the harness-side connector 730b opposite to the side surface portion 716b. Furthermore, in FIG. 173(8), the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the upper end of the standing portion 540e is set higher than the height from the component surface of the sub-control board 540 to the lower end of the air hole 716d. There is. That is, with respect to the component surface of the sub-control board 540, the height of the upper end of the upright portion 540e is set higher than the height of the lower end of the air hole 716d.

In the example shown in FIG. 173(8), as shown by the arrow pointing to the left in FIG. 173(8), the harness side is The connector 730b and lead wire 730a are cooled.
As a result, even if the harness side connector 730b generates heat, the harness side connector 730b may deteriorate, the housing of the harness side connector 730b may be deformed, or the terminals of the harness side connector 730b may be welded to the terminals of the board side connector 540b. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

Furthermore, since the plurality of lead wires 730a are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires 730a can be efficiently cooled by the air blown out from the air holes 716d. By cooling the lead wire 730a, even if the lead wire 730a generates heat, it is possible to prevent the conductor and coating forming the lead wire 730a from deteriorating or melting.

Although the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the cooling fan 717 is provided at the position corresponding to the sub CPU 540a on the front cover 710, but the cooling fan 717 may not be provided and natural wind may be used. The natural wind here may be one that utilizes air flow from an air conditioner in a hall (store) environment, or, in a slot machine, one that uses air flow generated by the rotation of the reels. It's okay.
(2) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the harness 730 uses a plurality of separate lead wires 730a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of lead wires may be arranged in parallel on the same plane and adjacent to each other. A flat cable or ribbon cable with matching lead wires welded together may also be used.

(3) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the harness 730 included the lead wire 730a for supplying power, but may not include the lead wire 730a for supplying power.
(4) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the air holes 716d are provided in the side wall 716b, the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right wall 714, and the left wall 715, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
The air holes 716d only need to be provided at least in the side surface portion 716b, and therefore, the air holes 716d do not need to be provided in the upper wall 712, the lower wall 713, the right wall 714, and the left wall 715. As a result, the air sent into the board case 700 by the cooling fan 717 is discharged (blown out) to the outside of the board case 700 only from the air hole 716d provided in the side surface 716b, so that the board side connector 540b, The cooling effect of the harness side connector 730b and the lead wire 730a can be enhanced.

(5) For example, a board-side connector 540b is provided on the underside of the sub-control board 540, and an opening 716c is provided on the underside of the board case 700 to expose the board-side connector 540b.
Furthermore, a side surface portion 716b is provided at a position corresponding to the periphery of the board side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 through the opening 716c, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, an air hole 716d is provided in the side surface portion 716b located on the lower side of the board case 700, and an air hole 716d is also provided in the upper wall 712 located on the upper side of the board case 700 (on the side opposite to the side surface portion 716b). Further, the side surface portion 716b and the upper wall 712 are set to face each other substantially in parallel.
Further, the air warmed inside the board case 700 is discharged to the outside of the board case 700 from an air hole 716d provided in the upper wall 712, and is discharged from the inside of the board case 700 from an air hole 716d provided in the side wall 716b. Formed so that air can be taken in.

That is, air is taken into the inside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the lower side of the board case 700, and air is discharged to the outside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the upper side of the board case 700. Shape to allow air flow. Then, the board-side connector 540b, the harness-side connector 730b, and the lead wire 730a may be cooled by this air flow.
In this case, the cooling fan 717 may or may not be provided. Furthermore, the air holes 716d may be provided on the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715, and the air holes 716d may not be provided on the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715.

(6) Contrary to the above case, a board-side connector 540b is provided above the sub-control board 540, and an opening 716c for exposing the board-side connector 540b is provided above the board case 700.
Further, a side surface portion 716b is provided at a position corresponding to the periphery of the board side connector 540b exposed to the outside of the board case 700 from the opening portion 716c, and an air hole 716d is provided in this side surface portion 716b.

Furthermore, an air hole 716d is also provided in the lower wall 713 on the lower side of the board case 700.
Then, the air warmed inside the board case 700 is discharged to the outside of the board case 700 from the air hole 716d provided in the upper side surface portion 716b of the board case 700, and the air is discharged from the lower side wall of the lower side of the board case 700. The substrate case 700 is formed so that air is taken into the inside of the board case 700 through an air hole 716d provided in the board case 713.

That is, air is taken into the inside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the lower side of the board case 700, and air is discharged to the outside of the board case 700 through the air hole 716d provided on the upper side of the board case 700. Shape to allow air flow.
Then, the board-side connector 540b, the harness-side connector 730b, and the lead wire 730a may be cooled by this air flow.
In this case as well, the cooling fan 717 may or may not be provided. Furthermore, the air holes 716d may be provided on the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715, and the air holes 716d may not be provided on the right side wall 714 and the left side wall 715.

(7) For example, a heat sink may be provided in addition to the cooling fan 717 to cool the sub CPU 540a. Further, a heat sink may be provided without providing the cooling fan 717.
(8) For example, the distance from the sub CPU 540a to the air hole 716d provided in the side surface 716b located around the board side connector 540b is the distance from the sub CPU 540a to the right side wall 714 (board side connector 540b The distance can be set larger than the distance to the air hole 716d provided on the side wall located on the opposite side.
This makes the temperature of the air discharged from the air hole 716d provided in the side surface 716b located around the board side connector 540b lower than the temperature of the air discharged from the air hole 716d provided in the right side wall 714. can do.

(9) For example, the board-side connector 540b can be structured to cover (hide) 80% or more of the surface of the harness-side connector 730b. Thereby, the harness side connector 730b can be protected by the board side connector 540b.
(10) For example, an engagement claw or a locking mechanism is provided as an engagement means for engaging the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b, and this engagement claw or locking mechanism is used to connect the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b. It can be arranged on the side surface of the harness side connector 730b facing the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b. Thereby, the air discharged from the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b hits the engaging claw or the locking mechanism, and priority can be given to cooling the engaging claw or the locking mechanism. As a result, when the game machine administrator (hall clerk) disengages the engaging pawl or lock mechanism for maintenance (maintenance inspection) etc. of the sub-control board 540, the overheated engaging pawl or lock The engagement can be safely released without touching the mechanism.

Furthermore, in order to enhance the cooling effect of the engaging pawl or locking mechanism, it is preferable to reduce (shorten) the distance between the air hole 716d of the side surface 716b and the engaging pawl or locking mechanism. If the space between the side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b is too narrow to fit a finger into, it will be difficult to release the engagement of the engagement claw or locking mechanism.
Therefore, by providing a distance "d" between the side surface portion 716b, the board-side connector 540b, and the harness-side connector 730b, the engagement of the engagement claw or locking mechanism can be released. In turn, maintenance (maintenance inspection) of the sub-control board 540 by the game machine manager (hall clerk) can be made easier.

In addition, contrary to the case described above, the locking mechanism for engaging the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b is arranged opposite to the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b of the board side connector 540b and the harness side connector 730b. Can be placed on the side of the side. Thereby, the air discharged from the air hole 716d of the side surface portion 716b hits the side surface opposite to the locking mechanism, so that cooling of the terminals of the board-side connector 540b and the harness-side connector 730b can be prioritized.
The first to twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
The 30th embodiment relates to a board case housing a main control board and a two-dimensional code attached to a main CPU mounted on the main control board.
In the 30th embodiment, a board case 550 that houses a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 30th embodiment is applicable to a case that houses not only the main control board 530 but also the payout control board 520, the sub-control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 500. can do.

Further, the board case 550 of the 30th embodiment is a case for storing not only the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500 but also the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. Can be applied.
Note that the second embodiment, the twentieth embodiment, the twenty-eighth embodiment, the twenty-ninth embodiment, and the thirtyth embodiment all relate to the board case, but each of them may be implemented independently. These methods may be combined as appropriate.

FIG. 174(1) is a front view of the substrate case 550 in the 30th embodiment, and FIG. 174(2) is a bottom view of the substrate case 550 in the 30th embodiment.
Here, the "front (top) side" refers to the mounting side (component side) of the main control board 530 on which electronic components such as the main CPU 530g are mounted, and the "rear (bottom) side" refers to the side opposite the mounting side of the main control board 530 on which electronic components are mounted (solder side).
Additionally, "upper side" refers to the upper side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and "lower side" refers to the lower side when the solder side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front.
Furthermore, "right side" refers to the right side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, and "left side" refers to the left side when the component side of the main control board 530 is viewed from the front.

In FIG. 174(1), the "front (front) side" refers to the front side of FIG. 174(1), and the "rear (back) side" refers to the back side of FIG. 174(1). Furthermore, "upper side" refers to the upper side of Figure 174 (1), "lower side" refers to the lower side of Figure 174 (1), and "right side" refers to the right side of Figure 174 (1). The "left side" refers to the left side in FIG. 174(1).

As shown in FIGS. 174(1) and (2), the board case 550 includes a front cover 560 that covers the component side of the main control board 530, and a rear cover 570 that covers the solder side of the main control board 530. . When the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are combined, it becomes a board case 550 in which the main control board 530 can be housed.
Note that the front cover 560 is also referred to as the "first cover 560" or "upper case 560," and the rear cover 570 is also referred to as the "second cover 570" or "lower case 570."

Further, both the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are formed by injection molding using transparent resin. Thereby, the main control board 530 housed inside the board case 550 is visible from the outside of the board case 550.
In the board case 550 (front cover 560 and rear cover 570 combined), the side where the main control board 530 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside".

The front cover 560 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long, substantially rectangular parallelepiped box with an open rear surface, and includes a front section 566 facing substantially parallel to the component surface of the main control board 530, and a front section 566 facing rearward from the upper edge of the front section 566. a lower wall 565b extending rearward from the lower edge of the front section 556; a right wall 565c extending rearward from the right edge of the front section 556; Similar to the twenty-eighth embodiment, the left side wall 565d extends rearward from the edge.

The rear cover 570 is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front, and includes a rear surface portion 573 facing approximately parallel to the solder surface of the main control board 530, and a rear surface portion 573 facing forward from the upper edge of the rear surface portion 573. an upper wall 571a extending toward the rear surface portion 573; a lower wall 571b extending forward from the lower edge of the rear surface portion 573; a right side wall 571c extending forward from the right edge of the rear surface portion 573; It is also similar to the twenty-eighth embodiment that it includes a left side wall 571d extending forward from the left edge.

Furthermore, in the 30th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 174(1) and (2), a main CPU 530g is mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530. This main CPU 530g is formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a board-facing surface 530h that faces the component surface of the main control board 530, and an outward-facing surface 530i located on the opposite side to this board-facing surface 530h. have. The outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is substantially parallel to the component surface of the main control board 530, and is further substantially parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.
Furthermore, in addition to the main CPU 530g, a large number of electronic components such as RWM and ROM are mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530, and are used for harness connection with other control boards or electronic devices (not shown). connectors have been implemented.

Further, in the 30th embodiment, the main control board 530 is housed inside the rear cover 570 so that the inner surface of the rear surface part 573 of the rear cover 570 and the solder surface of the main control board 530 face each other. Then, the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to the rear cover 570 with screws. Thereafter, the inner surface of the front cover 560 and the inner surface of the rear cover 570 are faced to each other, and the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are fitted together to form a board case 550 that houses the main control board 530 therein.
Although the description is omitted in the 30th embodiment, the front cover 560 and the rear cover 570 are caulked (sealed) using a caulking section, and the seal attachment section (first seal attachment section 567, second seal attachment section 574) ), the seal 581 is the same as in the twenty-eighth embodiment.

In the 30th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 174(1) and (2), the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530) has a two-dimensional A code 551a is attached, a two-dimensional code 530k is also attached to the component side of the main control board 530, and a two-dimensional code 530j is also attached to the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

Specifically, the management sticker 551 on which the two-dimensional code 551a is printed is affixed to the surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, so that the management sticker 551 is attached to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550. A two-dimensional code 551a is attached.
Further, the two-dimensional code 530k is directly printed on the component surface of the main control board 530, so that the two-dimensional code 530k is attached to the component surface of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 530j is directly printed on the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g, so that the two-dimensional code 530j is attached to the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

Since the main CPU 530g is an important electronic component that affects ball output, from the viewpoint of ensuring security, the board case 550 that houses the main control board 530 is hardly provided with air holes. For this reason, the air inside the board case 550 tends to warm up, so if a sticker printed with the two-dimensional code 530j is pasted on the surface of the main CPU 530g, the heat emitted from the main CPU 530g and the warm air inside the board case 550 will be absorbed. Air may cause the seal to peel off. Furthermore, there is a risk that the peeled off sticker may adhere to other electronic components and cause a fire. For this reason, a two-dimensional code 530j is printed directly on the surface of the main CPU 530g.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 174(1), when the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are viewed from the front, the management seal 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are arranged so that they do not overlap but are close to each other.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 174(1), when the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are viewed from the front, the board case 550 is The attached two-dimensional code 551a and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g do not overlap, but are arranged close to each other.

Furthermore, as described above, the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is substantially parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.
Therefore, the two-dimensional code 530j attached (printed) to the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is approximately parallel to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, and furthermore, the It is also substantially parallel to the two-dimensional code 551a attached (attached) to the front surface 566 of the cover 560.

Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 includes information regarding the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the model (model) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500, etc. It includes information regarding the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
Furthermore, like the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530 also contains information regarding the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 500. This includes information regarding the pachinko game machine 500, such as information and information regarding the serial number of the pachinko game machine 500.
Further, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g includes information regarding the main CPU 530g, such as information regarding the manufacturer of the main CPU 530g, information regarding the model number of the main CPU 530g, and information regarding the serial number of the main CPU 530g.

Here, as explained in the ninth embodiment (B) and the twenty-third embodiment, the main CPU 530g controls the progress of the game and also generates a random value when a game ball enters the starting hole 532. It is an important electronic component that executes the jackpot lottery, special symbol lottery, variable pattern lottery, etc. based on the acquired random numbers. When the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is read, information on the performance of the main CPU 530g, jackpot lottery, etc. will be analyzed from the information contained therein, and there is a risk that fraudulent activity will be exploited for gaming purposes. There is.

Therefore, in the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
Similarly, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
Specifically, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is printed with black ink on the surface of a white (white background) management seal 551. In this way, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is printed with black ink on a white background, so the color contrast with the background color is large (high), so the two-dimensional code reading device It is relatively easy to read.

Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530 is printed with white ink on the surface of the green main control board 530. In this way, the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530 is printed with white ink on a green background, so the color contrast with the background color is large (high). The reading device makes it relatively easy to read.
On the other hand, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is printed with light gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g made of dark gray resin. In this way, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is printed with light gray ink on a dark gray background, so the color contrast with the background color is small (low). It is relatively difficult to read depending on the reading device.

Therefore, when using the same reading device, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
Similarly, when using the same reading device, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set to be more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
Note that, contrary to the case described above, the two-dimensional code 530j may be printed with dark gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g formed of light gray resin. In this way, even if dark gray ink is printed on a light gray background, the color contrast with the background color is reduced, making it difficult to read the two-dimensional code 530j.

Further, the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set smaller than the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
Here, the "code area" refers to an area in which a plurality of information display unit cells are arranged (arranged) in a matrix, as described in, for example, JP 2019-175033A.
That is, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
As a result, when using the same reading device, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.

Similarly, the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set smaller than the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
That is, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.
As a result, when using the same reading device, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 530k attached to the main control board 530.

Further, when the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the component surface of the main control board 530, and the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g are viewed from the front, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is It is located further back (farther) than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the case 550.
Therefore, when reading a two-dimensional code from the same position with the same reading device, the distance from the reading device to the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is the same as the distance from the reading device to the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the board case 550. Since it is larger (further) than the distance to the two-dimensional code 551a, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.

In addition, the main control board 530 on which the main CPU 530g is mounted is housed inside the board case 550. Although the board case 550 is formed using a transparent resin, when reading the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g, it is read through the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550. .
On the other hand, the management seal 551 on which the two-dimensional code 551a is printed is attached to the surface of the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550. Therefore, when reading the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550, it can be read without passing through the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.

When reading the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g through the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550, the focus of the reading device is not on the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g. , it fits toward the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.
Therefore, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
In other words, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 is easier to read than the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g, so the Pachinko game machine included in the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 500 can be read easily and reliably.

In this way, when using the same reading device, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read than the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550.
This can prevent the information included in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally acquired (stolen).

Although not shown in Figures 174 (1) and (2), light-emitting elements (LEDs) that turn on or off in response to signals from various sensors connected to the main control board 530 are mounted on the component side of the main control board 530. The light emitted from these light-emitting elements is set so as not to reach the main CPU 530g. In other words, the main CPU 530g is mounted in a position that is outside the irradiation range of the light emitted from the light-emitting elements.
This prevents the light emitted from the light-emitting element mounted on the component surface of the main control board 530 from making it difficult to read the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 30th embodiment, the management sticker 551 on which the two-dimensional code 551a is printed is attached to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, thereby attaching the two-dimensional code 551a to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the two-dimensional code 551 a may be attached to the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550 by printing the two-dimensional code 551 a directly on the surface of the front portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the substrate case 550 .

(2) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j is attached to the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g by directly printing the two-dimensional code 530j on the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g. It is not limited to this.
For example, the two-dimensional code 530j may be attached to the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g by pasting a sticker on which the two-dimensional code 530j is printed on the outward-facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g.

(3) In the thirtieth embodiment, the two-dimensional code 551a is printed in black ink on the surface of the white management sticker 551. However, this is not limited to this.
The two-dimensional code 551a affixed to the board case 550 only needs to have high color contrast. For example, the two-dimensional code 551a may be printed in dark blue ink on the surface of a white management sticker 551.

(4) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j is printed with light gray ink on the surface of the exterior of the main CPU 530g formed of dark gray resin, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g only needs to have a small color contrast; for example, the two-dimensional code 530j may be printed with dark gray ink on the exterior surface of the main CPU 530g made of black resin. , the two-dimensional code 530j may be printed with ink of a similar color to the exterior color of the main CPU 530g.

(5) In the 30th embodiment, the size of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is set smaller than the size of the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550, but the size is not limited to this, for example. , the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g and the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 may be set to the same size.

(6) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g is approximately parallel to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550. Although it is assumed that the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the front part 566 is also substantially parallel, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, the outward facing surface 530i of the main CPU 530g may be inclined with respect to the front surface 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 (the surface facing the component surface of the main control board 530 in the board case 550). A two-dimensional code 530j may be attached to the inclined outward surface 530i.
Thereby, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g can be tilted with respect to the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 551a attached to this front part 566. The two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g can be made difficult to read from the front of the front section 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550.

(7) In the 30th embodiment, when the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component surface of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management seal 551 and the two-dimensional code attached to the main CPU 530g Furthermore, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g are arranged so as not to overlap.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component surface of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management seal 551 and the two-dimensional code attached to the main CPU 530g can be seen. 530j may be arranged so as to overlap with each other.
This makes it difficult to read the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g, and prevents the information included in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally acquired (stolen). be able to.

For example, when the front part 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 and the component surface of the main control board 530 are viewed from the front, the management seal 551 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may overlap. The two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may not be readable unless the management seal 551 is peeled off or the board case 550 is opened.
Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the information included in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally acquired (stolen).

Further, for example, a reading prevention sticker is provided at a position corresponding to the main CPU 530g on the front face portion 566 of the front cover 560 of the board case 550 to prevent (prevent, obstruct) from reading the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g. or a reading prevention cover may be attached to prevent the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being read. The two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g may not be readable unless the reading prevention sticker is peeled off or the reading prevention cover is removed.
Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the information included in the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g from being illegally acquired (stolen).

(8) In the 30th embodiment, the two-dimensional code 551a attached to the board case 550 and the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g were explained, but the two-dimensional code attached to the gaming machine is It is not limited to two two-dimensional codes.
When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 500, a plurality of two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and a plurality of two-dimensional codes are attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 (the side facing the player). The opposite side) also has multiple two-dimensional codes attached.

In addition, on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the two-dimensional code can be attached by pasting a sticker with the two-dimensional code printed on the lower right or lower left peripheral edge of the front surface of the game board 504. has been done. These two-dimensional codes include information regarding the Pachinko gaming machine 500, such as information regarding the manufacturer of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the model (model) of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, and information regarding the serial number of the Pachinko gaming machine 500. It is something that

Furthermore, an image display device 543 is provided on the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 and approximately in the center of the gaming area of the gaming board 504. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is turned on, the checksum data of the RWM mounted on the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 is calculated, and the calculated checksum data is a normal value. A determination is made as to whether or not. Then, a two-dimensional code including information indicating the determination result can be displayed on the image display device 543.

Furthermore, as explained in the 19th embodiment (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 on, the machine can transition to the setting change mode. In the setting change mode, a two-dimensional code including information on the error history, such as the time and number of occurrences of a frame opening error (notified when the frame opening switch 523 is turned on) and the time and number of occurrences of a door opening error (notified when the door opening switch 522 is turned on), can be displayed on the image display device 543.

In addition, on the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 (the side opposite to the player), as shown in FIG. 98 of the nineteenth embodiment (B), a main control board 530 is housed on the back side of the game board 504. A case 550 is attached.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 98 of the nineteenth embodiment (B), on the back side of the game board 504, there is a board case in which a power supply board 510 is housed, and a board in which a payout control board 520 is housed. A case, a board case 700 in which the sub-control board 540 is housed, etc. are also attached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B), the power supply board 510 and the payout control board 520 are connected by a harness, the payout control board 520 and the main control board 530 are connected by a harness, and the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 are connected by a harness.
As for the main CPU 530g mounted on the main control board 530, the sub CPU 540a mounted on the sub control board 540, and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 520, two-dimensional codes can be printed directly on the surfaces thereof. A two-dimensional code is attached. These two-dimensional codes include information about the CPU, such as information about the manufacturer of the CPU, information about the model number of the CPU, and information about the serial number of the CPU.

In addition, the board case housing the power supply board 510, the board case housing the payout control board 520, the board case 550 housing the main control board 530, and the board case 700 housing the sub control board 540 have their surfaces covered. A two-dimensional code is attached by pasting a sticker with a two-dimensional code printed on it. These two-dimensional codes include information regarding the type of board, information regarding the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the model (model) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500, etc. , includes information regarding the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

Furthermore, a band for bundling the lead wires is attached to the harness that connects each board, and a two-dimensional code is attached by directly printing the two-dimensional code on the surface of this band. These two-dimensional codes include information regarding the type of harness, information regarding the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the model (model) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, information regarding the serial number of the pachinko gaming machine 500, etc. , includes information regarding the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

In this way, a plurality of two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) and the back side (opposite side from the player) of the pachinko gaming machine 500, respectively.
Further, most of the two-dimensional codes attached to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 are attached facing forward. Furthermore, most of the two-dimensional codes attached to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 are attached backwards. Note that the two-dimensional code attached to the board case housing the power supply board 510 is attached sideways rather than backward. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code attached to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 has a predetermined part attached to the front thereof, and cannot be read by the reading device unless the predetermined part is removed. It also has

The number of two-dimensional codes attached to the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 is set to be smaller than the number of two-dimensional codes attached to the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
The two-dimensional code attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 cannot be read unless you enter the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500, so the two-dimensional code attached to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500, which is normally inaccessible, is By attaching more two-dimensional codes, it is possible to make the two-dimensional code attached to the Pachinko gaming machine 500 difficult to read.

Next, a case where the gaming machine is the slot machine 10 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 131 of the 23rd embodiment, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front side, and a front door 12 attached to the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening can be opened and closed. There is.
Further, a panel called a middle panel is provided in the center of the front door 12, and a transparent display window is provided in this middle panel. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Thereby, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be viewed from the front side (player side) of the slot machine 10 through the display window.

Furthermore, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the middle panel, there are arranged a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc. Furthermore, below the above-mentioned switches, there is provided a panel called the lower panel, on which letters indicating the model name of the slot machine 10 and character images, etc. are displayed.
Furthermore, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the lower panel, there are provided a medal payout opening 16 through which medals are paid out, and a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from this medal payout opening 16.

A two-dimensional code is attached by pasting a sticker with a two-dimensional code printed on the lower front of the lower panel or the front of the medal tray. These two-dimensional codes include information regarding the slot machine 10, such as information regarding the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information regarding the model (model) of the slot machine 10, and information regarding the serial number of the slot machine 10.

Further, an image display device 23 is provided at the upper front side of the front door 12. When the slot machine 10 is powered on, the checksum data of the RWM mounted on the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 is calculated, and the calculated checksum data is a normal value. A determination is made as to whether or not there is. Then, a two-dimensional code including information indicating the determination result can be displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (A), in the slot machine 10, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and the setting key switch 152 is inserted. If you turn on the power and turn on the power (turn on the power switch 11) in this state, you can shift to the setting change mode. In the setting change mode, for example, a two-dimensional code containing information regarding the error history such as the time and number of occurrences of a door open error (notified when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on) is displayed as an image. It becomes possible to display on the display device 23.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13, and a sub-board A sub-control board 80 housed in a case 87 is arranged. Further, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected by a harness, and the sub-control board 80 and the image display device 23 are connected by a harness. These cannot be visually recognized unless the front door 12 is opened.

Two-dimensional codes are attached to the main CPU 55 mounted on the main control board 50 and the sub-CPU 85 mounted on the sub-control board 80 by directly printing the two-dimensional codes on their surfaces. . These two-dimensional codes include information about the CPU, such as information about the manufacturer of the CPU, information about the model number of the CPU, and information about the serial number of the CPU.

Furthermore, the main board case 56 that houses the main control board 50 and the sub-board case 87 that houses the sub-control board 80 can be printed with two-dimensional codes by pasting stickers on their surfaces. is attached. These two-dimensional codes include information about the type of board, information about the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information about the model (model) of the slot machine 10, information about the serial number of the slot machine 10, etc. 10.

Furthermore, a harness that connects the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, a harness that connects the main control board 50 and various electronic devices, and a harness that connects the sub-control board 80 and various electronic devices such as the image display device 23, etc. A band for bundling the lead wires is attached to the connecting harness, and a two-dimensional code is attached by directly printing the two-dimensional code on the surface of this band. These two-dimensional codes include information on the type of harness, information on the manufacturer of the slot machine 10, information on the model (model) of the slot machine 10, information on the serial number of the slot machine 10, etc. 10.

In this way, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of two-dimensional codes are attached to the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and a plurality of two-dimensional codes are attached to various devices arranged inside the cabinet 13. A two-dimensional code is attached.
Furthermore, most of the two-dimensional codes attached to the front side of the front door 12 are attached facing forward, and are visible when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front. It is considered readable.

Furthermore, the two-dimensional codes attached to various devices placed inside the cabinet 13 cannot be seen or read by a reading device unless the front door 12 is opened. There is.
Furthermore, a predetermined part is attached to the front of the two-dimensional code attached to various devices placed inside the cabinet 13, and unless the predetermined part is removed, the two-dimensional code will be read by the reading device. There are also things that cannot be done.

In the slot machine 10, the number of two-dimensional codes attached to the front side (player side) of the front door 12 is the number of two-dimensional codes attached to various devices arranged inside the cabinet 13. It is set to less.
By attaching more two-dimensional codes than the front side of the front door 12 inside the cabinet 13, which cannot be seen or read by a reader unless the front door 12 is opened, the slot machine 10 The attached two-dimensional code can be made difficult to read.

As explained above, two-dimensional codes are attached and displayed in various positions on gaming machines, but the area of the code area of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is different from that of other gaming machines. The area of the code area of the two-dimensional code is smaller than that of the two-dimensional code, and the color contrast with the background color of the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is smaller than that of the background color of other two-dimensional codes ( low).
As a result, the two-dimensional code 530j attached to the main CPU 530g is more difficult to read by a reading device than other two-dimensional codes.

The various modifications shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments and the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional notes>
The inventions stated in the original specification etc. of the present application (original inventions) include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 55, which are the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not limited to Inventions 1 to 55.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing related to gaming media after a power outage occurs.
In conventional gaming machines, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as a power-off process, even if medals are inserted while the backup process is being executed, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power outage occurs at the moment a medal is inserted into the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power outage process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute medal addition processing (medal bet processing or medal credit processing) after the power is cut off.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the addition process of game media from being executed even if a power outage occurs at approximately the same time as the game media are inserted from the game media input slot. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 1 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game media slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in the passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from the game media input port, and is in a state that allows the passage of the game media (on state) or a state that does not allow the passage of the game media (off state). ) a blocker (45) controllable to
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b), which are provided in the path of the game medium input from the game medium input port and are capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is located downstream of the detection means A). ) and ,
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of gaming media, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and the game media is stopped. The time required to control the blocker to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When a game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be seen from the front of the game machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effects of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the power is cut off when the gaming media is released from the gaming media slot into the gaming machine and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine. In this case, by the time the detection means B no longer detects the game medium, the blocker is controlled to a state where the power supply is cut off and the passage of the game medium is not permitted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs when the gaming media is no longer visible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is interrupted immediately after the gaming media is released inside the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game media addition process from being executed after a power outage occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to gate marks on a board case in a game machine that includes a board case in which a control board is housed.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, a board case that houses a main control board inside is known. Here, since the board case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the board case. A technique has been proposed that uses this gate trace as a landmark (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate mark on the board case includes a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the gate remains may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to suppress the tampering that took advantage of the gate marks on the board case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 2 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) equipped with a calculation function,
a control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (the surface facing the top surface of the upper cover 57);
A board case (a board case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (a top surface, a side surface, etc.) and houses the control board;
The board case is formed so that the inside thereof is visible,
Arranging gate marks (57b) during molding of the board case on a surface that is outside the board case and faces the one surface of the control board (outside top surface of the top cover 57);
The predetermined IC of the control board is not located in a direction perpendicular to the facing surface from the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the prescribed IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace on the board case, the gate trace can be opened illegally and the prescribed IC can be accessed. This can be prevented.
Furthermore, since there are no gate marks on the board case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate marks. Thereby, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not fraud has been carried out on a predetermined IC.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to processing when communication is restored from the disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known in which a main control board sends commands to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received commands.
Here, there is a known technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that there is an abnormality in command reception based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Publication No. 2014-226503).
However, when transmitting commands from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board will not be able to output normal effects.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 3 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
a sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on information received from the main control board;
The sub control board is capable of receiving information about the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined gaming state (AT), the sub-control board is capable of outputting a performance corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information about the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined gaming state, when information that the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. A performance (a performance when the reels corresponding to a predetermined stop switch are stopped) is output, and then, before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated, information from the main control board cannot be received. , after that, it became possible to receive information from the main control board in the "N+a" game, and then, in the "N+a" game, information was received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch was operated. In this case, output a performance that corresponds to the operation of the specific stop switch and is related to the predetermined performance (a performance that follows the predetermined performance and is a performance when the reels corresponding to the specific stop switch are stopped). Then, when predetermined information is received for the "N+a+1" game number, the performance for the "N+a+1" game number is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of original invention 3 According to the original invention, when communication is restored during the "N+a" game, a performance related to the predetermined performance of the "N" game that had been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, the performance following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game moves to the "N+a+1" game, it is possible to prevent the performance from suddenly changing due to the restoration of communication during the "N+a" game. Thereby, it is possible to output a presentation that does not give an unnatural feeling before and after the occurrence of a disconnection.

4. Original invention 4
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 4 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In conventional gaming machines, when a stop switch is operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switch are stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to a lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is kept in an excited state for a predetermined period of time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the on state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next operation of the stop switch is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept a stop operation even if the second stop switch is operated until the reel status changes to the stopped state after the first stop switch is operated ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-093576).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be played at a high speed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to enable a stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 4 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment) is
A reel (31) and
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop rotation of the reel based on detection of operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
Comprising an internal lottery means (winning lottery means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is turned on. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by biasing force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is determined. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, the predetermined reel is brought into an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When this occurs, the excitation state is terminated.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor turns off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13), and the predetermined time is T2,
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it is assumed that the start of the motor's excitation state when the reel is stopped is the same as the moment when the stop button pressed to the deepest part is released. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. Original invention 5
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 The original invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor to rotate the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates from the time the hopper motor starts driving until the first medal is ejected. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, and the player may feel that the first medal ejection is delayed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal is delayed in being ejected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 5 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding parts (102) along the outer periphery of the hopper disk that can hold medals stored in the hopper,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, the medals held in the holding part are sequentially ejected from the ejection part (103),
The position of the holding section where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process was ejected from the ejecting section is a first position,
The position of the holding part where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting part is a second position,
When the first payout process is finished, the control means controls a state in which the holding part holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The hopper motor is controlled so that rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(c) Effect of original invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holding part that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal will be delayed. It is possible to avoid giving any sensation to the player.

6. Original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board attached to the inside of the cabinet and the sub-control board attached to the back surface of the front door.
Conventional game machines are known that include an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU may be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if an electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered. Another purpose is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 6 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
a main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with a sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
the main control board is installed inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back side of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
The present invention is characterized in that an electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged in a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor may explode due to a malfunction and the electrolyte Even if the electrolyte is scattered, it is possible to prevent the scattered electrolyte from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the main CPU can be prevented from receiving the impact directly, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to the stop control of the reels on the main control board side and the control of the output of effects on the sub control board side.
Conventional gaming machines can perform multiple types of performance contents, and each performance content can be executed when the special role has been won (internal) and when the special role has not been won (non-internal). It is known that the selection probabilities of are different (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the performance content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery both in the internal game and in the non-internal game.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 7 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes:
An internal lottery in which the drawing is conducted so that there are cases where the first drawing result (for example, "BB" wins alone during a non-internal draw) or a second drawing result (for example, "non-winning" during a BB draw). means (rot lottery means 61);
a plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reel corresponding to the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table for a game that has a first drawing result and a game that has a second drawing result;
The sub-control means
A plurality of performance determination tables that define the performances to be output,
A production output control means (91) that determines a production to be output using any of the production determination tables and outputs the determined production;
The performance output control means is characterized in that the performance output control means determines the performance to be output by using different performance determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means stops at the same time on the main control means side in the game in which the internal lottery means has the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result has occurred. The position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel, but on the sub-control means side, the performance output control means determines the performance to be output using a different performance determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and effects can be diversified.

8. Original invention 8
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a protruding side that protrudes outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is configured to be accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign objects to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door may be slightly opened so that the protruding side is removed from the front door, allowing foreign objects to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by opening the front door a little.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 8 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
and a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing part (13c) is provided at the lower part of the cabinet, and the first closing part (13c) projects toward the front door when the front door is closed.
A second closing part (12a) is provided at a position below the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, and the second closing part (12a) projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
A third closing part (12b) is provided at a position above the first closing part in the lower part of the front door and projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
When the front door is closed, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
Even when the front door is at the detection start position, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing part and the third closing part are connected. The first closed part will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open. Since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape even in the position where it is possible to do so, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with advantageous section indicators have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power cut has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power outage.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 9 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
If the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit, and the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is turned off after the interrupt processing is started. Enables processing to turn on the light,
After the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned on, processing for turning off the advantageous section indicator; After executing the process, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, it is possible to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator depending on the situation at the time of recovery from power-off.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP 2018-000797 A).
In conventional gaming machines, it has been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four. However, when the number of stop buttons is increased to four, there is a problem that it becomes easier to make mistakes in operating the stop buttons during AT.
The problem that the original invention was intended to solve was how to make it less likely for mistakes to occur when operating the stop buttons when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 10 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Four reels (31A to 31D) and
and four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a portion of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is located vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of original invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, it is possible to operate the stop buttons on both the left and right ends using the left and right ends of the operation buttons as landmarks. , it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button from occurring.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can specify a specified number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that allow games to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number of players.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 11 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (twelfth embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When informing the operation mode in the notification gaming state, information corresponding to the operation mode (press order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display section (obtained number display LED 78),
In the notification gaming state, a game can be started when at least a prescribed number of gaming values out of a plurality of prescribed numbers (“2” or “3”) are input;
In the notification gaming state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display section,
In the notification gaming state, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed at a predetermined timing from when all the reels have stopped to when the start switch is detected to be turned on (see FIG. 42). , displayed in step S322),
When displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, it should be displayed in a display format that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (if the specified number is "2", "0A" is displayed). Features.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify the appropriate prescribed number for the game.
Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode and the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is required to initialize information regarding the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. However, after the AT ends, there are cases where the next AT wins early, and there are cases where it is desired to carry over the difference in the number of tickets from the previous AT.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section, while making it possible to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous notification gaming state (AT).

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 12 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer press order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of gaming value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to ``0''. ”, a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value
The second control means (sub-control board 80) includes a second difference counter (sub-difference number counter) that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the gaming value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), but the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to comply with the rule of initializing information regarding the advantageous section. In addition, the second difference number counter may not be cleared, and in that case, it becomes possible to take over the difference number of sheets from the previous notification game state at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given to how to count (update) the difference in the number of coins when a replay prize is won.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number of coins at the time of replay winning.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 13 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
a difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a small prize has been won, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enables execution of the process for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" at step S434). ''), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In a game in which the replay is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (see FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). processing for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) without executing the processing),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is updated without executing the update process of the difference counter. It is determined whether the value of is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. When it is determined that this is the case ("Yes" in step S434), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) is enabled.

(c) Effect of original invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game where a replay is won, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Since this is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference in the number of coins in a game in which a replay is won. Furthermore, it is possible to speed up program processing.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines having an instruction function have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process related to the instruction function and the process related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 14 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
a notification gaming state (AT) in which an instruction function to notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the notification gaming state can be executed;
an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous section;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number of sheets counter) for counting specific variables related to the notification gaming state (for example, the number of games played or the number of difference sheets);
It has a game in which at least a first specified number (prescribed number “3”) or a second specified number (prescribed number “2”) can be inputted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in a game that is started based on the first specified number of inputs, processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (in FIG. 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed in a game started based on the input of the second specified number ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the first specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game Enables counter updating (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game that is started based on the second specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game counter is updated. Make the update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 14 According to the original invention, by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter by playing either the first specified number or the second specified number, it is possible to optimize the advantageous section. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. can.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 15 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it has been known to use a harness consisting of a plurality of signal wires (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of gaming machines. One of the signal lines is a signal line related to starting.
In the prior art, since signals related to starting are used for lottery, it is necessary to suppress tampering with signal lines related to starting.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to make it difficult to specify the signal line related to starting, and to suppress trilling.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 15 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (21st embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with a control board (main control board 50, 530),
having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of the game (for example, the No. 7 lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111),
Both the second signal line (for example, lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111), This is a different signal line from the signal line related to starting the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effect of original invention 15 According to the original invention, it can be made difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. Original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of outputting a setting change completion sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set.
In the conventional technology, the setting change process ends when the setting key is turned off, for example, and it is not possible to easily know from the outside the timing at which the setting change process ends.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, if you start playing the game immediately after the settings change process ends, if you notify that the settings change process has ended, the notification that the settings change process has ended and the notification output for the game will be the same. There is a risk that the notifications may be output at different times (overlapping), and important notifications output for the game may be difficult to understand.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to appropriately output a termination sound indicating that a setting change state has ended.

The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) that can change the degree of advantage for the player,
Specific operation detection means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage level can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage level cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535),
Equipped with a speaker (22, 542) and
In the setting change state, when a condition for transitioning to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96). and
The conditions for starting the game (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number of bets have been made and the start switch 41 has been operated; in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the game ball has entered the starting slot 532). In a game where the condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 ("T12" or "T22" in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, after transitioning to the normal state, at least time T3 ("T11" or "T12" in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied;
When a game is started immediately after transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0 )
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if a game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is outputted before the game is ended, so the presentation outputted at the end of the game does not overlap with the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation outputted at the end of the game from being difficult to understand due to the ending sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Original invention 17
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the lamp board can be clearly seen.
A conventional game machine is known that includes a lamp board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and a lamp cover that covers the lamp board, and the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-196069).
Here, the LED mounting surface of the lamp board is generally composed of green or black.
However, if the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material, there is a possibility that the color of the LED mounting surface on the lamp board will be visible when the LED is turned off, and when the LED is emitting light, There is a possibility that it will appear to emit light in a different color from the set color.
Furthermore, even if the lamp cover is made of a colorless, translucent resin material, the color of the LED mounting surface on the lamp board will be visible when the LED is turned off, and the color of the LED mounting surface on the lamp board will be visible when the LED is lit. There is a possibility that it will appear to emit light in a different color.
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to prevent the appearance of the LEDs from becoming unsightly even when the mounting surface of the LEDs on the lamp board was visible through the lamp cover, and to make the color of the LEDs clearly visible when they emitted light. be.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 17 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
There is a lamp cover (for example, the upper frame lamp cover 613) that covers the lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611) on which the light emitting means (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted,
At least a part of the lamp cover is configured such that when the light emitting means emits light in one color, it is visible in substantially the same color or similar color,
At least a portion of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp board is substantially white.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 17 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp board is made of substantially white, when the light emitting means is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp board can be passed through the lamp cover. You can prevent it from looking bad even if it is visible through it.
Further, when the light emitting means emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp board, so that the light emitting means can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the light emitting means can be mounted Since the surface is made of substantially white, the light emitting means can emit light in the color set and appear visible.

18. Original invention 18
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 18 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 18 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) that includes a decorative lamp section (for example, right frame lamp section 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, the right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board attachment part (for example, right frame board attachment part 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
a cover attachment portion (for example, a right frame cover attachment portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The lamp substrate has a substantially rectangular shape,
The width of the lamp board in the lateral direction ("W1" in FIG. 116) is configured to be substantially the same as the width of the board attachment part in the lateral direction ("W2" in FIG. 124). shall be.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the mounting surface of the light emitting element can be Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, since the width of the lamp board in the lateral direction and the width of the board mounting part in the lateral direction are configured to be approximately the same, the lamp board can cover the board mounting part, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp board. Since the surface can function as a reflector, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

19. Original invention 19
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 19 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 19 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) that includes a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, the upper frame lamp cover 613) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board attachment part (for example, the upper frame right board attachment part 651) to which the lamp board is attached;
a cover attachment part (for example, upper frame right cover attachment part 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white, and
A fixture (for example, a screw 683a) used when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion has an exposed portion (screw head 689) exposed on the mounting surface side,
The height of the exposed portion from the mounting surface ("T1" in FIG. 123) is configured to be larger than the height of the light emitting element from the mounting surface ("T2" in FIG. 123),
The exposed portion may be subjected to a surface treatment (for example, silver plating) that reflects light emitted from the light emitting element.

(c) Effect of original invention 19 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the mounting surface of the light emitting element can be Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, by setting the height of the exposed part from the light emitting element mounting surface to be larger than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface, and by applying a surface treatment to the exposed part to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting element, Since the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected at the exposed portion, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.

20. Original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 20 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 20 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) that includes a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, the upper frame lamp cover 613) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting part (for example, the upper frame right board mounting part 651) to which the lamp board is mounted;
a cover attachment part (for example, upper frame right cover attachment part 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The lamp board includes a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which a positioning member (positioning boss 682a) is inserted when positioning the lamp board at a predetermined position of the board mounting part, and a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which the lamp board is inserted into the board mounting part. A fixing hole (fixing hole 686a) used when fixing to the mounting portion is provided adjacent to the fixing hole (fixing hole 686a),
The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different,
The positioning member has a protrusion (protrusion 687) that protrudes toward the mounting surface when the lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position of the board attachment part,
The protrusion is characterized in that it is formed in a convex curved shape.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 20 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the mounting surface of the light emitting element can be Since the surface is made of white, the light-emitting elements can be seen to emit light in the specified color.
Furthermore, since the opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are made different, it is important not to confuse the positioning hole and the fixing hole when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting part. This allows the assembly work to proceed smoothly.
Furthermore, since the protrusion of the positioning member is formed into a convex curved shape, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the convex curved protrusion, so the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly. .

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 21 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 21 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) that includes a decorative lamp section (for example, right frame lamp section 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, the right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board attachment part (for example, right frame board attachment part 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
a cover attachment portion (for example, a right frame cover attachment portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The lamp cover is characterized in that it has a lens portion (lens portion 670) formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp board. Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, since the shape of the lens part is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the lamp cover can be reduced, and the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reduced. You can make it look more beautiful with the lens part.

22. Original invention 22
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 22 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 22 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 500) that includes a front door (for example, glass door 505) that can be opened and closed and a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
a board mounting part to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting part 651 and a right frame board mounting part 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white, and
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp part (upper frame lamp part 610) disposed at the upper part of the front door;
and a side lamp part (right frame lamp part 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp section and the side lamp section each include the lamp substrates (the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611, the right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
When a specific lottery result (big win in a jackpot lottery) is obtained, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates are arranged in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result. It is characterized in that it is controlled to emit light (each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255").

(c) Effect of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp board. Since the surface is made of white, the light-emitting elements can be seen to emit light in the specified color.
Furthermore, by causing the light emitting elements to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a specific lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the specific lottery result using bright light.

23. Original invention 23
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 23 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 23 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 500) that includes a front door (for example, glass door 505) that can be opened and closed and a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
a board mounting part to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting part 651 and a right frame board mounting part 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp part (upper frame lamp part 610) disposed at the upper part of the front door;
and a side lamp part (right frame lamp part 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp section and the side lamp section each include the lamp substrates (the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result (big win in a jackpot lottery) is detected, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates is It is characterized in that it is controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp board. Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, when the opening of the front door is detected or a specific lottery result is obtained, the light emitting element is made to emit white light, so that the opening of the front door or a specific lottery result can be detected using bright light. It is possible to notify the hall staff and players.

24. Original invention 24
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 24 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 24 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 500) that includes a front door (for example, glass door 505) that can be opened and closed and a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
a board mounting part to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting part 651 and a right frame board mounting part 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp part (upper frame lamp part 610) disposed at the upper part of the front door;
and a side lamp part (right frame lamp part 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp section and the side lamp section each include the lamp substrates (the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When a setting change state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the degree of advantage cannot be changed but can be confirmed, the lamp board is mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards. The light emitting element is controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the mounting surface of the light emitting element can be Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, when the control is in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, by emitting white light from the light emitting element, the hall staff can be notified by clear light that the setting change state or setting confirmation state is being controlled. I can let you know.

25. Original invention 25
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 25 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 25 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 500) that includes a front door (for example, glass door 505) that can be opened and closed and a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) to which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
a board mounting part to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting part 651 and a right frame board mounting part 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp part (upper frame lamp part 610) disposed at the upper part of the front door;
and a side lamp part (right frame lamp part 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp section and the side lamp section each include the lamp substrates (the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and the right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
When recovering from a power-off, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards is controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 25 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the mounting surface of the light emitting element can be Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, by causing the light emitting element to emit white light when the system returns from a power outage, it is possible to inform the hall staff using clear light that the system is recovering from a power outage.

26. Original invention 26
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 26 Same problem as original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (23rd embodiment) is as follows:
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp unit (e.g., an upper frame lamp unit 610 and a right frame lamp unit 620) on an openable front door (e.g., a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp unit includes:
A lamp board (for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the right frame lamp board 621) on which light-emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) onto which light emitted from the light emitting element is irradiated;
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is attached;
and a cover mounting portion (e.g., an upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white light-transmitting portion,
The mounting surface of the lamp substrate on which the light emitting element is mounted is formed in white color,
The decorative lamp unit includes:
An upper lamp unit (upper frame lamp unit 610) disposed at the upper portion of the front door;
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) disposed on the side of the front door,
The upper lamp unit and the side lamp unit each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby including a plurality of the lamp substrates;
During a predetermined game in which the lottery means does not win (during a game in which the lottery means does not win), the light-emitting element (LED 641 e-k) mounted on at least one of the lamp boards (right frame lamp board 621) among the plurality of lamp boards is controlled to emit light;
The average time for which the light-emitting element is illuminated during the specified game is set to be longer than the average time for which other lamps (red LEDs mounted on a substrate provided in a decoration on the game board 504) are lit during the specified game.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is made of white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board can be seen through the lamp cover. Even if it is transparent, the appearance of the decorative lamp part can be prevented from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board, so the light emitting element can be made to appear to shine brighter, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp board. Since the surface is made of white, the light emitting element can be seen to emit light in the color set.
Furthermore, even in a predetermined game in which the winnings are not won by the lottery means, a beautiful performance using light emitting elements can be shown to the players.

27. Original invention 27
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 27 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a title display section that emits light in the shape of characters or the like.
In conventional gaming machines, a title display section (lighting unit) is provided at the upper part of the front surface, and by lighting up an LED provided inside the title display section, characters etc. attached to the title display section can be displayed to the player. There are known devices that display the information visually (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-312984).
In the conventional gaming machine described above, the inner surface of the lens section included in the title display section is stamped, and the light emitted by the LED is diffused by the stamper processing, so that the entire surface of the lens section emits light.
Here, "stamper processing" is to form fine dots consisting of recesses of a predetermined shape on the inner surface of the lens portion at a predetermined density. This recess has a rectangular or round shape. The rectangular recess has a planar slope, and the round recess has a curved slope. The concave portion on the inner surface of the lens portion formed by stamping refracts or reflects the light emitted from the LED, so that the entire surface of the lens portion appears to emit light.
However, even if the light emitted by the LED is diffused through stamper processing so that the entire surface of the lens section emits light, players who look at the title display section may feel dazzled, and the characters attached to the title display section may etc., making it difficult for players to recognize them.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the player from feeling dazzled when looking at the title display section, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the characters etc. attached to the title display section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 27 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.

28. Original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 28 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 28 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
a lens portion (670, 615d) provided so as to cover the light emitting element;
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
The light diffusing section in the predetermined title display section includes a textured section (615f) formed on the surface of the lens section in the predetermined title display section, and the lens section and the light emitting section in the predetermined title display section. It is characterized by being composed of a light diffusion sheet (615g) placed between the device and the light diffusion sheet.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
Furthermore, by constructing the light diffusion section in the specified title display section from an embossed section formed on the surface of the lens section in the specified title display section and a light diffusion sheet arranged between the lens section and the light-emitting element in the specified title display section, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section can be increased, thereby preventing the player from feeling dazzled and making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like attached to the specified title display section.

29. Original invention 29
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 29 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 29 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A lamp board (right frame lamp board 621, title display board 615a) on which a light emitting element (LED 641a, etc.) is mounted;
a lens portion (670, 615d) provided to cover a mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board;
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
In the predetermined title display section, the maximum distance from the lamp board to the lens section in a direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light emitting element is defined as a distance "M1";
In the predetermined side lamp part, the maximum distance from the lamp board to the lens part in a direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light emitting element is defined as a distance "M2",
Distance "M1" is characterized by being set shorter than distance "M2".

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
In addition, by setting the distance from the lamp board to the lens part in the predetermined side lamp part and the distance from the lamp board to the lens part in the predetermined title display part to be longer, light diffusion in the predetermined side lamp part can be improved. Even if the light diffusion rate of the part is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part in a predetermined title display part, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.

30. Original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 30 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 30 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a brightness adjustment means (546) for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section;
The brightness adjustment means is configured to change the brightness of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp part and the brightness of the light emitting element of the predetermined title display part at the same rate of change. do.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 30 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
Furthermore, when the brightness of the light-emitting element in a predetermined side lamp section is lowered (darkened), the brightness of the light-emitting element in a predetermined title display section can also be lowered (darkened) at the same rate of change. It is possible to prevent the predetermined title display section from causing glare.

31. Original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 31 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 31 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is as follows:
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display unit (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
a brightness adjustment means (546) for adjusting the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjustment means is configured to, when changing the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified side lamp portion and the specified title display portion, make the rate of change in brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified title display portion greater than the rate of change in brightness of the light-emitting elements of the specified side lamp portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 31 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
Furthermore, by lowering (darkering) the brightness of the light-emitting element in a predetermined side lamp section, the brightness of the light-emitting element in a predetermined title display section can be further lowered (darker). It is possible to prevent the display from causing glare.

32. Original invention 32
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 32 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 32 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting element in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section;
The light emission control means controls a time period for causing the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section to emit light when executing a predetermined effect that causes the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section to emit light. is controlled to be shorter than the time period during which the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp part emits light.
In addition, the original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting element in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section;
The light emission control means controls a time period for blinking the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section when executing a predetermined effect of blinking the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section. is controlled to be shorter than a time period for blinking the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp part.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
Furthermore, when executing a predetermined effect, the time for emitting or blinking the light-emitting element of the predetermined title display section is shorter than the time for emitting or blinking the light-emitting element of the predetermined side lamp section, so that the player can display the predetermined title. It is possible to prevent the display from causing glare.

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 33 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 33 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting element in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section;
In the game standby state, the light emission control means controls the light emitting element of the predetermined title display section to emit light for a longer time than the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp part to emit light. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the designated side lamp section, so that the designated title display section is less dazzling to the player than the designated side lamp section, making it easier for the player to recognize letters and the like affixed to the designated title display section.
In addition, in the game standby state, the light-emitting time of the light-emitting element of a designated title display section can be made longer than the light-emitting time of the light-emitting element of a designated side lamp section, thereby making the gaming machine more noticeable and guiding the player to play on the gaming machine.

34. Original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 34 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 34 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided at the upper part of the front of the gaming machine and emits light in the shape of letters, etc.;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting element in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section;
The light emitting control means is characterized in that when a predetermined error occurs, the light emitting element of the predetermined title display section is controlled to turn off the light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs, by turning off the light emitting element of a predetermined title display section, it is possible to make it easier for players and hall staff to notice that a predetermined error has occurred.

35. Original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 35 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp unit (right frame lamp unit 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 500);
An upper lamp unit (610) provided at the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine;
The upper lamp portion is
A predetermined title display section (615) that emits light in the shape of letters or the like;
A peripheral decorative portion (616) other than the title display portion;
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion are each
A light emitting element (such as LED 641a),
A light diffusion unit (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set to be higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion,
A light emission control means (547) is provided for controlling the light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion, the predetermined title display portion and the peripheral decorative portion,
The light-emitting control means is characterized in that it controls the time during which the light-emitting elements of the specified title display unit and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative unit emit light in different patterns so that it is longer than the time during which the light-emitting elements of the specified title display unit and the light-emitting elements of the surrounding decorative unit emit light in the same pattern.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 35 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
In addition, the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display area and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration area emit light in different patterns, while the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display area and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration area emit light in the same pattern. Since it is longer than the time, it is possible to diversify the presentation patterns using the predetermined title display section and peripheral decoration section.

36. Original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 36 Same problem as original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 36 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp section (right frame lamp section 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 500);
An upper lamp part (610) provided at the upper part of the front face of the gaming machine;
The upper lamp part is
a predetermined title display section (615) that emits light in the shape of characters, etc.;
and a peripheral decoration part (616) other than the title display part,
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A light emitting element (LED641a etc.),
and a light diffusion section (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section,
comprising a light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp section, the predetermined title display section and the peripheral decoration section;
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting element of the predetermined title display section to emit light only when the specific lottery result results in a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is characterized by being controlled so that it emits light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section. , the predetermined title display section can make the player feel less dazzled than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize the characters etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. It can be made easier.
In addition, when a specific lottery result is obtained, the light emitting element in the predetermined title display section emits light in a pattern that emits light only when a specific lottery result is obtained, so that the player is not aware that the specific lottery result has been obtained. It can be made easier.

37. Original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of light emitting elements controlled by a main control means.
Conventional gaming machines are known that include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) controlled by a main control means (main board) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-047069).
Specifically, a main control display device including 26 LEDs, LED "A" to LED "Z", is connected to the main control means. Furthermore, of the 26 LEDs, 8 LEDs "G" to "N" constitute a first special symbol display section. Furthermore, the main control means performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol by lighting or extinguishing eight LEDs that constitute the first special symbol display section. In particular, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, a blinking display is performed in which two of the eight LEDs that make up the first special symbol display section, LED "M" and LED "N", blink every 100 msec. I do. Then, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, only two LEDs, LED "M" and LED "N" blink, while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, so it is necessary to check whether the other LEDs are malfunctioning. I can't.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to check whether there is a failure in the light emitting element controlled by the main control means after the game start conditions are met until the game result can be displayed. It is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 37 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
a main control means (530) for controlling the progress of the game;
A light emitting element A (LED531a), a light emitting element B (LED531b), and a light emitting element C (LED531c) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means satisfies the game start conditions (the game ball enters the starting hole 532, When the starting port switch 533 is turned on), the game results can be displayed after all of the light emitting elements A, B, and C are turned on and off at least once (a special It is characterized by controlling the display so that the pattern is stopped and displayed.

(c) Effect of original invention 37 According to the original invention, after the game start condition is satisfied until the game result can be displayed, light emitting element A, light emitting element B, and light emitting element C are activated at least once. Since the light is turned on and off, it is possible to check whether these light emitting elements are turned on or not, and it is possible to check whether there is a failure in these light emitting elements.

38. Original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 38 Same problem as original invention 37.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 38 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
a main control means (530) for controlling the progress of the game;
A light emitting element A (LED531a), a light emitting element B (LED531b), and a light emitting element C (LED531c) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
A lottery means (555) that performs a lottery based on a random number obtained by winning a prize in the starting slot (532);
A holding means (557) for holding the random number obtained by winning a prize in the starting slot until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number starts.
The main control means is configured to control a low probability state in which the probability of winning in the lottery means is a predetermined probability or the predetermined probability in a situation where the light emitting element A is on, the light emitting element B is off, and the light emitting element C is also off. In a state where the probability is higher and the number of random numbers held in the holding means is "0", when the drawing means does not win and the symbol starts to be displayed in a fluctuating manner. The present invention is characterized in that after each of the light emitting elements A, B, and C is turned on and off at least once, the variable display of the symbols is controlled to end.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 38 According to the original invention, at least one light-emitting element A, one light-emitting element B, and one light-emitting element C is activated between the start of the fluctuating display of the symbols and the end of the fluctuating display of the symbols. Since the light is turned on and off twice, it is possible to check whether these light emitting elements are turned on or not, and it is possible to check whether there is a failure in these light emitting elements.

39. Original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 39 The original invention relates to an amusement machine that has a board case that houses a control board, and in which a sealing sticker is affixed across a first cover and a second cover that constitute the board case.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known to house a control board in a board case.
Here, the board case includes a first cover and a second cover, and when the first cover and the second cover are combined, the board case is formed into a box shape capable of housing a control board therein. After housing the control board inside the board case, a seal is attached across the first cover and the second cover to seal the board case (for example, JP 2010-167124 A).
However, if the genuine seal is cut with a blade to open the circuit board case, the genuine ROM mounted on the control board is replaced with an illegal ROM, and then the control board is returned to the inside of the circuit board case and a fake seal is affixed over the genuine seal that was cut off, there is a risk that the fraudulent act will not be noticed.
The problem that the original invention is intended to solve is to prevent fraudulent acts from being discovered by pasting a counterfeit seal over a damaged genuine seal.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 39 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
The board case is
a first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the electronic component (530b) on the control board;
a second cover (rear cover 570) that covers a side opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent,
The first cover is provided with a first sticker pasting part (567),
The second cover is provided with a second sticker pasting part (574),
In a state where the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal attaching portion and the second seal attaching portion are formed to be continuous;
The first sticker pasting section and the second sticker pasting section are provided on one side of the board case,
A sealing sticker (581) is pasted so as to straddle the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when removed,
The seam between the first sticker affixing part and the second sticker affixing part is formed so as to be visible from the surface of the second cover facing the control board (in the direction of line of sight D5 in FIG. 163). shall be.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 39 According to the original invention, since the seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part is visible from the surface of the second cover facing the control board, the damaged Even if a fake seal is pasted on top of the original seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, making it possible to prevent fraud from being discovered.

40. Original invention 40
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 40 Same problem as original invention 39.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 40 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
The board case is
a first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the electronic component (530b) on the control board;
a second cover (rear cover 570) that covers a side opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent,
The first cover is provided with a first sticker pasting part (567),
The second cover is provided with a second sticker pasting part (574),
In a state where the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal sticking part and the second seal sticking part are formed so as to be continuous,
The first sticker pasting section and the second sticker pasting section are provided on one side of the board case,
The first sticker pasting part and the second sticker pasting part have a plurality of faces facing different directions,
A sealing sticker (581) is pasted so as to straddle the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when removed,
The seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part is viewed from the side opposite to the seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part in the board case (in line of sight D4 in FIG. 163). It is characterized by being formed so that it can be visually recognized (in the direction).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 40 According to the original invention, the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part are connected from the side opposite to the joint between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part in the board case. Since the seam of the seal is visible, even if a fake seal is pasted on top of a damaged genuine seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, preventing any fraudulent activity. It is possible to make it impossible to escape detection.

41. Original invention 41
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 41 Same problem as original invention 39.

(b) Means for solving the problems of the original invention 41 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (28th embodiment (C)) is
A control board (main control board 530);
A board case (550B) for accommodating the control board;
The substrate case is
A first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the control board on which electronic components (530b) are mounted;
a second cover (rear cover 570) for covering the control board on the side opposite to the side on which electronic components are mounted,
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent.
A seal attachment section (case side seal attachment section 569) to which a seal (581) is attached is provided on approximately the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board,
When the substrate case is opened, a trace of the opening is left on the sealing seal.
The sticker attachment portion is formed so as to be visible from a surface of the second cover facing the control board.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the seal pasting portion provided on substantially the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board is removed from the surface of the second cover facing the control board. Since it is visible, even if a fake seal is pasted on top of a damaged genuine seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, avoiding detection of fraudulent activity. You can prevent this from happening.

42. Original invention 42
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 42 Same problem as original invention 39.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 42 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment (C)) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550B) for storing the control board;
The board case is
a first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the electronic component (530b) on the control board;
a second cover (rear cover 570) that covers a side opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent,
A seal pasting section (case side seal pasting section 569) to which a sealing seal (581) is pasted is provided on substantially the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board;
When the board case is opened, a trace thereof remains on the seal,
The seal pasting part is formed so as to be visible from either side of the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 42 According to the original invention, the sticker attachment portion provided on substantially the same plane as the surface of the first cover facing the control board can be visually recognized from either side of the board case. Therefore, even if a fake seal is pasted on top of a damaged genuine seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, so that fraud cannot be detected. It can be done.

43. Original invention 43
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 43 Same problem as original invention 39.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 43 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
The board case is
a first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the electronic component (530b) on the control board;
a second cover (rear cover 570) that covers a side opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent,
The first cover is provided with a first sticker pasting part (567),
The second cover is provided with a second sticker pasting part (574),
In a state where the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal attaching portion and the second seal attaching portion are formed to be continuous;
The first sticker pasting section and the second sticker pasting section are provided on one side of the board case,
A sealing sticker (581) is pasted so as to straddle the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when removed,
The seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part is formed so as to be visible from the side opposite to the seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part in the board case,
With the electronic component mounting surface of the control board as a reference, the height of the electronic component foot (530d) protruding from the surface of the control board opposite to the electronic component mounting surface is equal to the height of the first sticker attachment part and the second sticker attachment part. It is characterized by being set lower than the height of the seam with the sticker affixing part.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 43 According to the original invention, the first sticker sticking part and the second seal sticking part can be connected from the side surface opposite to the joint between the first seal sticking part and the second seal sticking part in the board case. Since the seam of the seal is visible, even if a fake seal is pasted on top of a damaged genuine seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, preventing any fraudulent activity. It is possible to make it impossible to escape detection.
Furthermore, the height of the feet of the electronic components protruding from the surface of the control board opposite to the surface on which the electronic components are mounted is set lower than the height of the joint between the first sticker attachment section and the second sticker attachment section. Therefore, when looking at the seam between the first and second sticker affixing areas from the side opposite to the first and second sticker affixing areas in the board case, the legs of the electronic components may distract your line of sight. It can be made unobstructed.

44. Original invention 44
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 44 Same problem as original invention 39.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 44 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment (A)) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
The board case is
a first cover (front cover 560) that covers a mounting surface side of the electronic component (530b) on the control board;
a second cover (rear cover 570) that covers a side opposite to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
Both the first cover and the second cover are transparent,
The first cover is provided with a first sticker pasting part (567),
The second cover is provided with a second sticker pasting part (574),
In a state where the first cover and the second cover are combined, the first seal sticking part and the second seal sticking part are formed so as to be continuous,
The first sticker pasting section and the second sticker pasting section are provided on one side of the board case,
A sealing sticker (581) is pasted so as to straddle the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part,
The seal is configured to leave a trace when removed,
The seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part is formed so as to be visible from the side surface of the board case opposite to the seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part,
The height of the parting line (576c) of the mold formed on the surface of the second cover when molding the second cover is based on the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board, and the height of the parting line (576c) of the mold is between the first seal sticking part and the second part. It is characterized by being set higher than the height of the seam with the sticker pasting part.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 44 According to the original invention, the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part are connected to each other from the side surface opposite to the joint between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part in the board case. Since the seam of the seal is visible, even if a fake seal is pasted on top of a damaged genuine seal, the condition of the damaged genuine seal can be visually confirmed, preventing any fraudulent activity. It is possible to make it impossible to escape detection.
In addition, since the height of the parting line formed on the surface of the second cover is set higher than the height of the seam between the first seal pasting part and the second seal pasting part, the first seal in the board case When looking at the seam between the first sticker pasting part and the second sticker pasting part from the side opposite to the pasting part and the second sticker pasting part, the parting line, the first sticker pasting part, and the second sticker pasting part It is possible to prevent the seams from overlapping with each other.

45. Original invention 45
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 45 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a board case housing a control board, and has an air hole provided on the side surface of the board case.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, it is known that a control board is housed in a board case.
Furthermore, it is known to provide a heat dissipation port on the side surface of the board case for dissipating heat inside the board case to the outside (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-271569).
Here, the control board housed in the board case is provided with a connector for harness connection to another control board or electronic device. Then, there is a risk that the electric current flowing through the harness or connector may cause these to generate heat and be damaged.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to prevent damage to a connector provided on a control board and a harness connected to this connector due to heat generation.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 45 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is characterized by being formed to reach a position corresponding to any height between.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 45 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall surrounding the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of this air hole is formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector. Therefore, the first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air discharged from the air hole, and thus damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.

46. Original invention 46
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 46 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 46 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the opposite side of the first connector in the second connector;
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position in the middle of the lead wire with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is characterized by being formed to reach a position corresponding to the height.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 46 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the air hole is set at the upper end of the first connector. The first connector is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between , the second connector and the lead wire can be cooled, and damage to the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire due to heat generation can be prevented.

47. Original invention 47
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 47 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 47 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
A plurality of lead wires (730a) extending from the side opposite to the first connector in the second connector,
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position in the middle of the lead wire with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to the height of
The plurality of lead wires include the lead wire for supplying power.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 47 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the air hole is set at the upper end of the first connector. The first connector is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between , the second connector and the lead wire can be cooled, and damage to the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire due to heat generation can be prevented.

48. Original invention 48
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 48 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 48 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
A plurality of lead wires (730a) extending from the side opposite to the first connector in the second connector,
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position in the middle of the lead wire with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to the height of
The plurality of lead wires are each separated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 48 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the air hole is set at the upper end of the first connector. The first connector is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between , the second connector and the lead wire can be cooled, and damage to the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire due to heat generation can be prevented.
Further, since the plurality of lead wires are separated from each other, air can easily flow between them, so that the plurality of lead wires can be efficiently cooled by the air discharged from the air holes.

49. Original invention 49
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 49 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 49 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (29th embodiment) is as follows:
A control board (sub-control board 540),
A board case (700) for accommodating the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board-side connector 540b),
an opening (716c) for exposing the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case;
A first air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening of the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
an opening range of the first air hole is formed so as to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector, based on a mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board;
A second air hole (air hole 716d) is provided in the side wall (upper wall 712) opposite to the side wall in which the first air hole is provided in the board case.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 49 According to the original invention, the first air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the first air hole is Since it was formed to extend from a position corresponding to any height between the top and bottom ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to any height between the top and bottom ends of the second connector, The first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air discharged from the first air hole, and as a result, damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.
Furthermore, the first connector can be efficiently cooled by the air flow between the first air hole and the second air hole.

50. Original invention 50
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 50 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 50 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
A first air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the opposite side of the first connector in the second connector;
The opening range of the first air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a midway point of the lead wire with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to either height,
A second air hole (air hole 716d) is provided in a side wall (upper wall 712) opposite to the side wall in which the first air hole is provided in the board case.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 50 According to the original invention, a first air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the first air hole is Since the air is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between the top and bottom ends of the first connector to a position corresponding to a height in the middle of the lead wire, the air is discharged from the first air hole. The first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire can be cooled by the air, and further damage to the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire due to heat generation can be prevented.
Moreover, the harness can be efficiently cooled by the air flow between the first air hole and the second air hole.

51. Original invention 51
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 51 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 51 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
A second connector (harness side connector 730b) provided at the tip of the harness (730) is connected to the first connector,
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the second connector with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to any height between
The board case is characterized in that a fan (cooling fan 717) for cooling electronic components mounted on the control board is provided.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 51 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the air hole is set at the upper end of the first connector. Since the air is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between the top and bottom ends of the second connector to a position corresponding to a height between the top and bottom ends of the second connector, the air is discharged from the air hole. The first connector and the second connector can be cooled by the air, and damage to the first connector and the second connector due to heat generation can be prevented.
Furthermore, since the board case is provided with a fan, the air sent by the fan can be blown out from the air holes, thereby efficiently cooling the first connector.

52. Original invention 52
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 52 Same problem as original invention 45.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 52 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
A control board (sub control board 540),
a board case (700) that houses the control board;
The control board is provided with a first connector (board side connector 540b),
An opening (716c) that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case is provided at a position corresponding to the first connector in the board case,
An air hole (716d) is provided in a side wall (side surface portion 716b) around the opening in the board case,
a second connector (harness side connector 730b) connected to the first connector;
a lead wire (730a) extending from the opposite side of the first connector in the second connector;
The opening range of the air hole is from a position corresponding to a height between the upper end and the lower end of the first connector to a position in the middle of the lead wire with reference to the mounting surface of the electronic components on the control board. It is formed to reach a position corresponding to the height of
The board case is characterized in that a fan (cooling fan 717) for cooling electronic components mounted on the control board is provided.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, an air hole is provided in the side wall around the opening that exposes the first connector to the outside of the board case, and the opening range of the air hole is set at the upper end of the first connector. The first connector is formed so that it extends from a position corresponding to a height between , the second connector and the lead wire can be cooled, and damage to the first connector, the second connector, and the lead wire due to heat generation can be prevented.
Furthermore, since the board case is provided with a fan, the air sent by the fan is blown out from the air holes, allowing the harness to be efficiently cooled.

53. Original invention 53
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 53 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is equipped with a board case that houses a control board, and in which two-dimensional codes are attached to electronic components on the board case and the control board, respectively. be.
In conventional game machines, it is known to attach a two-dimensional code that can identify model information etc. to a predetermined position of the game board for production management and the like (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-049997). Such a two-dimensional code is attached not only to the game board but also to the board case and electronic components on the control board.
However, when the two-dimensional code attached to the electronic component on the control board is read, the information contained therein is analyzed to determine the performance of the electronic component, the lottery, etc., and fraudulent activities that are misused for gaming are carried out. There is a risk of being exposed.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to prevent the misuse of two-dimensional code information attached to electronic components on a control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 53 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first original invention (30th embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
A predetermined electronic component (main CPU 530g) having a calculation function is mounted on the control board,
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A second two-dimensional code (551a) is attached to the board case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code is set smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code). (The color contrast with the background color in the first two-dimensional code is set smaller (lower) than the color contrast with the background color in the second two-dimensional code.)
It is characterized by
The second initial invention is, in the first initial invention,
The color contrast with the background color of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is lower than the color contrast with the background color of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case. It is characterized by
The third original invention is, in the first or second original invention,
The area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case.

(c) Effect of original invention 53 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a predetermined electronic component on the control board is read by the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case. Therefore, the information included in the first two-dimensional code can be prevented from being misused.

54. Original invention 54
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 54 Same problem as original invention 53.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 54 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first original invention (30th embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
A predetermined electronic component (main CPU 530g) having a calculation function is mounted on the control board,
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A second two-dimensional code (551a) is attached to the board case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code is set smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code, The color contrast with the background color in the first two-dimensional code is set smaller (lower) than the color contrast with the background color in the second two-dimensional code),
A predetermined member that prevents reading of the first two-dimensional code is disposed at a position facing the predetermined electronic component in the board case.
The second initial invention is, in the first initial invention,
The color contrast with the background color of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is lower than the color contrast with the background color of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case. It is characterized by
The third original invention is, in the first or second original invention,
The area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case.

(c) Effect of the original invention 54 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a specific electronic component on the control board is more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case, thereby preventing misuse of the information contained in the first two-dimensional code.

55. Original invention 55
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 55 Same problem as original invention 53.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 55 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first original invention (30th embodiment) is
A control board (main control board 530),
a board case (550) that houses the control board;
A predetermined electronic component (main CPU 530g) having a calculation function is mounted on the control board,
A first two-dimensional code (530j) is printed on the surface of the predetermined electronic component,
A sticker (management sticker 551) on which a second two-dimensional code (551a) is printed is pasted on the surface of the board case,
The first two-dimensional code is set to be more difficult to read than the second two-dimensional code (the area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code is set smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code). (The color contrast with the background color in the first two-dimensional code is set smaller (lower) than the color contrast with the background color in the second two-dimensional code.)
It is characterized by
The second initial invention is, in the first initial invention,
The color contrast with the background color of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is lower than the color contrast with the background color of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case. It is characterized by
The third original invention is, in the first or second original invention,
The area of the code area of the first two-dimensional code attached to the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the area of the code area of the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case.

(c) Effect of original invention 55 According to the original invention, the first two-dimensional code attached to a predetermined electronic component on the control board is read by the second two-dimensional code attached to the board case. Therefore, the information included in the first two-dimensional code can be prevented from being misused.

10, 10A slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp part)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 26 Upper frame lamp part 26a Upper frame lamp board 26b Upper frame lamp cover 26d Peripheral decoration part 27 Right frame lamp part 27a Right frame lamp board 27b Right frame lamp cover 27c Right frame Lamp base 27d Lens section 27e Light diffusion section 27f Textured section 27g Auxiliary lens section 27h Side wall section 27i Decoration section 28 Left frame lamp section 28a Left frame lamp board 28b Left frame lamp cover 28d Lens section 28e Light diffusion section 28f Textured section 29 Title display section 29a Title display board 29b Title display cover 29d Lens section 29e Light diffusion section 29f Grain processing section 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Loading sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal holder 48 Chute passage 49 Chute sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 50b Connector 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulked portion 57b Gate trace 57c Recessed portion 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion 58 Lower cover 58a Caulked portion 58b Gate trace 58c Boss 59a Insertion detection LED
59b Left stop operation detection LED
59c Mid-stop operation detection LED
59d Right stop operation detection LED
59e Start operation detection LED
59f Left index detection LED
59g Medium index detection LED
59h Right index detection LED
61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Prize determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-board case 88 Selection switch 88a Up switch 88b Down switch 88c Right switch 88d Left switch 89 Production switch 91 Production output control means 92 Brightness adjustment means 93 Light emission control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding section 103 Discharge Part 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case 130 Passage forming member 131 Upper medal reception opening 132 Return medal passage 133 Lower medal reception opening 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion opening 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 160a-160d LED (full color LED)
300 Relay board 300a to 300c Connector 500, 500A, 500B Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 Upper tray 507 Lower tray 508 Firing handle 510 Power supply board 511 Power switch 512 Firing board 513 Firing device 520 Dispensing control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door release switch 523 Frame opening switch 524 Dispensing device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board (main control means)
530a hole (screw hole)
530b~530c Electronic parts 530d Legs 530e Test terminals 530f Screws 530g Main CPU
530h Board-facing surface 530i Outward-facing surface 530j Two-dimensional code 530k Two-dimensional code 531 Special symbol display device 531a to 531h LED
532 Starting port 533 Starting port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a~539h Connector 539b'~539h' Connector foot 540 Sub control board 540a Sub CPU
540b connector (board side connector)
540c Board side terminal 540d Base 540e Standing part 541 Effect lamp (decorative lamp part)
542 Speaker 543 Image display device 544 Selection switch 544a Upward switch 544b Downward switch 544c Rightward switch 544d Leftward switch 545 Production switch 546 Brightness adjustment means 547 Light emission control means 550, 550A, 550B Board case 551 Management seal 551a Two-dimensional code 555 Lottery means 556 Symbol control means 557 Reservation means 560 Upper case (front cover, first cover)
560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Caulked part 563a to 563g Opening 564 Boss 565 Side wall 565a Upper wall 565b Lower wall 565c Right side wall 565d Left side wall 566 Front part 567 First seal pasting part 567a Front face 567b Right facing face 567c Seal Stopping recess 568a ～568b Flange 568c Parting line 569 Case side sticker pasting part 570 Lower case (rear cover, second cover)
570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 571a Upper wall 571b Lower wall 571c Right side wall 571d Left side wall 572 Caulking part 573 Rear part 574 Second seal pasting part 574a Rear facing face 574b Right facing face 574c Sealing boss 574d Sealing screw 575 Boss 576 a~576b flange 576c Parting line 581 Seal 581a Broken location 582 False seal 583 Seal cover 583a Front cover 583b Side cover 583c Rear cover 584 Bracket 584a Back plate 584b Upper edge 584c Lower edge 584d Right edge 584e Left edge Part 584f Bracket side sticker pasting part D1 to D11 Line of sight B to H, J to L Harness 610 Upper frame lamp part 611 Upper frame right lamp board 612 Upper frame left lamp board 613 Upper frame lamp cover 615 Title display part 615a Title display board 615b Title display cover 615c Title display base 615d Lens section 615e Light diffusion section 615f Textured section 615g Light diffusion sheet 616 Peripheral decoration section 620 Right frame lamp section 621 Right frame lamp board 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp section 631 Left frame lamp Board 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to 641k LED (full color LED)
642a to 642c Connector 650 Right base member 651 Upper frame right side board attachment part 652 Upper frame right side cover attachment part 653 Right frame board attachment part 654 Right frame cover attachment part 661a to 661e Board support rib 662a to 662b Cover fitting groove 670 Lens part 670a Light diffusion part 670b Textured part 681 Screw fixing boss 682a~682c Positioning boss 683a~683c Screw 684 Screw hole 685a~685b Positioning hole 686a~686b Fixing hole 687 Projecting part 688 Screw shaft 689a~689c Screw head 700, 700 A ~700H Board case 710 Front cover (first cover, upper case)
711 Front part 712 Upper wall 713 Lower wall 714 Right side wall 715 Left side wall 716 Connector recess 716a Bottom part 716b Side part 716c Opening 716d Air hole 717 Cooling fan 718 Fan intake hole 720 Rear cover (second cover, lower case)
730 Harness 730a Lead wire 730b Harness side connector 730c Harness side terminal

Claims (1)

a control board;
a board case for storing the control board;
A predetermined electronic component having a calculation function is mounted on the control board,
A first two-dimensional code is attached to the predetermined electronic component,
A first sticker on which a second two-dimensional code is printed is pasted on the surface of the board case,
A third two-dimensional code is attached to the surface of the control board,
The contrast between the color of the first two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the contrast between the color of the second two-dimensional code and the background color of the first seal,
The contrast between the color of the first two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the predetermined electronic component is smaller than the contrast between the color of the third two-dimensional code and the color of the surface of the control board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images